A90umanual VDF Sinee

User Manual of A90 Series Inverter
Preface
Thank you for choosing SINEE’s A90 series inverter.
Document No.: 31010180

Release time: 2020-5
Version: 101
The A90 series inverter is a high-reliability and small-sized inverter launched by

SINEE. It supports the three-phase AC asynchronous motor and permanent magnet
synchronous motor; a variety of international leading drive control technologies, such as the
vector VF (VVF) control and speed sensorless vector control (SVC); and speed output and
torque output.
Features of the A90 series inverter:

 No need for derating at the ambient temperature of 50°C;
 Small size, leading in the industry;
 Wide speed range and high control accuracy: VF/1:50; SVC/1:200; rated speed:
±0.2%;
 High load capacity in low-frequency band: VF/1Hz/150%, SVC/0.25Hz/150%;
 Perfect protections: protections against the overcurrent, overvoltage, overload,
overheating, etc.
Before using the A90 series inverter, please read this manual carefully and keep it
properly.
While connecting the inverter to motor for the first time, please select the motor
type (asynchronous or synchronous) correctly and set the motor nameplate
parameters: rated power, rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed,
motor connection, rated power factor, etc.
We are committed to continuously improving our products and product data, so the
data provided by us may be modified without prior notice.
For the latest changes and contents, please visit www.sinee.cn.
1
Safety Precautions
Safety definition: Safety precautions are divided into the following two categories in
this manual:
Danger: The dangers caused by nonconforming operations may include serious
injuries and even deaths.
Warning: The danger caused by nonconforming operations, including moderate or
minor injuries and equipment damage.

During the installation, commissioning and maintenance, please read this chapter carefully,
and follow the safety precautions herein. Our company will not be liable for any injury or
loss arising from nonconforming operations.
Precautions
Before installation:
Danger
1. Do not install the product in the case of water in the package or missing or damaged
components found in unpacking!
2. Do not install the product in the case of inconsistency between the actual product
name and identification on the outer package!
Warning
1. Handle the controller with care; otherwise, it may be damaged!

2. Never use the inverter damaged or with some parts missing; otherwise, injuries may be
caused!
3. Do not touch the components of the control system with your hands; otherwise, there
is a danger of static damage!
During installation:
Danger
1. Please install the inverter on a metal retardant object (e.g. metal) and keep it away
2
from combustibles; otherwise, a fire may be caused!
2. Do not loosen the fixing bolts of components, especially those with red marks!
Warning
1. Never make wire connectors or screws fall into the inverter; otherwise, the inverter
may be damaged!
2. Install the inverter in a place with little vibration and exposure to direct sunlight.
3. When the inverter is installed a relatively closed cabinet or space, pay attention to the
installation gap to ensure the effects of heat dissipation.
During wiring:
Danger
1. Follow the instructions in this manual, and appoint professional and electrical
engineering personnel to complete wiring; otherwise, unexpected dangers may be
caused!
2. The inverter and power supply must be separated by a circuit breaker
(recommendation: greater than or equal to and closest to twice the rated current);
otherwise, a fire may be caused!
3. Before wiring, make sure that the power supply is in the zero energy status; otherwise,
electric shock may be caused!
4. Never connect the input power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter.
Pay attention to the marks of wiring terminals, and connect wires correctly! Otherwise,
the inverter may be damaged!
5. Make the inverter grounded correctly and reliably according to the standards;
otherwise, electric shock and fire may be caused!
Warning
1. Make sure that the lines meet the EMC requirements and local safety standards. For
wire diameters, refer to the recommendations. Otherwise, an accident may occur!
2. Never connect the braking resistor directly between the DC bus and terminal.
Otherwise, a fire may be caused!
3. Tighten the terminals with a screwdriver of specified torque; otherwise, there is a risk
of fire.
4. Never connect the phase-shifting capacitor and LC/RC noise filter to the output circuit.
5. Do not connect the electromagnetic switch and electromagnetic contactor to the output
circuit. Otherwise, the overcurrent protection circuit of the inverter will be enabled. In
severe cases, the inverter may be subject to internal damage.
6. Do not dismantle the connecting cable inside the inverter; otherwise, internal damage
may be caused to the inverter.
3
Before power-on:
Danger
1. Make sure that the voltage level of the input power supply is consistent with the rated
voltage of the inverter; and the input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V,
W) of the power supply are connected correctly. Check whether there is short circuit in
the peripheral circuits connected to the inverter and whether all connecting lines are
tightened; otherwise, the inverter may be damaged!
2. The withstand voltage test has been performed to all parts of the inverter, so it is not
necessary to carry it out again. Otherwise, an accident may be caused!
Warning
1. The inverter must not be powered on until it is properly covered; otherwise, electric
shock may be caused!
2. The wiring of all peripheral accessories must be in line with the instructions in this
manual. All wires should be connected correctly according to the circuit connections in
this manual. Otherwise, an accident may occur!
After power-on:
Danger
1. Never touch the inverter and surrounding circuits with wet hands; otherwise, electric
shock may occur!
2. If the indicator is not ON and the keyboard has no response after power-on,
immediately turn off the power supply. Never touch the inverter terminals (R, S, T)
and the terminals on the terminal block with your hands or screwdriver; otherwise,
electric shock may be caused. Upon turning off the power supply, contact our
customer service personnel.
3. At the beginning of power-on, the inverter automatically performs a safety test to
external strong current circuits. Do not touch the inverter terminals (U, V, W) or motor
terminals; otherwise, electric shock may be caused!
4. Do not disassemble any parts of the inverter while it is powered on.
Warning
1. When parameter identification is required, please pay attention to the danger of injury
during motor rotation; otherwise, an accident may occur!
2. Do not change the parameters set by the inverter manufacturer without permission;
otherwise, the inverter may be damaged!
4
During operation:
Danger
1. Do not touch the cooling fan, radiator and discharge resistor to feel the temperature;
otherwise, burns may be caused!
2. Non-professional technicians must not test signals when the controller is in operation;
otherwise, personal injury or equipment damage may be caused!
Warning
1. Prevent any object from falling into the inverter in operation; otherwise, the inverter
may be damaged!
2. Do not start or stop the inverter by turning on or off the contactor; otherwise, the
inverter may be damaged!
During maintenance:
Danger
1. Never carry out repair and maintenance in the live state; otherwise, electric shock may
be caused!
2. Maintenance of the inverter must be carried out 10 min after the main circuit is
powered off and the display interface of the keyboard is disabled; otherwise, the
residual charge in the capacitor will do harm to the human body!
3. Personnel without professional training are not allowed to repair and maintain the
inverter; otherwise, personal injury or inverter damage may be caused!
4. The parameters must be set after the inverter is replaced. Plugs in all interfaces must
be operated in the power-off status!
5. The synchronous motor generates electricity while rotating. Inverter maintenance and
repair must be performed 10 min after the power supply is turned off and the motor
stops running; otherwise, electric shock may be caused!
Precautions
Motor insulation inspection
When the motor is used for the first time or after long-term storage or subject to regular
inspection, its insulation should be checked to prevent the inverter from damage caused by
failure of the motor winding insulation. During the insulation inspection, the motor must be
disconnected from the inverter. It is recommended to use a 500V megohmmeter. The
measured insulation resistance must not be less than 5 MΩ.
Thermal protection of motor

If the motor used does not match the rated capacity of the inverter, especially when the
rated power of the inverter is greater than that of the motor, the motor must be protected by
adjusting the motor protection parameters of the inverter or installing a thermal relay in
5
front of the motor.
Operation above power frequency

This inverter can provide the output frequency of 0.00Hz to 600.00Hz/0.0Hz to 3,000.0Hz.
When the motor needs to operate above the rated frequency, please consider the capacity of
the mechanical device.
About motor heat and noise

Since the inverter outputs PWM waves, containing some harmonics, the temperature rise,
noise and vibration of the motor will be slightly more than those in operation at the power
frequency.
Presence of voltage-dependent device or capacitor increasing the power factor on

output side
The inverter outputs PWM waves. If there is a capacitor increasing the power factor or
voltage-dependent resistor for lightning protection on the output side, the inverter may be
subjected to instantaneous overcurrent and even damage. Do not use these devices.
Use beyond rated voltage

The A90 series open-loop vector inverter should not be used beyond the allowable working
voltage range specified in this manual; otherwise, the components inside the inverter are
prone to damage. If necessary, use the appropriate step-up or step-down device for voltage
transformation.
Lightning impulse protection

The inverter of this series is equipped with a lightning overcurrent protector, which has
certain capabilities in self-protection against induced lightning. Where lightning strikes
occur frequently, a protective device should be added in front of the inverter.
Altitude and derating

In areas with an altitude of more than 1,000 m, where heat dissipation of the inverter is poor
due to thin air, derating is required (derating by 1% per 100 m altitude increase to
maximum 3,000 m; for ambient temperature above 40°C, derating by 1.5% per 1°C
temperature rise to maximum 50°C). Contact us for technical advice.
Precautions for scrapping of inverter

Burning of the electrolytic capacitors of the main circuit and printed circuit board may
result in explosion, and burning of plastic parts may generate toxic gases. Please dispose of
the controller as a kind of industrial waste.
6
Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................. 1
Safety precautions ........................................................................................... 2
Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 2
Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 5
Chapter 1 Overview ...................................................................................... 10

1.1 Model and Specification of A90 Series Inverter ....................................................... 10
1.2 Detailed Introduction to Running Status of A90 series Inverter ............................... 14
Chapter 2 Installation ................................................................................... 20

2.1 Product check ........................................................................................................... 20
2.2 Outline dimensions and installation dimensions ....................................................... 21
2.3 Installation Site Requirements and Management ...................................................... 24
2.4 Installation Direction and Space ............................................................................... 25
Chapter 3 Wiring........................................................................................... 27
3.1 Connection of Peripheral Device .............................................................................. 27
3.2 Wiring of Main Circuit Terminal .............................................................................. 28
3.3 Wiring of Control Circuit Terminal .......................................................................... 37
3.4 Extension wiring of keyboard ................................................................................... 46
3.5 Connection test ......................................................................................................... 46
Chapter 4 KEYBOARD OPERATIONS..................................................... 47

4.1 Keyboard Functions .................................................................................................. 47
4.2 Operation Mode of Keyboard with Digital Tube Display ......................................... 48
4.3 Fault Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 54
4.4 Operation Monitoring ............................................................................................... 54
4.5 Function of M.K Key................................................................................................ 54
4.6 Function of M.K Key M.K
....................................................................................... 54
4.7 Run/Stop ................................................................................................................... 54
7
Chapter 5 Trial run ....................................................................................... 55

5.1 Inverter Commissioning Process .............................................................................. 55
5.2 Confirmation before Power-on ................................................................................. 56
5.3 Inverter Status Confirmation after Power-on ............................................................ 56
5.4 Precautions for Application Macro Setting ............................................................... 56
5.5 Start and Stop Control .............................................................................................. 56
5.6 Common Process Parameters of Inverter .................................................................. 60
5.7 Motor Parameter Identification ................................................................................. 61
Chapter 6 Function Code Table ................................................................... 63

6.1 Description of Function Code Table ......................................................................... 63
6.2 Table of functional parameters .................................................................................. 65
Chapter 7 Function Code Details ............................................................... 114

7.1 Basic Function Parameter Group of F00 Group ..................................................... 114
7.2 Motor 1 parameter group of F01 group .................................................................. 132
7.3 Function Parameter Group of Input Terminal of F02 Group................................... 137
7.4 Function Parameter Group of Output Terminal of F03 Group ................................ 149
7.5 Start/Stop Control Parameter Group of F04 Group ................................................ 161
7.6 VF Control Parameter Group of F05 Group ........................................................... 168
7.7 Vector Control Parameter Group of F06 Group ...................................................... 174
7.8 Fault Protection Parameter Group of F07 Group .................................................... 181
7.9 Multi-segment Speed and Simple PLC Parameter Group of F08 Group ................ 188
7.10 PID Function Parameter Group of F09 Group ...................................................... 198
7.11 Communication Function Parameter Group of F10 Group ................................... 209
7.12 User-selected Parameter Group of F11 Group ...................................................... 213
7.13 Keyboard and Display Function Parameter Group of F12 Group ......................... 216
7.14 Torque Control Parameter Group of F13 Group ................................................... 223
7.15 Parameter Group of Motor 2 of F14 group ........................................................... 228
7.16 Auxiliary Function Parameter Group of F15 Group ............................................. 229
7.17 Virtual I/O Function Parameter Group of F17 Group ........................................... 241
7.18 Monitoring Parameter Group of F18 Group ......................................................... 245
8
7.19 Fault Record Parameter Group of F19 Group ....................................................... 248
Chapter 8 Motor Parameter Self-identification ....................................... 252

8.1 Motor Parameter Self-identification ....................................................................... 252
8.2 Precautions before Self-identification ..................................................................... 252
8.3 Self-identification Steps.......................................................................................... 253
Chapter 9 Fault/Warning Solutions........................................................... 255

9.1 Fault content ........................................................................................................... 255
9.2 Failure Analysis ...................................................................................................... 260
Chapter 10 Maintenance ............................................................................ 264

10.1 Daily Maintenance of Inverter .............................................................................. 264
10.2 Instructions for Inverter Warranty ......................................................................... 265
Chapter 11 Select accessories ..................................................................... 267

11.1 Braking Resistor ................................................................................................... 267
11.2 Braking unit .......................................................................................................... 268
11.3 Selection of Connecting Wires .............................................................................. 269
Chapter 12 MODBUS Communication Protocol ..................................... 271

12.1 Applicable scope ................................................................................................... 271
12.2 Interface mode ...................................................................................................... 271
12.3 Protocol Format .................................................................................................... 271
12.4 Protocol Description ............................................................................................. 294
12.5 Examples .............................................................................................................. 296
9
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1 Model and Specification of A90 Series Inverter

 Rated voltage of power supply: Three-phase AC 340-460V, three-phase/single-phase
AC 200V-240V;
 Applicable motor: Three-phase AC asynchronous motor and permanent magnet
synchronous motor.
The model and rated output current of A90 series inverter are as shown in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Model of A90 Series Inverter
Rated voltage Applicable Heavy-duty Light-duty

of power Model motor power rated output rated output
supply (kW) current (A) current (A)
Single-phase/ A90-2T2R8B 0.4 2.8 3.2

three-phase A90-2T4R8B 0.75 4.8 5.0
AC A90-2T8R0B 1.5 8 8.5
200V~240V A90-2T010B 2.2 10 11.5
A90-4T1R5B 0.4 1.5 1.8
A90-4T2R5B 0.75 2.5 3
A90-4T4R2B 1.5 4.2 4.6
A90-4T5R6B 2.2 5.6 6.5
A90-4T9R4B 4.0 9.4 10.5
A90-4T013B 5.5 13 15.7
A90-4T017B 7.5 17 20.5
A90-4T025B 11 25 28
Three-phase
A90-4T032B 15 32 36
AC
A90-4T038B 18.5 38 41.5
340~460V
A90-4T045B 22 45 49
A90-4T060 30 60 70
A90-4T075 37 75 85
A90-4T090 45 90 105
A90-4T110 55 110 134
A90-4T150 75 150 168
A90-4T176 90 176 200
A90-4T210 110 210 235
10
A90-4T253 132 253 290
A90-4T304 160 304 340
★ Correct selection of the inverter: The rated output current of the inverter is greater than
or equal to the rated current of the motor, taking into account the overload capacity.
★ The difference between the rated power of the inverter and that of the motor is usually
recommended not to exceed two power segments.
★ When a high-power inverter is provided with a low-power motor, the motor
parameters must be entered accurately to prevent the motor from damage as a result of
overload.
The technical specifications of the A90 series inverter are shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Technical Specifications of A90 Series Inverter
Items Specifications
Three-phase 340V-10% to 460V+10%,
Power Rated voltage of
Single phase 200V-10% to 240V+10%;
supply power supply
50-60Hz ±5%; voltage unbalance rate: <3%
Maximum output The maximum output voltage is the same as the input
voltage power voltage.
Rated output
Continuous output of 100% rated current
current
Heavy-duty model:
Output
150% rated current: 60s; 180% rated current: 10s; 200%
Maximum rated current: 2s
overload current Light-duty model:
120% rated current: 60s; 150% rated current: 10s; 180%
rated current: 2s
Drive mode V/F control (VVF); speed sensorless vector control (SVC)
Input mode Frequency (speed) input, torque input
Basic
Start and stop Keyboard, control terminal (two-line control and three-line
control
control mode control), communication
functions
Frequency control
0.00~600.00Hz
range
11
Input frequency Digital input: 0.01Hz/0.1Hz

resolution Analog input: 0.1% of maximum frequency
Speed control
1:50 (VVF), 1:200 (SVC)
range
Speed control
Rated synchronous speed ±0.2%
accuracy
Acceleration and
0.01s to 600.00s / 0.1s to 6,000.0s / 1s to 60,000s
deceleration time
Voltage/frequency Rated output voltage: 20% to 100%, adjustable
characteristics Reference frequency: 1Hz to 600Hz/3,000Hz
Fixed torque boost curve
Torque boost
Any V/F curve is acceptable.
150%/1Hz (VVF)
Starting torque
150%/0.25Hz (SVC)
Torque control
±8% rated torque (SVC)
accuracy
Self-adjustment of When the input voltage changes, the output voltage will
output voltage basically remain unchanged.
Automatic current Output current is automatically limited to avoid frequent
limit overcurrent trips.
Braking frequency: 0.01 to maximum frequency
DC braking Braking time: 0 - 30S
Braking current: 0% to 150% rated current
Signal input
Communication, multi-speed, analog, etc.
source
Reference power
10V/20mA
Input and supply
output Terminal control
24V/100mA
function power
Digital input 51)-channel digital multi-function input:
12
terminal
2-channel analog inputs:
Analog input One channel (AI1) voltage source: 0 to 10V input
terminal One channel (AI2): 0 to 10V input voltage or 0 to 20mA
input current optional;
Multi-function output of one open collector and one relay.
Digital output Maximum output current of the collector: 50 mA;
terminal Relay contact capacity: 250VAC/3A or 30VDC/1A,
EA-EC: normally open; EB-EC: normally closed
M1: 0-10V multi-function analog output terminal, with the
Analog output
maximum output current of 20mA
terminal
M21): 0-10V/0-20mA multi-function analog output terminal
The LED digital tube displays relevant information about
Keyboard LED display
the inverter.
Protective Short circuit, overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, phase
Protection
function loss, overload, overheat, load loss, external fault, etc.
Indoor, at an altitude of less than 1 km, free of dust,
Location
corrosive gases and direct sunlight
Applicable
-10°C to +50°C, 5% to 95%RH (no condensation)
environment
Use
Vibration Less than 0.5g
conditions
Storage
-40°C ~+70°C
environment
Installation
Wall-mounted or installed in the cabinet
method
Levels of protection IP20/IP21 (with plastic baffle)
Cooling method Forced air cooling
13
1.2 Detailed Introduction to Running Status of A90 series Inverter

1.2.1 Working status of inverter
The working status of A90 series inverter is divided into: parameter setting status,
normal running status, jog running status, self-learning running status, stop status, jog stop
status and fault status.
 Parameter setting status: After being powered on and initialized, the inverter will
be in the standby status with no fault or start command, and have no output.
 Normal running status: Upon receiving a valid start command (from the keyboard,
control terminal and communication), the inverter will have the output based on
the set input requirements, driving the motor to rotate.
 Jog running status: This is enabled by the keyboard, external terminal or
communication, driving the motor to rotate at the jog input speed.
 Self-learning running status: This is enabled by the keyboard, detecting relevant
parameters of the motor in the stationary or rotating status.
 Stop status: It is a process for the output frequency to decrease to zero according
to the set deceleration time in the case of invalid operating commands.
 Jog stop status: It is a process for the output frequency to decrease to zero
according to the jog deceleration time in the case of invalid jog operating
commands.
 Fault status: Refer to the inverter status in the case of each fault.
1.2.2 Running mode of inverter
The running mode of the inverter refers to the control law of the inverter to drive the
motor to rotate at the required speed and torque. The running mode includes:
 General open-loop space vector control-VVF control: suitable for applications
where the speed is not changing fast and there are not high requirements for the
accuracy of rotating speed, and most AC motor drives.
 Speed sensorless vector control-SVC control: advanced speed estimation
algorithm, involving open-loop vector control and high control accuracy but no
encoder.
1.2.3 Set mode of inverter
The set mode of the inverter refers to the physical quantity that is taken as the
controlled target when the inverter drives a motor.
 Speed setting mode with the motor speed as controlled target
14
Digital setting, analog input setting, high-speed pulse input setting, communication
setting, digital potentiometer setting, process PID setting, simple PLC setting or
multi-segment speed setting can be performed separately or in a mixed manner. Fig. 1-1 to
Fig. 1-4 detail various input modes of the A90 series inverter by speed setting.
Setting of main frequency
Limit of the set frequency: F00.16; direction: F00.21

source A
Synthetic frequency gain of main and auxiliary

0: synthetic frequency of
Setting of auxiliary frequency main and auxiliary
source B
Analog adjustment options

channels
0 Setting of main and auxiliary
Options of frequency
1 operations 0
2 Setting of main frequency source 1: AI1 * synthetic
F00.06
F00.13
source
A
Frequency N 1 frequency of main and
channels
F00.12
3
source switching Y Setting of auxiliary frequency auxiliary channels
etc.
source B
4 DI:26
Setting of main frequency 2
Frequency source N source A
5 2: AI2 * synthetic
switching
Y Setting of main and auxiliary frequency of main and
DI:26 operations auxiliary channels
Frequency source Setting of auxiliary frequency
switching N source B
DI:26 Y Setting of main and auxiliary
operations
Fig. 1-1 Schematic Diagram of Speed Input Mode

As shown in Fig. 1-1, speed setting of A90 series inverter is mainly divided into the
setting of main frequency source A (referred to as “main A”), setting of auxiliary frequency
source B (referred to as “auxiliary B”), and setting of main and auxiliary operations. The
final settings are made by simply adjustment and limitation (e.g. upper frequency limit,
maximum frequency limit, direction limit, frequency hopping limit). For details, see Fig.
1-2 to Fig. 1-4.
15
0: digital frequency UP/DOWN

Speed of the nth setting F00.07 setting
segment
F08.00～F08.14 1: AI1*F00.16
n=1,2,…,15 0
1 2: AI2*F00.16
Options of main 2
Main + Gain of
Multi-segment frequency source 4: keyboard +
frequency None 3 main
speed terminal 0 A potentiometer
switching frequency
DI: 14～11 F00.04 4
DI: 51～56 + source
5 + F00.10
6: SCI*F00.16
Valid F00.07
AI1 7: SCI
AI2
Communication
Fig. 1-2 Schematic diagram of Setting of Main Frequency Source A

As shown in Fig. 1-2, it is necessary to comprehensively consider the digital terminal
setting and its status during the setting of the main frequency source A. Depending on the
terminal settings, multi-segment speed operation can be performed or digital, analog, pulse
or communication settings can be applied directly.
If the terminals are unavailable, the current setting channel is determined by the
function code F00.04, and final settings are obtained through UP/DOWN setting
calculation.
16
0: digital frequency setting F00.07
1: AI1*F00.16
2: AI2*F00.16
0
1
2 4: keyboard potentiometer
Gain of
Options of auxiliary 4 auxiliary
6 6: SCI*F00.16 frequency
frequency source B
F00.05 7 source
8 7: SCI F00.11
10
11 8: digital potentiometer
10: process PID
11: simple PLC
Fig. 1-3 Schematic Diagram of Setting of Auxiliary Frequency Source B
As shown in Fig. 1-3, the current setting channel is determined directly by the function
code F00.05 during the setting of the auxiliary frequency source B, and the process PID and
simple PLC can be involved in the setting.
0: main A +
auxiliary B
Gain of
0 1: main A -
Options of main main and
1 auxiliary B
and auxiliary auxiliary
operation 2 frequency
2: max (main A, source
F00.08
3 auxiliary B) F00.12
3: min (main A,
auxiliary B)
Fig. 1-4 Schematic Diagram of Setting of Main and Auxiliary Operations
As shown in Fig. 1-4, main and auxiliary operations are divided into four types, in
which main and auxiliary settings are valid.
 Torque setting mode with the motor current as controlled target

The digital setting, analog input setting, high-speed pulse input setting, communication
setting, digital potentiometer setting or multi-segment torque setting can be applied. Fig.
1-5 details the input modes of A90 series inverter based on the torque setting.
17
Compensation
Torque of the nth 0: digital torque setting for dynamic
segment F13.02 and static
F13.03～F13.05 friction
n=1,2,3
0 1: AI1*F13.02
1 +
Multi-segment Options of torque + Limit of the
torque terminal 0 setting source 2 2: AI2*F13.02 set torque:
DI: 18～17 F13.01 4 Size and
+ + direction
6 4: VP*F13.02
6: SCI*F13.02
Fig. 1-5 Schematic Diagram of Torque Input Mode

★: The jog speed setting mode is superior to other setting modes. That is, when the jog
button M.K of the keyboard is pressed or the control terminals FJOG and RJOG are
enabled, the inverter will automatically change to the jog speed setting mode, regardless of
the current setting mode.
1.2.4 Operation method of inverter
The operation method of the inverter refers to the operating conditions for the inverter
to enable the running status. It includes: keyboard operation, terminal operation and
communication operation. Terminal operation is divided into RUN, F/R two-line control
and RUN, F/R, Xi (i=1-5) three-line control (change the definition of Xi to three-line
operation stop control). The control logic of this operation method is shown in Fig. 1-6.
18
Running Running
K1 K2 K1 K2
command 24V command 24V
0 0 Reverse PLC 0 0 Stop PLC

K1 K1
RUN RUN
0 1 Forward 0 1 Forward
Xi Xi
1 0 Stop K2 1 0 Reverse K2
F/R F/R
1 1 Stop COM 1 1 Stop COM
0: closed 1: disconnected 0: closed 1: disconnected
(a) Two-line running mode 0 (F00.03=0) (b) Two-line running mode 1 (F00.03=1)
Run
24V RUN
button 24V
Forward PLC Stop

RUN Xi PLC
button button
RUN RUN
Reverse F/R
F/R button Xi Xi
Stop 1 Forward
Xi
button F/R F/R
COM 0 Reverse COM
0: closed 1: disconnected
(c) Three-line running mode 0 (F00.03=2) (d) Three-line running mode 1 (F00.03=3)
Fig. 1-6 Control Logic Diagram of Terminal Operation
19
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Product check
Danger
 Never install the inverter damaged or with some parts missing.

Otherwise, injuries may be caused.
When you get the product, please check it according to Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Check Items
Item to be confirmed How to confirm
Check whether the product is Check the nameplate on the side face of the inverter.
consistent with the order.
Check whether any part is Check the overall appearance for damage caused in
damaged. transportation.
Check whether the fastened parts If necessary, check the product with a screwdriver.
(e.g. screws) are loose.
In the case of any defect, contact the agent or our Marketing Department.
 Nameplate
 Description of inverter model
20
2.2 Outline dimensions and installation dimensions

A90 series inverters involve 23 specifications, two types of appearance and ten
installation sizes, as shown in 错误!未找到引用源。 and Table 2-2
Ød
(a) Appearance of A90-4T1R5B to A90-4T045B inverters
21
Ød
(b) Appearance of A90-4T060 to A90-4T304

24
72 62 Ø 3.5
4
56
98
73 85
(c) Appearance of A90-4T060KEY2 external keyboard
22
(d) Appearance of A90-4T060KEY3 external keyboard

Fig. 2-1 Outline Dimensions of A90 Series Inverter and Keyboard
Table 2-2 Outline and Installation Dimensions of A90 Series Inverter

Specifications W W1/W2 H H1 H2 D D1 d
A90-2T2R8B
75 65 142 133 142 141 67 4.5
A90-2T4R8B
A90-2T8R0B
92 76/81 171 162 162 132 82 4.5
A90-2T010B
A90-4T1R5B 75 65 162 153 142 108 29 4.5
A90-4T2R5B
75 65 142 133 142 141 67 4.5
A90-4T4R2B
A90-4T5R6B
92 76/81 171 162 162 132 82 4.5
A90-4T9R4B
A90-4T013B
109 94/99 218 208 207 153 102 5.5
A90-4T017B
A90-4T025B
130 107/119 261 250 250 163 128 5.5
A90-4T032B
A90-4T038B 190 167/177 293 282 280 180 143 6
23
A90-4T045B
A90-4T060
245 210/200 425 410 390 188 137 7.5
A90-4T075
A90-4T090
300 266 491 473 450 206 168 9
A90-4T110
A90-4T150 335 286 491 471 450 206 170 9
A90-4T176
335 286 623 601 570 293 248 11
A90-4T210
A90-4T253
400 330 743 723 690 300 246 13
A90-4T304
2.3 Installation Site Requirements and Management
Attention
1. When carrying the inverter, hold its bottom.

If you hold the panel only, the body main fall to hit your feet.
2. Install the inverter on non-flammable boards (e.g. metal).
If the inverter is installed on a flammable object, a fire may occur.
3. When two or more inverters are installed in one control cabinet, please install a
cooling fan and keep the air temperature below 50℃ at the air inlet.
Overheating may cause fire and other accidents.
2.3.1 Installation site

The installation site should meet the following conditions:
1. The room is well ventilated.
2. The ambient temperature is -10°C to 50°C.
3. The controller should be free from high temperature and humidity (less than
90%RH) or rainwater and other liquid droplets.
4. Please install the inverter on a fire-retardant object (e.g. metal). Never install it
on flammable objects (e.g. wood).
24
5. No direct sunlight.
6. There should be no flammable or corrosive gas and liquid.
7. There should be no dust, oily dust, floating fibers or metal particles.
8. The installation foundation should be secured and vibration-free.
9. Avoid electromagnetic interference and keep the controller away from
interference sources.
2.3.2 Environment temperature
In order to improve the operational reliability, please install the inverter in a
well-ventilated place. When it is used in a closed cabinet, a cooling fan or cooling air
conditioner should be installed to keep the ambient temperature below 50°C.
2.3.3 Preventive measures
Take protective measures to the inverter during installation to prevent metal fragments
or dust generated in drilling and other processes from falling into the inverter. Remove the
protection after installation.
2.4 Installation Direction and Space

The A90-4T4R2B inverters and above are equipped with a cooling fan for forced air
cooling. To ensure good cyclic cooling effects, the inverter must be installed in a vertical
direction, and sufficient spaces must be reserved between the inverter and adjacent objects
or baffles (walls). Refer to Fig. 2-2.
25
Fig. 2-2 Inverter Installation Direction and Space
26
Chapter 3 Wiring
3.1 Connection of Peripheral Device

The standard connection between the A90 series inverter and peripheral devices is
shown in Fig. 3-1.
Fig. 3-1 Connection of Inverter and Peripheral Devices

27
3.2 Wiring of Main Circuit Terminal

3.2.1 Composition of main circuit terminal
The main circuit terminal of the A90 series inverter consists of the following parts:
 Three-phase AC power input terminals: R, S, T
 Earth terminal:
 DC bus terminals: 、
 Terminals of dynamic braking resistor: PB,
 Motor terminals: U, V, W
The layout of main circuit terminals is shown in Fig, 3-2.
PB + _ R S T U V W
a) Schematic Diagram of Small- and Medium-power Main Circuit Terminals
Some power values vary slightly.
R S T + - U V W
b) Schematic Diagram of High-power Main Circuit Terminals (with slight variations in

some power values)
Fig. 3-2 Schematic Diagram of Main Circuit Terminal Layout
28
3.2.2 Functions of main circuit terminals
The functions of the main circuit terminals of the A90 series inverter are shown in
Table 3-1. Please connect wires correctly according to the corresponding functions.
Table 3-1 Functions of Main Circuit Terminals
Terminal label Function description
AC power input terminal, connected to three-phase AC power
R, S, T
supply
AC output terminal of the inverter, connected to three-phase
U, V, W
AC motor
Positive and negative terminals of the internal DC bus,
connected to external braking unit
Braking resistor terminal, with one end of the braking resistor
, PB
connected to and the other end to PB
DC reactor terminal, for the external DC reactor of A90-4T176
P,
and above
Grounding terminal, connected to earth
3.2.3 Standard wiring diagram of main circuit

The standard wiring diagram of the main circuit of the A90 series inverter is shown in
Fig. 3-3.
 A90-4T1R5B to A90-4T045B  A90-4T060 to A90-4T304
Braking resistor Braking resistor (optional)

(optional)
Braking unit (optional)
PB
R U R U
S V M S V M
T W T W
Fig. 3-3 Standard Wiring of Main Circuit
29
3.2.4 Input side wiring of main circuit
3.2.4.1 Installation of circuit breaker
Install the air circuit breaker (MCCB) corresponding to the inverter between the power
supply and input terminal.
 The MCCB capacity should be 1.5-2 times the rated current of the inverter.
 The time characteristics of the MCCB must meet the requirements for overheat
protection (150% rated current/1 minute) of the inverter.
 When the MCCB is used with multiple inverters or other devices, connect the
fault output relay contact of the inverter in series to the power contactor coil, as
shown in Fig. 3, to disconnect the power supply according to the fault signal.
MCCB
R
Inverter
S
T
MC
EB Fault relay
OFF ON contact
EC
MC
Fig. 3-4 Connection of Input Circuit Breaker
3.2.4.2 Installation of leakage circuit breaker

Since the inverter outputs high-frequency PWM signals, a high-frequency leakage
current will be generated. Please use the dedicated leakage circuit breaker with the current
sensitivity above 30mA. If an ordinary leakage circuit breaker is used, use a leakage circuit
breaker with the current sensitivity above 200mA and action time of more than 0.1s.
3.2.4.3 Installation of electromagnetic contactor

Connect the electromagnetic contactor that matches the power of the inverter, as
shown in Fig. 3-4.
 Do not control the operation and stop of the inverter via the electromagnetic
contactor on the incoming line side. Frequent use of this method is an important
cause of damage to the inverter. The frequency of operation and stop of the
30
electromagnetic contactor on the incoming line side must not exceed once every
30 min.
 After the power supply is restored, the inverter will not run automatically.
3.2.4.4 Connection with terminal block

The phase sequence of the input power supply is unrelated to that (R, S, T) of the
terminal block, so that the terminals of the input power supply can be connected arbitrarily.
3.2.4.5 Installation of AC reactor

When a large-capacity (above 600KVA) power transformer is connected, or the input
power supply is connected to a capacitive load, a high inrush current will be generated,
which will cause damage to the rectifier part of the inverter. In this case, please connect a
three-phase AC reactor (optional) to the input side of the inverter. This will not only
suppress the peak current and voltage, but also improve the power factor of the system.
3.2.4.6 Installation of surge suppressor

When an inductive load (electromagnetic contactor, solenoid valve, solenoid coil,
electromagnetic circuit breaker, etc.) is connected near the inverter, please install a surge
suppressor.
3.2.4.7 Installation of noise filter on power supply side

The noise filter is used to suppress the noise that invades the inverter from the power
cable, and the impact of inverter noise on the power grid.
 Use a dedicated noise filter for the inverter. Ordinary noise filters do not have
good effects, so they are not used usually.
 The correct and incorrect installations of the noise filter are shown in Fig. 3-5
and Fig. 3-6.
31
MCCB
Dedicated
noise Inverter IM
filter
EMC
Other
control
devices
Fig. 3-5 Correct Installation of Noise Filter
MCCB
Ordinary
noise Inverter IM
filter
Other
control
devices
(a)
MCCB
Inverter IM
Ordinary Other
noise control
filter devices
(b)
Fig. 3-6 Incorrect Installation of Noise Filter
3.2.5 Output side wiring of main circuit

3.2.5.1 Wiring of inverter and motor
Connect the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter to those (U, V, W) of the motor.
During operation, check whether the motor rotates forward when a forward rotation
command is sent. If the motor rotates reversely, exchange any two wires of the output
terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter.
32
3.2.5.2 Prohibition of connection of the power cable to output terminal
Never connect the power cable to output terminal. When the voltage is applied on the
output terminal, the internal components of the inverter may be damaged.
3.2.5.3 Prohibition of short circuit or grounding of output terminal
Do not directly touch the output terminals, or short-circuit the output cable and
inverter housing; otherwise, electric shock and short circuit may be caused. In addition,
never short-circuit the output cable.
3.2.5.4 Prohibition of use of phase-shifting capacitor
Do not connect a phase-shifting advanced electrolytic capacitor or LC/RC filter to the
output circuit; otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.
3.2.5.5 Prohibition of use of electromagnetic switch
Do not connect the electromagnetic switch or electromagnetic contactor to output
circuit. Otherwise, such devices will enable overcurrent and overvoltage protection and
even damage the internal components of the inverter in severe cases.
When an electromagnetic contactor is used to switch the PF power supply, make sure
that switching is not performed until the inverter and motor are shut down.
3.2.5.6 Installation of noise filter on output side
Connect a noise filter on the output side of the inverter to reduce inductive interference
and radio interference.
 Inductive interference: Electromagnetic induction will lead to noise of the
signal line and malfunction of controls.
 Radio interference: The high-frequency electromagnetic waves emitted by the
inverter itself and cables will cause interference to nearby radio devices and
noise in signal reception.
 The noise filter installation on the output side is shown in Fig. 3-7.
33
MCCB
Noise
Inverter IM
filter
Transmission
interference
Signal lines Radio

Control device
device
Fig. 3-7 Noise Filter Installation on Output Side
3.2.5.7 Solution to inductive interference

To suppress the inductive interference on the output side, all output cables can be laid
in the grounded metal tubes, in addition to the aforesaid installation of the noise filter.
When the distance between the output cable and signal line is greater than 30 cm, the
impact of inductive interference will decrease significantly, as shown in Fig. 3-8.
MCCB Metal tube
Inverter IM
> 30cm
Signal lines
Control
device
Fig. 3-8 Solution to Inductive Interference
3.2.5.8 Solution to RF interference

The input cable, output cable and inverter itself generates RF interference, which can
be reduced by installing noise filters on the input and output sides and shielding the inverter
body with an iron box, as shown in Fig. 3-9.
34
Iron box
MCCB Metal tube
Noise Noise
Inverter IM
filter filter
Fig. 3-9 Solution to RF Interference
3.2.5.9 Wiring distance between inverter and motor

The longer the wiring distance between the inverter and motor, the higher the carrier
frequency and the higher harmonic leakage current in the cable. This will adversely affect
the inverter and nearby devices. Refer to Table 3 to adjust the carrier frequency and reduce
the high-frequency leakage current.
 When the motor wiring distance exceeds 50 m, connect the output terminals (U, V, W) of
the inverter with the dedicated AC reactor (phase capacity: the same as that of the inverter)
for inverter output.
Table 3-2 Wiring Distance and Carrier Frequency between Inverter and Motor
Wiring distance between inverter and <50m <100m >100m
motor
Carrier frequency Below 10kHz Below 8kHz Below 5kHz
Function code F00.23 10.0 8.0 5.0
3.2.6 Cable and screw dimensions of main circuit
The cable and screw dimensions of the main circuit are shown in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Cable Dimensions and Terminal Screw Specifications
Frequency Wire diameter Wire type
Terminal Tightening
converter Terminal Symbol (mm²)
screw Torque (N.m)
model
A90-2T2R8B
A90-2T4R8B
A90-4T1R5B M3 0.5~0.7
A90-4T2R5B 1.5
PB, +, -, R, S, T, U, V, W
A90-4T4R2B
A90-2T8R0B
A90-2T010B 4
A90-4T5R6B
A90-4T9R4B M4 1.5~2.0
35
A90-4T013B 6
A90-4T017B
A90-4T025B
A90-4T032B 10 750V
M5 3.0~4.0 wire
A90-4T038B
PB, +, -, R, S, T, U, V, W,
16
A90-4T045B
A90-4T060 25
M6 4.0~5.0
A90-4T075 25
A90-4T090 R, S, T, +, -, U, V, W 35
M8 9.0~10.0
A90-4T110 35
A90-4T150 60
A90-4T176 60
R, S, T, P, +, -, U, V, W M6 4.0~5.0
A90-4T210 90
A90-4T253 M10 17.0~22.0 90

R, S, T, P, +, -, , U, V, W 120
A90-4T304
Note: 1: The specifications of the wire are dependent on its voltage drop. Under
normal circumstances, the voltage drop calculated by the following formula should be
less than 5V.
Voltage drop = 3 * wire resistivity (Ω/KM) * wire length (m) * rated current (A) *
10-3
2: If the wire is in a plastic slot, it should be enlarged by one level.
3: The wire should be crimped to the round terminal suitable for the wire and terminal
screw.
4: The specification of the ground wire should be the same as that of the power cable
smaller than 16mm2. When the power cable is 16mm2 or larger, the ground wire should
not be smaller than 1/2 of the power cable.
36
3.2.7 Ground wire
 The ground terminal must be grounded.
 Pay special attention to the third type of grounding (grounding resistance: less
than 10Ω).
 The ground wire must not be shared by the welding machine and power
devices.
 Select the ground wire according to the technical specifications for electrical
equipment, and minimize the length of the ground wire connected to the
grounding point.
 Where two or more inverters are used, the ground wires must not form a loop.
The correct and incorrect grounding methods are shown in Fig. 3-10.
Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter
Fig. 3-10 Connection of Ground Wire

3.2.8 Installation and wiring of braking resistor and braking unit
Refer to 0 for the selection and wiring of the braking resistor and braking unit.
For the inverter with a built-in braking unit, connect the braking resistor between the
inverter terminal (+) and PB terminal. For the inverter with no built-in braking unit, connect
the terminals (+ and -) of the braking unit to those (+ and -) of the DC bus of the inverter,
and the braking resistor to the PB+ and PB- terminals of the braking unit. Refer to the user
manual of the BR100 braking unit for more information.
3.3 Wiring of Control Circuit Terminal
37
3.3.1 Composition of control circuit terminal
AI2 485
S2 V S1 ON
I OFF
RJ45
10V AI1 AI2 M1 GND A+ A- 8 1 EA EB EC

24V
COM Y1 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 M2 KeyBoard
Fig. 3-11 Layout of Control Circuit Terminals

3.3.2 Functions and wiring of control circuit terminals
Table 3-4 Functions of Control Circuit Terminals
Terminal
Type Terminal name Terminal function description
label
+10V power Supply +10V power to external devices.
10V-GND
supply Maximum output current: 20mA
Auxiliary Supply +24V power to external devices. It is
power usually used as the working power supply for
+24V power
supply 24V-COM1) digital input and output terminals and also the
supply
power supply for external devices. Maximum
output current: 100mA
Analog input Input voltage range: DC 0-10V; input
AI1-GND
terminal 1 impedance: 1MΩ
Input range: DC 0-10V/0-20mA. The
Analog
voltage/current mode is selected via the switch
input Analog input
AI2-GND S2 on the control panel.
terminal 2
Input impedance: 1MΩ in the voltage mode
and 250Ω in the current mode
Digital Multi-function Common terminal: COM
X1-COM1)
input port input terminal 1 Input impedance: 5.1kΩ
38
Multi-function
X2-COM1)
input terminal 2
Multi-function
X3-COM1)
input terminal 3
Multi-function
X4-COM1)
input terminal 4
Multi-function
X5-COM1)
input terminal 5
Analog output
M1-GND Output range: DC 0-10V
Analog terminal 1
output Analog output
M2-GND2) Output range: DC 0-10V/0-20mA
terminal 1
Multi- Open output Open output of collector
function Y1-COM terminal of Maximum output voltage: DC24V
output collector Output current: 50mA
Relay R1: Relay output EA-EC: Normally open
output EA-EB-EC terminal EB-EC: Normally closed
A+ RS-485 positive terminal of 485 differential signal
Communi
communication
cation A- negative terminal of 485 differential signal
terminal
Note: 1) For the A90-4T017B model and below, connect the terminals COM and GND
internally.
3.3.3 Wiring of analog input terminal

3.3.3.1 Wiring of AI1 and AI2 terminals with analog voltage signal:
When the AI2 terminal is in the mode of analog voltage signal input, the switch S2 on
the terminal block is set to the voltage mode, as shown in Fig. 3-12.
When the analog voltage input signal is powered by an external power supply, the
wiring of terminals AI1 and AI2 is shown in Fig. 3-12-a.
When the analog voltage input signal is sent by a potentiometer, the terminals AI1 and
AI2 are connected as shown in Fig. 3-12-b.
39
(a)
(b)
Fig. 3-12 AI1/AI2 Terminal Wiring Diagram
3.3.3.2 Wiring of the input analog current signal of AI2 terminal:

When the AI2 terminal is in the mode of analog current signal input, the switch S2 on the terminal block
is set to the current mode.
Fig. 3-13 Wiring Diagram of External Current Source and AI2 Terminal
3.3.4 Wiring of multi-function input terminal

Among the multi-function input terminals of the A90 series inverter, the common terminal is COM (the
terminals COM and GND are connected internally for the A90-4T017B model and below). The digital input
terminal and COM are valid when short-circuited and invalid when disconnected (NPN mode).
40
3.3.5 Wiring of multi-function output terminals
The multi-function output terminal Y1 is powered on by the internal 24V power supply of the inverter or
an external power supply, as shown in Fig. 3-14:
a: Use of internal power supply b: Use of external power supply
Fig. 3-14 Wiring of Multi-function Output Terminals
Note:
(1) An anti-parallel diode must be included in the relay wire package. The absorption circuit components
should be installed at both ends of the coil of the relay or contactor.
(2) For the A90-4T017B model and below, the terminals COM and GND should be connected internally.
3.3.6 Wiring of analog output terminals

The analog output terminals (M1 and M2) are connected with external analog meters
to represent physical quantities. The dial switch is set to the output current mode (0-20mA)
or (0-10V). M1 corresponds to S3, and M2 corresponds to S4 (for the inverter of 90KW
and power, M1 corresponds to S2, and M2 corresponds to S3). M1 only outputs the voltage
(0-10V). Wiring of the dial switch and terminals is as follows:
M2 is for analog
V voltage output
M1 M2 is for analog
Inverter S3/S2
current output
M2 M2 is for analog
V
I voltage output
GND
S4/S3
41
M2 is for analog
current output
Note: 1: For the inverter of 90KW and above, the switch S2 is unavailable and M1
is for analog voltage output.
3.3.7 Wiring of 485 communication terminals

The communication terminals A+ and A- are the RS485 communication interfaces of
the inverter. The online control of the host (PC or PLC controller) and inverter is performed
through the connection and communication with the host. The connection of the RS485 and
RS485/RS232 adapters to A90 series inverter is shown in Fig. 3-15, Fig. 3-16 and Fig.
3-17.
 Direct connection of the RS485 terminal of a single inverter to the host for
communication:
Inverter A+ +
interface of host
communication
terminal
RS485
-
A- terminal
OFF
GND GND
S5/S1
Fig. 3-15 Communication Terminal Wiring of Single Inverter

Note: 1: The resistor switch S5 is used for the 458 communication terminal of the
inverter of 75KW and below, and S1 for the inverter of 90KW and above.
 Connection of the RS485 terminals of multiple inverters to host for
communication:
42
RS485
communication
interface of host
+ -
terminal terminal GND
A+ A- GND A+ A- GND A+ A- GND A+ A- GND
OFF OFF OFF

ON
Inverter S5/S1 Inverter S5/S1 Inverter S5/S1 Inverter S5/S1
Fig. 3-16 Wiring of Communication Terminals of Multiple Inverters

 Connection to the host via RS485/RS232 adapter for communication:
Inverter A+ RS232
RS485/RS232 communication
A- adapter interface of
OFF host
GND
S5/S1
Fig. 3-17 Communication Terminal Wiring
3.3.8 Wire and screw dimensions of control circuit

 In order to reduce the interference and attenuation of the control signal, the
control signal connection cable should be less than 50 m long, and the distance
between the control signal connection cable and power line should be greater
than 30 cm. Use the twisted-pair shielded cable when analog signals are
externally inputted.
 It is recommended to use the wire with a diameter of 0.5-1 mm2 in the control
circuit.
 The terminal block of the A90 series inverter is composed of through-type
control circuit terminals. Install it with the PH0 Phillips screwdriver. The
43
tightening torque should be 0.5N.m.
3.3.9 Precautions for control circuit wiring

 Connect the control circuit connection wires and other wires separately.
 Connect the control circuit terminals EA, EB, EC, and Y1 separately from other
control circuit terminals.
 In order to avoid malfunction caused by interference, use the twisted shielded
cables in the control circuit. The wiring distance should be less than 50 m.
 Prevent the shield screen from contact with other signal lines and enclosures.
The exposed shield screen can be wrapped with insulating tapes.
 It is prohibited to touch the ports and components of the control panel without
static electricity protection measures.
44
3.3.10 Standard Wiring Diagram of Control Circuit
Braking resistor
MCCB MC PB U
Power
R/L1 V M
supply S/L2 W
Inverter Grounding
T/L3
Grounding
24V output 24V-COM

100mA
Operation EA Relay output contact
X1
EB
Multi-function input
Forward/Reverse R1 DC30V, more than 10mA, less than 1A

Multi-segment
X2
EC AC250V, more than 10mA, less than 3A
speed terminal 1
X3
terminal
Multi-segment
speed terminal 2
Multi-segment X4
speed terminal 3
X5 Y1 Open collector
Fault resetting
X6 output
COM 24V/50mA
COM
1
M1 V
+10V/20mA
10V Multi-function
1kΩ～5kΩ
3 0-10V M2 V/I
AI1 analog output
Frequency 2 0-10V/0-20mA
setting 1 AI2 GND
potentiometer
GND
ON V V
485 AI2 M2
OFF I I
Communication A+
interface A- S1 S2 J7
Grounding
Fig. 3-18 Standard Wiring Diagram of Control Circuit

 For the A90-4T017B model and below, the terminals COM and GND are connected
internally.
 It is recommended to use the wires with a diameter of 0.5-1mm2 in the control circuit.
 Install the control circuit terminals with the PH0 Phillips screwdriver. The tightening
45
torque should be 0.5N.m.
3.4 Extension wiring of keyboard

1) The external keyboard needs to be ordered separately.
2) The external keyboard is connected to the RJ45 port via an ordinary network cable
(plug: meeting the EIA/TIA568B standards) prepared by the customer.
3) Connect the RJ45 port of the keyboard to that of the control panel via a network
cable. The keyboard extension cable should be no longer than 3m. Then extension
cable may be 10 m long in the presence of Cat5E wires and good electromagnetic
environments.
3.5 Connection test

After wiring, check the following items.
 Check whether wiring is incorrect.
 Check whether there are screws, terminals and wire scraps inside the inverter.
 Check whether the screws are loose.
 Check whether the exposed wire at the stripped end of the terminal is in contact
with other terminals.
46
Chapter 4 KEYBOARD OPERATIONS
4.1 Keyboard Functions

4.1.1 Structure of LED keyboard
The control panel of the A90 series inverter is a fixed LED keyboard. This LED
keyboard consists of five LED digital tube displays, eight operation keys, and six status and
unit indicators. Users can perform parameter setting, status monitoring and start/stop of the
inverter via the keyboard.
Fig. 4-1 LED Keyboard
4.1.2 Functions of keys and indicators on LED keyboard

The functions of the keys and indicators on the LED keyboard are as shown in Table
4-1.
Table 4-1 Functions of Keys and Indicators on LED Keyboard
Key/Indicator Item Function
Select the group number and function number of the
Right currently modified function code.
Change the monitoring parameters.
Go back to the previous menu.
Cancel the current parameter modification when the
Escape
menu mode selection level is enabled from the
monitoring level.
According to the value of the function code F12.00,
Multi-function select the jog forwarding, jog reversing,
programmable key forward/reverse switching, fastest stop, free stop, and
left movement of the cursor.
Go to the sub-menu.
Confirm and save the parameter modification, and
Enter
enable the function code following the current
function code.
When the keyboard control is enabled, press this key
Run
to start the inverter.
47
When the keyboard control is enabled, press this key
to stop the inverter.
Stop/Reset
When the inverter fails, press this key to reset the
fault.
Increment in function code, menu group or parameter
setting.
Acceleration
Increase the currently valid reference digital input
data.
Decrement the function code, menu group or
parameter setting.
Deceleration
Decrease the currently valid reference digital input
data.
It is ON when the frequency, current, and voltage are
Unit indicator
displayed.
This indicator is ON during reverse running. It is OFF
Running direction during forward running.
indicator It is ON when a certain frequency is being monitored
or displayed.
It is ON when the inverter is running, flickering when
(Green) Running indicator the inverter is being stopped, and OFF after the
inverter is stopped.
Failure indicating
(Red) It turns red when the inverter is in a fault status.
lamp
4.2 Operation Mode of Keyboard with Digital Tube Display

The LED keyboard menu is divided into the monitoring level (Level 0), menu mode
selection level (Level 1), function code selection level (Level 2) and parameter level (Level
3) from low to high. The menu levels mentioned below are represented by numbers.
There are five parameter display modes: menu mode (--A--), used to display all
function codes; user-defined mode (--U--), used to display only function codes selected by
the user based on the F11 group; non-default mode (--C--), used to display only the
function codes that differ from the default settings; fault information display mode (--E--),
used to display the current fault information; and version information mode (--P--), used
to display the software and product serial number.
When the keyboard is powered on, the first monitoring parameter of Level 0 is
displayed by default. Press the ESC key to enter the Level 1 menu. In the Level 1
menu, you can select different menu modes via the increment and decrement
keys on the keyboard. The process of menu mode selection is shown in Fig. 4-2.
48
Fig. 4-2 Flowchart of Menu Mode Selection
4.2.1 Full menu mode (--A--)

In the full menu mode, press the ENTER key to enter the Level 2 menu and
select any function code. Then press the ENTER key to enter the Level 3 menu and
view or modify the function code. Except for a few special ones, the function codes needed
by general users can be modified.
The entire process from the initial status of power-on to change of the value of the
function code F03.28 to 5.28 in the full menu mode is shown in Fig. 4-3.
49
Fig. 4-3 Flowchart from Power-on to F03.28=5.28 Setting
In all menu modes, the user needs to press the ENTER key to save parameter
modifications. Differences after parameter saving are as follows: The function code
following the currently modified function code will appear in the full menu mode; the
user-defined function code following the currently modified function code (according to the
defined order from F11.00 to F11.31) will appear in the user-defined mode; the non-default
function code following the currently modified function code will appear in the non-default
mode; the fault information function code following the currently displayed fault
50
information function code will appear in the fault information display mode; and the serial
number function code following the currently displayed serial number function code will
appear in the version information display mode.
In the Level 3 menu, press the ESC key to abandon parameter modifications.
4.2.2 User-defined mode (--U--)

Enter the F11 group of function codes from the full menu mode. Then the user can
arbitrarily set the shortcut for the parameter to be accessed frequently. When F11.00 is
enabled for the first time, U00.00 will be displayed by default, meaning that the function
code defined by default for F11.00 is F00.00. The lowest cursor bit will flicker. The user
can set any function code, similar to the function code selection in the Level 2 menu. After
setting, press the ENTER key to save it and enter the user-defined menu mode to
display the set function code.
For example, F11.00 is set to U00.07 and F11.01 to U00.09. F11.00 and F11.01 will be
defined as F00.07 and F00.09, respectively. They are distinguished by U and F. U indicates
that this function code is user-defined, as shown in Fig. 4-4.
51
Fig. 4-4 Example of User-defined Mode Setting

In the user-defined mode, press the ENTER key to enter the Level 2 menu. The
Level 2 menu only displays 32 user-defined parameters in the F11 group. The user can
enter the F11 group from the full menu mode to set these function codes.
After the function codes are defined in the F11 group, enter the user-defined mode.
Then we can see F00.07 defined by the first function code F11.00, F00.09 defined by the
first function code F11.01, and so on to F11.31, 32 in total. Function code modification in
the Level 3 menu is equivalent to that in the full menu mode, and the modification method
is also the same.
In the Level 2 menu of the user-defined mode, press the increment or decrement
key on the keyboard to change the function code defined by F11.00 to that defined by
F11.31.
When the right shift key is pressed in the Level 2 menu, the cursor will not shift.
Press the ENTER key to enter the Level 3 menu. If the displayed function code is
modifiable currently, the lowest bit indicated by the cursor will flicker. Parameter
modification is the same as that in the Level 3 menu under the full menu mode. After
52
modification, press the ENTER key ENTER to confirm and save the parameters and enable
next user-defined parameter. Function code modifications in the Level 3 menus under
different menu modes have equivalent effects.
4.2.3 Non-default mode (--C--)
In the non-default mode, press the ENTER key to enter the Level 2 menu. The first
parameter different from the default settings of the inverter will be displayed, starting from
F00.00. When the right shift key is pressed in the Level 2 menu, the cursor will not
shift. If the increment or decrement key on the keyboard is pressed, the function group and
function code will not be modified, and the non-default function code following and in
front of the current function code will be displayed respectively. If the displayed function
code is modifiable currently in the Level 3 menu, the lowest bit indicated by the cursor will
flicker. In this case, parameters can be modified in the Level 3 menu under the full menu
mode. After modification, press the ENTER key to confirm and save the parameters
and enable next non-default parameter.
For example, first change F00.03 to 1 and F00.07 to 40.00 in the full menu mode,
which are different from default settings. When the first parameter in the non-default mode
is enabled, F00.03 will be displayed. Press the increment key on the keyboard to
enable F00.07 and the decrement key to return to F00.03, as shown below:
Fig. 4-5 Function Code Modification in Non-default Mode

53
4.2.4 Fault information display mode (--E--)
In the fault information display mode, press the ENTER key to enter the Level 2 menu.
The Level 2 menu will only display the fault record group under the F19 group, which is
conducive to direct viewing of fault record information.
Press the increment key or decrement key on the keyboard in the Level 2
menu under this mode to increase or decrease the function code of the fault group, and the
shift key will be unavailable. When a fault occurs, you can press the shift key
on the keyboard in the Level 3 menu to switch the display of the fault code, fault output
frequency, fault output current, fault bus voltage, and fault operation status.
4.3 Fault Monitoring

When the inverter is in the fault status, you can directly press the right shift key to
switch the current fault type and the output frequency, output current, output voltage,
running status and working time during the fault.
4.4 Operation Monitoring

In the monitoring status mode 1 of A90, you can set any function code to be viewed
between F12.33 and F12.37. When F12.32=1, the monitoring mode 1 will be enabled. If the
Level 0 monitoring menu appears, you can press the right shift key to switch the
monitoring parameters according to the order set for each function code between F12.33
and F12.37. When the inverter changes from the stop status to running status, the
monitoring parameter will automatically change from the current value to that indicated by
F12.33. When the inverter changes from the running status to stop status, the monitoring
parameter will automatically change from the current value to that indicated by F12.34.
4.5 Function of M.K Key
When the M.K multi-function key is pressed, there are multiple response modes,
jog forwarding by default. It is set by the function code F12.00.
4.6 Function of M.K Key M.K
When the M.K multi-function key is pressed, there are multiple response modes, jog
forwarding by default. As the function code F12.00 changes, the function of this key will
change accordingly.
4.7 Run/Stop
After setting the parameters, press the RUN key to enable the normal
operation of the inverter, and the STOP/RESET key to stop the inverter.
54
Chapter 5 Trial run
5.1 Inverter Commissioning Process
Fig. 5-1 Inverter Commissioning Flowchart
55
5.2 Confirmation before Power-on

Please confirm the following items before turning on the power supply:
Item to be confirmed Confirmation content
Check whether the input power voltage is consistent with
the voltage of the inverter.
Confirm that the circuit breaker has been connected to the
Power wiring
power supply circuit, and the power cables are correctly
confirmation
connected to the input terminals (R, S, T) of the inverter.
Make sure that the inverter and motor are properly
grounded.
Confirm that the motor is correctly connected to the output
Motor wiring
terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter, and the motor wiring is
confirmation
secured.
Confirmation of Make sure that the braking resistor and braking unit are
braking unit and connected as shown in Fig. 3-3 (use the dynamic braking
braking resistor resistor if necessary during operation).
Control terminal Check whether the control terminals of the inverter are
wiring confirmation correctly and reliably connected to other controls.
Control terminal Make sure that the control terminal circuit of the inverter is
status confirmation disconnected to prevent operation upon powering on.
Mechanical load Confirm that the machinery is in the no-load state and free
confirmation of danger in operation.
5.3 Inverter Status Confirmation after Power-on
After the power supply is turned on, the control panel (keyboard) of the inverter
displays the following information in the normal status.
Status Display Note
During
The digital setting 50.00Hz is displayed
normal 50.00
by default.
operation
If a fault occurs, the fault code will be
During a Fault code in character or
displayed. Refer to Chapter 6 “Fault
fault Exx format
Solutions”.
5.4 Precautions for Application Macro Setting
F16.00 is used to select the industry application macro, depending on specific
applications. Press the Enter key for confirmation. The application macro will not take
effect until default settings are restored by selecting F12.14=1. See Chapter 10 for details
on application macros.
5.5 Start and Stop Control
56
Function Function code Default
Parameter description Attribute
code name setting
0: keyboard control
Command
F00.02 1: Terminal control 0 ○
source selection
2: Communication control
F00.02=0: keyboard control
The inverter start and stop are controlled by the RUN, STOP and multi-function keys
M.K on the keyboard. In the case of no fault, press the multi-function key M.K to
enter the jog running status, and the RUN key to enter the running status. If the green LED
indicator above the RUN key is normally ON, it indicates that the inverter is running. If this
indicator is flickering, it indicates that the inverter is in the status of deceleration to stop.
F00.02=1: terminal control
The inverter start and stop are controlled by the start and stop control terminals
defined by the function code F02.00 to F02.05. Terminal control is dependent on F00.03.
F00.02=2: communication control
The inverter start and stop are controlled by the host through the RS485
communication port.
code name setting
0: direct start
F04.00 Start-up method 0 ○
1: start of speed tracking
F04.00=0: direct start

The inverter will be started at the starting frequency, following DC braking (no DC
braking in the case of F04.04=0) and pre-excitation (no pre-excitation if F04.07 is set to 0).
After the starting frequency duration expires, the inverter will run at the set frequency.
F04.00=1: start with speed tracking
The inverter is smoothly started at the current rotating frequency of the motor,
following the speed tracking.
code name setting
0: Slow down to stop
F04.19 Stop mode 0 ○
1: Free stop
F04.19=0: deceleration to stop
The motor decelerates to stop according to the set deceleration time [default setting:
based on F00.15 (deceleration time 1)].
F04.19=1: free stop
When there is a valid stop command, the inverter will stop output immediately, and the
motor will freely coast to stop. The stop time depends on the inertia of the motor and load.
57
5.5.1 Terminal control of start and stop

code name Parameter description setting Attribute
0: terminal RUN (running) and F/R
(forward/reverse)
Options of 1: terminal RUN (forward) and F/R
F00.03 terminal control (reverse) 0 ○
mode 2: terminal RUN (forward), Xi (stop)
and F/R (reverse)
3: terminal RUN (running), Xi (stop)
and F/R (forward/reverse)
Terminal RUN: Xi terminal is set to “1: terminal RUN”
Terminal F/R: Xi terminal is set to “1: running direction F/R”
Terminal control can be divided into two types: two-line control and three-line
control.
Two-line control:
F00.03=0: the terminal RUN is enabled and the terminal F/R controls
forward/reverse running.
Enable/Disable the terminal RUN to control the start and stop of the inverter, and the
terminal F/R to control the forward/reverse running. If F00.21 is set to 1 and reverse
running is disabled, the F/R terminal will not be available. When the mode of deceleration
to stop is selected, the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 5-2 (b).
F00.03=1: the terminal RUN controls forward running, and the terminal F/R is in
the reverse mode.
Enable/Disable the terminal RUN to control the forward running and stop of the inverter,
and the terminal F/R to control the reverse running and stop. When the terminals RUN and
F/R are enabled simultaneously, the inverter will be stopped. If reverse running is disabled,
the terminal F/R will not be available. When the mode of deceleration to stop is selected,
the logic of forward/reverse running is as shown in Fig. 5-2 (d).
58
(a) Wiring diagram of two-line control (F00.03=0) (b) Forward/reverse control logic
(F04.19=0, F00.03=0)
(c) Wiring diagram of two-line control (F00.03=1) (d) Forward/reverse control logic
(F04.19=0, F00.03=1)
Fig. 5-2 Two-line Control
When the start/stop value of F00.03 is set to 0 or 1, even if the terminal RUN
STOP
is available, the inverter can be stopped by pressing the STOP key RESET or
sending an external stop command to the terminal. In this case, the inverter
will not be in the running status until the terminal RUN is disabled and then enabled.
Three-line control:
F00.03=2: the terminal RUN controls forward running, the terminal Xi is for stop,
and the terminal F/R is in the reverse status.
The terminal RUN is normally ON for forward running, and the terminal F/R is
normally ON for reverse running, with valid pulse edges. The terminal Xi is normally
closed for stop, with the valid level. When the inverter is in the running status, press Xi to
stop it. In the case of deceleration to stop (F04.19=0), the logic diagram is as shown in Fig.
7-2 5-3(b). The terminal Xi is for “three-line running and stop control” as defined by
F02.00 to F02.04.
F00.03=3: the terminal RUN is for running, Xi for stop and F/R for
forward/reverse control.
The terminal RUN is normally ON for running, with the valid pulse edge, F/R for
forward/reverse switching (forward in the OFF status and reverse in the ON status), and Xi
is normally OFF for stop, with the valid level. In the case of deceleration to stop
59
(F04.19=0), the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 5-3(d).
(a) Wiring diagram of three-line control (F00.03=2) (b) Forward/reverse control logic
(F04.19=0, F00.03=2)
(c) Wiring diagram of two-line control (F00.03=3) (d) Forward/reverse running logic
(F04.19=0, F00.03=3)
Fig. 5-3 Three-line Control
The three-line control logic of the A90 series inverter is consistent with the
conventional electrical control. The keys and knob switches should be used
correctly as shown in the schematic diagram. Otherwise, operation errors may be caused.
5.6 Common Process Parameters of Inverter

Function Function code Parameter description Unit Default Attribute
code name setting
Drive control mode 0: V/F control (VVF)
F00.01 of motor 1 1: Speed sensorless vector 0 ○
control (SVC)
0: digital frequency setting
F00.07
1: AI1 2: AI2
Options of main 4: VP (keyboard potentiometer)
F00.04 frequency source A 6: Percentage setting of main 0 ○
frequency communication
7: Direct setting of main
Digital frequency 0.00 to maximum frequency
F00.07 setting F00.16 Hz 0.00 ●
F00.14 Acceleration time 1 0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0) s 15.00 ●
60
F00.15 Deceleration time 1 0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0) s 15.00 ●
Maximum
F00.16 frequency 1.00~600.00 Hz 50.00 ○
Upper frequency Lower frequency limit F00.19
F00.18 limit to maximum frequency F00.16 Hz 50.00 ●
Lower frequency 0.00 to upper frequency limit
F00.19 limit F00.18 Hz 0.00 ●
0: Allow forward/reverse
F00.21 Reverse control running 0 ○
1: Prohibit reversing
Note: Common process parameters may also include the input and output function settings.
Refer to the F02 and F03 groups in the function table.
5.7 Motor Parameter Identification

For the better control performance, motor parameters must be identified.
Identification Method Application Identification Effect
F01.34=01
Static self-learning
of asynchronous
motor It is applied where the motor and
load cannot be separated easily and General
F01.34=11 rotary self-learning is not allowed.
Static self-learning
of synchronous
motor
F01.34=02
Rotary self-learning It is applied when the motor and
of asynchronous load can be separated easily. Before
motor operation, the motor shaft should
be separated from the load. The Optimal
F01.34=12
Rotary self-learning motor under load must not be put
of synchronous into rotary self-learning.
motor
 Prior to self-identification, make sure that the motor is stopped; otherwise,
self-identification cannot be performed properly.
5.7.1 Parameter identification steps
 Where the motor and load can be separated, the mechanical load and motor should be
completely separated in the power-off status.
 After the power-on, set the command source of the inverter to keyboard control
(F00.02=0).
 Enter the nameplate parameters of the motor accurately.
Motor Corresponding Parameter
F01.00: Motor type F01.01: Rated power of motor
F01.02: Rated voltage of motor F01.03: Rated
Motor 1 current of motor
F01.04: Rated frequency of motor F01.05: Rated
61
speed of motor
F01.06: Motor winding connection
F14.00: Motor type F14.01: Rated power of motor
F14.02: Rated voltage of motor F14.03: Rated
current of motor
Motor 2 F14.04: Rated frequency of motor F14.05: Rated
speed of motor
F14.06: Motor winding connection
 For the asynchronous motor:

Set F01.34=1 for confirmation and press the RUN key. The inverter will start the
static self-identification of the motor.
Or, set F01.34=2 and press the RUN key. The inverter will start the rotary
self-identification of the motor.
 For the synchronous motor:
Set F01.34=11 and press the RUN key. The inverter will start the static
Or, set F01.34=12 and press the RUN key. The inverter will start the rotary
 It takes about two minutes to complete the self-identification of the motor. Then the
system will return to the initial power-on status from the “tune” interface.
 If multiple motors are used in parallel, the rated power and rated current input of the
motors should be the sum of power and current of these motors.
If two motors are used alternately, the parameters of the motor 2 in the F14 group need to
be set separately, and identified based on F14.34.
62
Chapter 6 Function Code Table
6.1 Description of Function Code Table

The function codes of the A90 series inverter (hereinafter referred to as the “function
codes”) are divided into 24 groups in Table 6-1, and each group contains several function
codes. Among them, the F18 group is a monitoring parameter group used to view the
inverter status; the F19 group is a fault record group used to view the details of the last
three faults; and other groups are parameter setting groups to meet different functional
requirements.
Table 6-1 Introduction to Function Code Groups
F00 Basic function parameter P65; P114 F01 Parameter group of motor P68; P132
group 1
F02 Input terminal function P70; P137 F03 Output terminal function P74; P149
group group
F04 Start/stop control P77; P161 F05 V/F control parameter P79; P168
parameter group group
F06 Vector control parameter P81; P174 F07 Protection function setting P84; P181
group group
F08 Multi-segment speed and P86; P188 F09 PID function group P93; P198
simple PLC
F10 Communication function P95; P209 F11 User-selected parameter P96; P213
group group
F12 Keyboard and display P97; P216 F13 Torque control parameter P100; P221
function group group
F14 Parameter group of motor P101; P228 F15 Auxiliary function group P105; P229
2
F16 Customization function P107; P222 F17 Virtual I/O function group P108; P241
group
F18 Monitoring parameter P110; P245 F19 Fault record group P111; P248
group
★ Some parameters of the current series are reserved, and their readings are 0. Some
options of parameters are reserved and settable, but this may result in abnormal
operation of the inverter. Please avoid misuse of such parameters.
63
The table below provides the details of the function code table:
Function F00.00 to F99.99: function code number
code
Function Full name of the function code. “Reserved” means that the corresponding
code name function code is temporarily reserved and has no practical meaning.
Brief description of the function code. It is mainly divided into the following
three types:
The value of the integral function code represents the current
Integral
parameter selection or meaning.
Parameter
The ones, tens, hundreds, thousands and tens of thousands
description
Quantifier represent one option or the current meaning of the function
code.
Each binary bit represents one option or the current meaning
Binary
of the function code.
Metric units of the function code. The units and abbreviations are as follows:
Hz Hertz kW Kilowatt us Microsecond
kHz Kilohertz kWh Kilowatt-h ms Millisecond
our★
% Percent★ MWh Megawatt s Second
Unit hour
V Volt mΩ Milliohm min min
A Amp mH Millihenry h h
rpm rpm °C °C m m
★: %: The benchmarks are different for physical quantities; kWh: Kilowatt
hour, commonly known as the degree.
Function code settings before delivery, or values after parameter restoration
(F12.14=1). This is mainly described by the following three categories.
Number (e.g. Refer to each power segment. The function code is set to
Default 50.00) the current value by default.
setting Depending on The default setting of this function code varies based on
the motor type the power segments.
The default setting of this function code varies based on
XXX
the power segments and batches.
Change attribute of the function code (permission and condition of change),
as described below:
Changeable in running: The current function code can be
Attribute ●
changed in any status.
Non-changeable in running: The current function code can be
○
changed except in the running status.
64
Read-only: The current function code cannot be changed in
×
any status.
6.2 Table of functional parameters

Functio Default
Function code name Parameter description Unit Attribute
n code setting
F00 Basic function parameter group
F00.00 Reserved
0: V/F control (VVF)
Drive control mode of
F00.01 1: Speed sensorless vector control 0 ○
motor 1
(SVC)
0: keyboard control (LOC/REM
indicator: ON)
Options of command 1: terminal control (LOC/REM
F00.02 0 ○
source indicator: OFF)
2: communication control
(LOC/REM indicator: flicker)
0: terminal RUN (running) and
F/R (forward/reverse)
1: terminal RUN (forward) and
Options of terminal F/R (reverse)
F00.03 0 ○
control mode 2: terminal RUN (forward), Xi
(stop) and F/R (reverse)
3: terminal RUN (running), Xi
(stop) and F/R (forward/reverse)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
4: VP (keyboard potentiometer)
Options of main
F00.04 5: retention 0 ○
frequency source A
6: Percentage setting of main
8: retention
Options of auxiliary 1: AI1
F00.05 0 ○
frequency source B 2: AI2
3: retention
65
5: retention
6: percent setting of auxiliary
7: direct setting of auxiliary
8: retention
9: retention
10: process PID
11: simple PLC
0: main frequency source A
1: auxiliary frequency source B
2: main and auxiliary operation
results
3: switching between main
frequency source A and auxiliary
Options of frequency
F00.06 frequency source B 0 ○
source
frequency source A and main and
auxiliary operation results
5: switching between auxiliary
frequency source B and main and
Digital frequency 0.00 to maximum frequency
F00.07 Hz 00.00 ●
setting F00.16
0: main frequency source A +
auxiliary frequency source B
1: main frequency source A -
Options of main and auxiliary frequency source B
F00.08 0 ○
auxiliary operation 2: larger value of main and
auxiliary frequency sources
3: smaller value of main and
Reference options of 0: relative to he maximum
auxiliary frequency frequency
F00.09 0 ○
source B in main and 1: Relative to main frequency
auxiliary operation source A
Gain of main
F00.10 0.0~300.0 % 100.0 ●
frequency source
Gain of auxiliary
F00.11 0.0~300.0 % 100.0 ●
frequency source
Synthetic gain of main
F00.12 0.0~300.0 % 100.0 ●
and auxiliary
66
frequency sources
0: synthetic frequency of main
and auxiliary channels
Analog adjustment of 1: AI1 * synthetic frequency of
F00.13 0 ○
synthetic frequency main and auxiliary channels
2: AI2 * synthetic frequency of
main and auxiliary channels
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
F00.14 Acceleration time 1 0.0~6,500.0 (F15.13=1) s 15.00 ●
0~65,000 (F15.13=2)
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
F00.15 Deceleration time 1 0.0~6,500.0 (F15.13=1) s 15.00 ●
0~65,000 (F15.13=2)
F00.16 Maximum frequency 1.00~600.00 Hz 50.00 ○
0: set by F00.18
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
Options of upper
F00.17 frequency limit 0 ○
5: retention
control
6: percent setting of upper limit
7: direct setting of upper limit
Lower frequency limit F00.19 to
F00.18 Upper frequency limit Hz 50.00 ●
maximum frequency F00.16
0.00 to upper frequency limit
F00.19 Lower frequency limit Hz 0.00 ●
F00.18
0: consistent direction
F00.20 Running direction 0 ●
1: opposite direction
0: Allow forward/reverse running
F00.21 Reverse control 0 ○
Duration of forward
F00.22 0.00~650.00 s 0.00 ●
and reverse dead zone
1.0~16.0
(A90-4T1R5~A90-4T9R4B)
1.0~10.0
Model
F00.23 Carrier frequency (A90-4T013B~A90-4T017B) kHz ●
Confirm
1.0~8.0
(A90-4T025B~A90-4T110B)
1.0~6.0 (A90-4T150~A90-4T304)
Automatic adjustment 0: Invalid
F00.24 1 ○
of carrier frequency 1: valid 1
67
2: valid 2
Noise suppression of 0: Invalid
F00.25 0 ○
carrier frequency 1: valid
Noise suppression
F00.26 20~200 Hz 40 ●
tone
Noise suppression
F00.27 10~150 Hz 0 ●
intensity
Options of motor 0: parameter group of motor 1
F00.28 0 ○
parameter group 1: parameter group of motor 2
F00.29 User password 0~65,535 0 ○
0: heavy-duty
F00.30 Inverter type 0 ○
1: light-duty
F01 Parameter group of motor 1
0: ordinary asynchronous motor
1: variable-frequency
F01.00 Motor type asynchronous motor 0 ○
2: permanent magnet synchronous
motor
Rated power of Model
F01.01 0.10~650.00 kW ○
electric motor Confirm
Rated voltage of Model
F01.02 50~2,000 V ○
motor Confirm
0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of
Rated current of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Model
F01.03 A ○
motor 0.1 to 6,000.0 (rated power of Confirm
motor: > 75 kW)
Rated frequency of Model
F01.04 0.01~600.00 Hz ○
motor Confirm
Model
F01.05 Rated speed 1~60,000 rpm ○
Confirm
Motor winding 0: Y Model
F01.06 ○
connection 1: Δ Confirm
Rated power factor of Model
F01.07 0.600~1.000 ○
motor Confirm
Model
F01.08 Motor efficiency 30.0~100.0 % ○
Confirm
1-60,000 (rated power of motor: ≤
Stator resistance of 75 kW) Model
F01.09 mΩ ○
asynchronous motor 0.1-6,000.0 (rated power of Confirm
motor: > 75kW)
Rotor resistance of 1-60,000 (rated power of motor: ≤ Model
F01.10 mΩ ○
asynchronous motor 75 kW) Confirm
68
0.1-6,000.0 (rated power of
motor: > 75kW)
Leakage inductance of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Model
F01.11 mH ○
asynchronous motor 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of Confirm
motor: > 75 kW)
0.1 to 6,000.0 (rated power of
Mutual inductance of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Model
F01.12 mH ○
asynchronous motor 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of Confirm
motor: > 75 kW)
No-load excitation
motor: ≤ 75 kW) Model
F01.13 current of A ○
0.1 to 6,000.0 (rated power of Confirm
asynchronous motor
motor: > 75 kW)
Magnetic saturation
F01.14 coefficient 1 of 10.00~100.00 % 87.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
F01.15 coefficient 2 of 10.00~100.00 % 80.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
F01.16 coefficient 3 of 10.00~100.00 % 75.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
F01.17 coefficient 4 of 10.00~100.00 % 72.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
F01.18 coefficient 5 of 10.00~100.00 % 70.00 ○
asynchronous motor
1-60,000 (rated power of motor:
Stator resistance of ≤75kW) Model
F01.19 mΩ ○
synchronous motor 0.1 to 6,000.0 (rated power of Confirm
motor: > 75 kW)
d-axis inductance of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Model
F01.20 mH ○
synchronous motor 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of Confirm
motor: > 75 kW)
q-axis inductance of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Model
F01.21 mH ○
synchronous motor 0.001 to 60.000 (rated power of Confirm
motor: > 75 kW)
Counter electromotive 10.0-2,000.0 (counter Model
F01.22 V ○
force of synchronous electromotive force of rated Confirm
69
motor speed)
Initial electrical angle 0.0-359.9 (valid for synchronous
F01.23 0.0 ○
of synchronous motor motor)
F01.24
~F01.3 Reserved
3
0: No operation
1: static self-learning of
asynchronous motor
2: rotation self-learning of
Motor parameter
F01.34 asynchronous motor 0 ○
self-learning
synchronous motor
2: rotary self-learning of
synchronous motor
F02 Input terminal function group
Options of X1 digital 0: no function
F02.00 1 ○
input function 1: terminal running (RUN)
Options of X2 digital 2: running direction (F/R)
F02.01 2 ○
input function 3: stop control in three-line
Options of X3 digital operation
F02.02 4: forward jog (FJOG) 11 ○
input function
Options of X4 digital 5: reverse jog (RJOG)
F02.03 6: terminal UP 12 ○
input function
Options of X5 digital 7: terminal DOWN
F02.04 8: clear UP/DOWN offset 13 ○
input function
Options of AI1 digital 9: free stop
F02.07 10: reset fault 0 ○
input function
Options of AI2 digital 11: multi-segment speed terminal
F02.08 1 0 ○
input function
12: multi-segment speed terminal
2
3
4
15: multi-segment PID terminal 1
16: multi-segment PID terminal 2
17: multi-segment torque terminal
1
18: multi-segment torque terminal
2
19: acceleration and deceleration
70
time terminal 1
time terminal 2
21: Acceleration and deceleration
prohibition
22: operation pause
23: external fault input
24: Switching of RUN command
to keyboard
25: switching of RUN command
to communication
26: Frequency source switching
27: clearing of regular running
time
28: speed control/torque control
switching
29: torque control prohibition
30: motor 1/motor 2 switching
31: resetting of simple PLC status
(running from the first segment,
with the running time cleared)
32: simple PLC time pause (keep
running at current segment)
33: retention
34: counter input (≤250Hz)
35: high-speed count input
(≤100kHz, only valid for X7)
36: count clearing
37: length counter input (≤250Hz)
38: retention
39: length clearing
40: pulse input (≤ 100 kHz, only
valid for X7)
41: process PID pause
42: process PID integral pause
43: PID parameter switching
44: PID positive/negative
switching
45: stop and DC braking
46: DC braking at stop
47: immediate DC braking
48: fastest deceleration to stop
49: retention
50: external stop
71
51: switching of main frequency
source to digital frequency setting
source to AI1
53: Switching of main frequency
source to AI2
54: retention
55: retention
source to communication setting
57: inverter enabling
58-68: retention
69: prohibit reversing
to VP
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
* * * X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
0: positive logic is valid in the
Positive/negative
closed state/invalid in the open *00
F02.15 logic 1 of digital input ○
state 00000
terminal
1: negative logic is valid in the
closed state/invalid in the open
state
D
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
0
AI
* * * * * * AI2
1
Positive/negative
0: positive logic is valid in the 000
F02.16 logic 2 of digital ○
closed state/invalid in the open 00000
input terminal
state
state
Filtering times of 0-100; 0: no filtering; n: sampling
F02.17 2 ○
digital input terminal every n ms
F02.18 X1 valid delay time 0.000~30.000 s 0.000 ●
F02.19 X1 invalid delay time 0.000~30.000 s 0.000 ●
72
Ones place: AI1

0: analog input
1: digital input (0 below 1V, 1
above 3V, the same as last time
Options of analog
F02.31 under 1-3V) 0000D ○
input function
Tens place: AI2
0: analog input
1: digital input (the same as
above)
Ones place: Options of AI1 curve
0: curve 1
1: curve 2
2: curve 3
3: curve 4
Tens place: AI2 curve selection
Options of analog 0: curve 1
F02.32 3010D ○
input curve 1: curve 2
2: curve 3
3: curve 4
Hundreds place: Reserved
Thousands place: VP curve
selection: the same parameter
setting range as AI1
Minimum input of
F02.33 0.00~F02.35 V 0.10 ●
curve 1
Minimum input
F02.34 –100.0~+100.0 % 0.0 ●
setting of curve 1
Maximum input of
F02.35 F02.33~10.00 V 9.90 ●
curve 1
Maximum input
F02.36 –100.0~+100.0 % 100.0 ●
setting of curve 1
Minimum input of
F02.37 -10.00~F02.39 V 0.10 ●
curve 2
Minimum input
F02.38 –100.0~+100.0 % 0.0 ●
setting of curve 2
Maximum input of
F02.39 F02.37~10.00 V 9.90 ●
curve 2
Maximum input
F02.40 –100.0~+100.0 % 100.0 ●
setting of curve 2
Minimum input of
F02.41 0.00~F02.43 V 0.10 ●
curve 3
Minimum input
F02.42 –100.0~+100.0 % 0.0 ●
setting of curve 3
73
Input of inflection
F02.43 F02.41~F02.45 V 2.50 ●
point 1 of curve 3
Input setting of
F02.44 inflection point 1 of –100.0~+100.0 % 25.0 ●
curve 3
Input of inflection
F02.45 F02.43~F02.47 V 7.50 ●
point 2 of curve 3
Input setting of
curve 3
Maximum input of
F02.47 F02.45~10.00 V 9.90 ●
curve 3
Maximum input
F02.48 –100.0~+100.0 % 100.0 ●
setting of curve 3
Minimum input of
F02.49 -10.00~F02.51 V 0.1 ●
curve 4
Minimum input
F02.50 –100.0~+100.0 % 0 ●
setting of curve 4
Input of inflection
F02.51 F02.49~F02.53 V 2.50 ●
point 1 of curve 4
Input setting of
curve 4
Input of inflection
F02.53 F02.51~F02.55 V 7.50 ●
point 2 of curve 4
Input setting of
curve 4
Maximum input of
F02.55 F02.53~10.00 V 8.80 ●
curve 4
Maximum input
F02.56 –100.0~+100.0 % 100.0 ●
setting of curve 4
F02.57 AI1 filtering time 0.00~10.00 s 0.10 ●
F02.58 AI2 filtering time 0.00~10.00 s 0.10 ●
F02.60 VP filtering time 0.00~10.00 s 0.10 ●
AD sampling
F02.61 2~50 2 ○
hysteresis
F03 Output terminal function group
Options of Y1 output 0: no output ○
F03.00 1
function 1: inverter running (RUN)
Options of R1 output 2: up to output frequency (FAR)
F03.02 function 3: output frequency detection 7 ○
(EA-EB-EC) FDT1
74
4: output frequency detection
FDT2
5: reverse running (REV)
6: jog
7: inverter fault
8: inverter ready to run (READY)
9: reach the upper frequency limit
10: reach the lower frequency
limit
11: valid current limit
12: valid overvoltage stall
13: complete simple PLC cycle
14: reach the set count value
15: reach the specified count
value
16: reach the length
17: motor overload pre-alarm
18: inverter overheat pre-alarm
19: reach the upper limit of PID
feedback
20: reach the lower limit of PID
feedback
21: analog level detection ADT1
22: analog level detection ADT2
23: retention
24: undervoltage state
25: motor overheat pre-alarm
26: up to the set time
27: zero-speed running
28-37: retention
38: off-load
39-46: retention
47: PLC output
48-58: retention
59: sleep indicator
69: FDT1 lower limit (pulse)
70: FDT2 lower limit (pulse)
71: FDT1 lower limit (pulse,
invalid in JOG)
72: FDT2 lower limit (pulse,
invalid in JOG)
D
Options of output D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
F03.05 0 *0000 ○
signal type
* * * * * R1 * Y
75
1
0: level
1: single pulse
D
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
0
* * * * * R1 * Y1
Positive/negative 0: positive logic is valid in the
F03.06 closed state/invalid in the open 00000 ○
logic of digital output
state
state
D
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
0
R
RE FD FD FA
Output status control * * * V T2 T1 R U
F03.08 N 00000 ○
in jog
0: valid in jogging
1: invalid in jogging
F03.09 Y1 valid delay time 0.000~30.000 s 0.000 ●

F03.10 Y1 invalid delay time 0.000~30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.13 R1 valid delay time 0.000~30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.14 R1 invalid delay time 0.000~30.000 s 0.000 ●
Single pulse time of
F03.17 0.001~30.000 s 0.250 ●
Y1 output
F03.19 0.001~30.000 s 0.250 ●
R1 output
Options of analog 0: running frequency (absolute
F03.21 0 ○
output M1 value)
Options of analog 1: set frequency (absolute value)
F03.22 2 ○
output M2 2: output torque (absolute value)
3: set torque (absolute value)
4: output current
5: Output voltage
6: bus voltage
7: output power
8: AI1
9: AI2
11: VP
13: Communication setting
14: count value
76
15: length value
16: PID output percentage
18: PID feedback
19: PID setting
21: output frequency (actual
value)
22: set frequency (actual value)
23: output current (actual value)
24: output torque (actual value)
25: set torque (actual value)
27: estimated feedback frequency
(actual value)
28: synchronization frequency
(actual value)
output frequency (actual value)
F03.27 M1 output bias -100.0~100.0 % 0.0 ●
F03.28 M1 output gain -10.00~10.00 1.00 ●
F03.29 M2 output bias -100.0~100.0 % 0.0 ●
F03.30 M2 output gain -10.00~10.00 1.00 ●
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2
D1 D0
Control logic options
* * * * * R1 *
F03.31 of PLC output 00000 ●
Y1
terminal
0: no output
1: output
F04 Start/stop control parameter group
0: direct start
F04.01 Start frequency 0.00~10.00 Hz 0.00 ○
Start frequency hold
F04.02 0.00-60.00, 0.00 is invalid s 0.00 ○
time
Starting current of 0.0~100.0 (100.0 = Rated current
F04.03 % 50.0 ○
DC braking of motor)
Starting time of DC
F04.04 0.00~30.00 s 0.00 ○
braking
F04.05 Reserved
50.0-500.0 (100.0 = no-load
F04.06 Pre-excitation current % 100.0 ○
current)
F04.07 Pre-excitation time 0.00~10.00 s 0.10 ○
Ones place: Tracking start
F04.08 Speed tracking mode frequency 01 ○
0: maximum frequency
77
1: stop frequency
2: power frequency
Tens place: Selection of search
direction
0: search only in command
direction
1: Search in the opposite direction
if the speed cannot be found in the
command direction
F04.09 Reserved
Deceleration time of
F04.10 0.1~20.0 s 2.0 ○
speed tracking
Speed tracking 30.0-150.0 (100.0 = rated current
F04.11 % 50.0 ○
current of inverter)
Speed tracking
F04.12 0.00~10.00 1.00 ○
compensation gain
F04.13 Reserved
0: linear acceleration and
deceleration
Acceleration and 1: acceleration and deceleration of
F04.14 0 ○
deceleration mode continuous S curve
2: acceleration and deceleration of
intermittent S curve
0.00 to system acceleration time/2
(F15.13 = 0)
Starting time of S 0.0 to system acceleration time/2
F04.15 s 1.00 ●
curve in acceleration (F15.13 = 1)
0 to system acceleration time/2
(F15.13 = 2)
(F15.13 = 0)
Ending time of S 0.0 to system acceleration time/2
F04.16 s 1.00 ●
curve in acceleration (F15.13 = 1)
(F15.13 = 2)
(F15.13 = 0)
Starting time of S 0.0 to system acceleration time/2
F04.17 s 1.00 ●
curve in deceleration (F15.13 = 1)
(F15.13 = 2)
Ending time of S 0.00 to system acceleration time/2
F04.18 s 1.00 ●
curve in deceleration (F15.13 = 0)
78
(F15.13 = 1)
(F15.13 = 2)
1: free stop
Starting frequency of 0.00 to maximum frequency
F04.20 Hz 0.00 ○
DC braking in stop F00.16
DC braking current in 0.0~100.0 (100.0 = Rated current
F04.21 % 50.0 ○
stop of motor)
DC braking time in
F04.22 0.00~30.00 0.00: invalid s 0.00 ○
stop
Demagnetization time
F04.23 for DC braking in 0.00~30.00 s 0.50 ○
stop
F04.24 Flux braking gain 100-150 (100: no flux braking) 100 ○
F04.25 Reserved
0: start according to F04.00
Start mode after
F04.26 setting mode 0 ○
failure/free stop
Second confirmation
0: Not required for confirmation
F04.27 of terminal start 0 ○
1: to be confirmed
command
F04.28 Reserved
Zero speed check
F04.29 0.00~5.00 Hz 0.25 ●
frequency
Initial position search
0: Invalid
F04.30 after power-on or 1 ●
1: valid
fault
F05 V/F control parameter group
0: straight line V/F
1: multi-point broken line V/F
2: 1.3-power V/F
3: 1.7-power V/F
4: square V/F
5: VF complete separation mode
F05.00 V/F curve setting 0 ○
(Ud = 0, Uq = K * t = voltage of
separation voltage source)
6: VF semi-separation mode (Ud
= 0, Uq = K * t = F/Fe * 2 *
voltage of separation voltage
source)
79
Frequency point F1 of
F05.01 0.00~F05.03 Hz 0.50 ●
multi-point VF
Voltage point V1 of
F05.02 0.0~100.0 (100.0 = Rated voltage) % 1.0 ●
multi-point VF
Frequency point F2 of
F05.03 F05.01~F05.05 Hz 2.00 ●
multi-point VF
Voltage point V2 of
F05.04 0.0~100.0 % 4.0 ●
multi-point VF
Frequency point F3 of F05.03 to rated frequency of
F05.05 Hz 5.00 ●
multi-point VF motor (reference frequency)
Voltage point V3 of
F05.06 0.0-100.0 % 10.0 ●
multi-point VF
0: digital setting of VF separation
voltage
1: AI1
2: AI2
Voltage source of VF 3-4: retention
F05.07 0 ○
separation mode 5: PID
7: VP
Note: 100% is the rated voltage of
the motor.
Digital setting of VF 0.0 to 100.0 (100.0=Rated voltage
F05.08 % 0.0 ●
separation voltage of motor)
Rise time of VF
F05.09 0.00~60.00 s 2.00 ●
separation voltage
Compensation gain of
F05.10 V/F stator voltage 0.00~200.00 % 100.00 ●
drop
V/F slip
F05.11 0.00~200.00 % 100.00 ●
compensation gain
F05.12 V/F slip filtering time 0.00~10.00 s 1.00 ●
Oscillation
F05.13 0~20000 100 ●
suppression gain
Oscillation
F05.14 suppression cutoff 0.00~600.00 Hz 55.00 ●
frequency
Droop control
F05.15 0.00~10.00 Hz 0.00 ●
frequency
F05.16 Energy saving rate 0.00~50.00 % 0.00 ●
Energy saving action
F05.17 1.00~60.00 s 5.00 ●
time
80
Flux compensation
F05.18 gain of synchronous 0.00~500.00 % 0.00 ●
motor
Filtering time
constant of flux
F05.19 0.00~10.00 s 0.50 ●
compensation of
synchronous motor
Change rate of VF
F05.20 separate power –50.00~50.00 % 0.00 ●
supply setting
F06 Vector control parameter group
Speed proportional
F06.00 0.00-100.00 12.00 ●
gain ASR_P1
Speed integral time
0.000-30.000
F06.01 constant s 0.200 ●
0.000: no integral
ASR_T1
Speed proportional
F06.02 gain 0.00-100.00 8.00 ●
ASR_P2
Speed integral time
0.000-30.000
0.000: no integral
ASR_T2
Switching frequency
F06.04 0.00 to switching frequency 2 Hz 5.00 ●
1
Switching frequency Switching frequency 1 to
F06.05 Hz 10.00 ●
2 maximum frequency F00.16
Separation threshold
F06.06 0.000-1.000 0.500
of speed loop integral
Filtering time
F06.07 constant of speed 0.000~0.100 s 0.001 ●
loop output
Vector control slip
F06.08 50.00~200.00 % 100.00 ●
gain
Upper limit source 0: set by F06.10 and F06.11
F06.09 selection of speed 1: AI1 0 ○
control torque 2: AI2
Upper limit of speed
F06.10 0.0~250.0 % 165.0 ●
control motor torque
F06.11 0.0~250.0 % 165.0 ●
control brake torque
Excitation current
F06.12 proportional gain 0.00~100.00 0.50 ●
ACR-P1
81
Excitation current
0.00-600.00
F06.13 integral time constant ms 10.00 ●
0.00: no integral
ACR-T1
Torque current
F06.14 proportional gain 0.00~100.00 0.50 ●
ACR-P2
Torque current
0.00-600.00
0.00: no integral
ACR-T2
F06.16 Position loop gain 0.000~40.000 1.000 ●
0: braking
SVC zero-frequency
F06.17 1: not processed 2 ○
processing
2: seal the tube
SVC zero-frequency 50.0-400.0 (100.0 is the no-load
F06.18 % 100.0 ○
braking current current of the motor)
SVC low-frequency
F06.19 100.0
excitation current
Voltage feedforward
F06.20 0~100 % 0 ●
gain
0: Invalid
Flux weakening
F06.21 1: direct calculation 1 ○
control options
2: automatic adjustment
Flux weakening
F06.22 70.00-100.00 % 100.00 ●
voltage
Maximum flux
0.0-150.0 (100.0 is the rated
F06.23 weakening current of % 100.0 ●
current of the motor)
synchronous motor
Proportional gain of
F06.24 flux weakening 0.00~10.00 0.50 ●
regulator
Integral time of flux
F06.25 0.01~60.00 s 2.00 ●
weakening regulator
MTPA control options 0: Invalid
F06.26 1 ○
of synchronous motor 1: valid
Self-learning gain at
F06.27 0~200 % 100 ●
initial position
Frequency of low
0.00-100.00 (100.00 is the rated
F06.28 frequency band of % 10.00 ●
frequency of the motor)
injection current
Injection current of 0.0-60.0 (100.0 is the rated
F06.29 % 40.0 ●
low frequency band current of the motor)
Regulator gain of low
F06.30 0.00~10.00 0.50 ●
frequency band of
82
injection current
Regulator integral
time of low frequency
F06.31 0.00~300.00 ms 10.00 ●
band of injection
current
Frequency of high
0.00-100.00 (100.00 is the rated
frequency of the motor)
injection current
Injection current f 0.0-30.0 (100.0 is the rated
F06.33 % 8.0 ●
high frequency band current of the motor)
Regulator gain of
F06.34 high frequency band 0.00~10.00 0.50 ●
of injection current
Regulator integral
time of high
F06.35 0.00~300.00 ms 10.00 ●
frequency band of
injection current
Current loop
F06.36 proportional gain of 0.20~1.00 % 0.60 ○
synchronous motor
Current loop integral
F06.37 gain of synchronous 10.00~600.00 % 100.00 ×
motor
F06.38
~F06.4 Reserved
0
Open-loop
0: VF
low-frequency
F06.41 1: IF 0 ○
processing of
2: IF in start and VF in stop
synchronous motor
Open-loop
low-frequency
F06.42 0.0~50.0 % 8.0 ○
processing range of
synchronous motor
F06.43 IF injection current 0.0~600.0 % 80.0 ○
F06.44
~F06.4 Reserved
5
Speed tracking
F06.46 proportional gain of 0.00~10.00 1.00 ○
synchronous motor
Speed tracking
F06.47 0.00~10.00 1.00 ○
integral gain of
83
synchronous motor
Filtering time
constant of speed
F06.48 0.00~10.00 ms 0.40 ○
tracking of
synchronous motor
Speed tracking
F06.49 control intensity of 1.0~100.0 5.0 ○
synchronous motor
Speed tracking
F06.50 control threshold of 0.00~10.00 0.20 ○
synchronous motor
Injection current (Iq)
F06.51 rise time of 0.010~1.000 S 5.0
synchronous motor
F07 Protection function setting group
E0
E20 E22 E13 E06 E05 E04 E08
7 000
F07.00 Protection shield ○
0: valid protection 00000
1: shielded protection
Motor overload
F07.01 0.20~10.00 1.00 ●
protection gain
Motor overload
F07.02 50~100 % 80 ●
pre-alarm coefficient
Ones place: Instantaneous
stop/no-stop function options
0: Invalid
1: deceleration
Bus voltage control
F07.06 2: deceleration to stop 10 ○
options
Tens place: Overvoltage stall
function options
0: Invalid
1: valid
Voltage of
131.0
F07.07 overvoltage stall 110.0~150.0 (380V,100.0=537V) % ○
(703V)
control
Instantaneous 60.0 to instantaneous stop/no-stop
F07.08 stop/no-stop recovery voltage (100.0 = % 76.0 ○
operating voltage standard bus voltage)
Instantaneous
Instantaneous stop/no-stop
F07.09 stop/no-stop recovery % 86.0 ●
operating voltage to 100.0
voltage
Check time for
F07.10 0.00-100.00 s 0.50 ●
instantaneous
84
stop/no-stop recovery
voltage
0: Invalid
F07.11 Current limit control 1: limit mode 1 2 ○
2: limit mode 2
20.0-180.0(100.0 = the rated
F07.12 Current limit level % 150.0 ●
current of inverter)
Quick current limit 0: Invalid
F07.13 0 ○
options 1: valid
Number of retries
F07.14 0-20; 0: disable retry after failure 0 ○
after failure
Options of digital
0: no action
F07.15 output action in 0 ○
1: action
retries after failure
Interval of retries
F07.16 0.01~30.00 s 0.50 ●
after failure
Restoration time in
F07.17 0.01~30.00 s 10.00 ●
E0
E07 E03 E02 E06 E05
Options of retries 4 **0
F07.18 ○
after failure 0: allow retry after failure 00000
1: disable retry after failure
E21 E16 E15 E14 E13 E12 E08 E07
Action option 1 after 000
F07.19 0: free stop ○
failure 00000
1: stop according to stop mode
E28 E27 E25 E23
Action option 2 after
F07.20 0: free stop *0000 ○
failure
1: stop according to stop mode
Options of load loss
F07.21 0: invalid 1: valid 0 ●
protection
Load loss detection
F07.22 0.0~100.0 % 20.0 ●
level
Load loss detection
F07.23 0.0~60.0 s 1.0 ●
time
Options of load loss 0: free stop
F07.24 1 ○
protection action 1: stop according to stop mode
F07.25
~F07.2 Reserved
6
0: Invalid
F07.27 AVR function 1: valid 1 ○
2: automatic
85
Stall fault detection 0.0-6,000.0 (0.0: no stall fault
F07.28 s 0.0 ○
time detection)
F07.29 Stall control intensity 0~100 % 20 ○
Instantaneous
F07.30 stop/no-stop 0.00~300.00 s 20.00 ○
deceleration time
F08 Multi-segment speed and simple PLC
Multi-segment speed 0.00 to maximum frequency
F08.00 Hz 0.00 ●
1 F00.16
F08.01 Hz 5.00 ●
2 F00.16
F08.02 Hz 10.00 ●
3 F00.16
F08.03 Hz 15.00 ●
4 F00.16
F08.04 Hz 20.00 ●
5 F00.16
F08.05 Hz 25.00 ●
6 F00.16
F08.06 Hz 30.00 ●
7 F00.16
F08.07 Hz 35.00 ●
8 F00.16
F08.08 Hz 40.00 ●
9 F00.16
0.00 to maximum frequency
F08.09 Multi- speed 10 Hz 45.00 ●
F00.16
F08.10 Hz 50.00 ●
11 F00.16
F08.11 Hz 50.00 ●
12 F00.16
F08.12 Hz 50.00 ●
13 F00.16
F08.13 Hz 50.00 ●
14 F00.16
F08.14 Hz 50.00 ●
15 F00.16
0: stop after a single run
1: stop after a limited number of
Simple PLC running cycles
F08.15 0 ●
mode 2: run at the last segment after a
limited number of cycles
3: continuous cycles
86
Limited number of
F08.16 1~10,000 1 ●
cycles
Ones place: Stop memory options
0: no memory (from the first
segment)
1: memory (from the moment of
stop)
Simple PLC memory
F08.17 Tens place: Power-down memory 0 ●
options
options
0: no memory (from the first
segment)
1: Memory (from the power-down
moment)
0: s (second)
F08.18 Simple PLC time unit 0 ●
1: min (minute)
Ones place: Running direction
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Tens place: Acceleration and
deceleration time options
Setting of the first 0: acceleration and deceleration
F08.19 0 ●
segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
Running time of the s/
F08.20 0.0 - 6000.0 5.0 ●
first segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the second deceleration time options
F08.21 0 ●
segment 0: acceleration and deceleration
time 1
time 2
time 3
87
time 4
F08.22 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
second segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the third 0: acceleration and deceleration
F08.23 0 ●
segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.24 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
third segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the fourth 0: acceleration and deceleration
F08.25 0 ●
segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.26 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
fourth segment min
options
0: forward
Setting of the fifth
F08.27 1: reverse 0 ●
segment
88
time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.28 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
fifth segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the sixth 0: acceleration and deceleration
F08.29 0 ●
segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.30 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
sixth segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the seventh 0: acceleration and deceleration
F08.31 0 ●
segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.32 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
seventh segment min
Setting of the eighth Ones place: Running direction
F08.33 0 ●
segment options
89
0: forward
1: reverse
time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.34 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
eighth segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the ninth 0: acceleration and deceleration
F08.35 0 ●
segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.36 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
ninth segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the tenth
F08.37 0: acceleration and deceleration 0 ●
segment
time 1
time 2
time 3
90
time 4

F08.38 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
tenth segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the 0: acceleration and deceleration
F08.39 0 ●
eleventh segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.40 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
eleventh segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the twelve 0: acceleration and deceleration
F08.41 0 ●
segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.42 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
twelfth segment min
Setting of the options
F08.43 0 ●
thirteenth segment 0: forward
1: reverse
91
time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.44 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
thirteenth segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
F08.45 0 ●
fourteenth segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.46 0.0~6,000.0 5.0 ●
fourteenth segment min
options
0: forward
1: reverse
F08.47 0 ●
fifteenth segment time 1
time 2
time 3
time 4
F08.48 Running time of the 0.0~6,000.0 s/ 5.0 ●
92
fifteenth segment min
F09 PID function group
0: digital PID setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
F09.00 PID setting source 0 ○
4:VP
5: retention
6: communication setting
(percentage setting)
0.0 to PID setting feedback range
F09.01 Digital PID setting 0.0 ●
F09.03
1: AI1
2: AI2
F09.02 PID feedback source 3-5: retention 1 ○
PID setting feedback
F09.03 0.1~6,000.0 100.0 ●
range
PID positive and
0: positive
F09.04 negative action 0 ○
1: negative
selection
F09.05 Proportional gain 1 0.00-100.00 0.40 ●
F09.06 Integral time 1 0.000-30.000, 0.000: no integral s 10.000 ●
F09.07 Differential time 1 0.000-30.000 ms 0.000 ●
F09.09 Integral time 2 0.000-30.000, 0.000: no integral s 10.000 ●
0: no switching
1: switching via digital input
PID parameter
F09.11 terminal 0 ●
switching conditions
2: automatic switching according
to deviation
PID parameter
F09.12 0.00 - F09.13 % 20.00 ●
switching deviation 1
PID parameter
F09.13 F09.12 - 100.00 % 80.00 ●
switching deviation 2
F09.14 Initial PID value 0.00-100.00 % 0.00 ●
PID initial value
F09.15 0.00~650.00 s 0.00 ●
holding time
Upper limit of PID
F09.16 F09.17 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
output
93
Lower limit of PID
F09.17 –100.0 - F09.16 % 0.0 ●
output
F09.18 PID deviation limit 0.00-100.00 (0.00: invalid) % 0.00 ●
F09.19 PID differential limit 0.00-100.00 % 5.00 ●
PID integral 0.00-100.00 (100.00% = invalid
F09.20 % 100.00 ●
separation threshold integral separation)
PID setting change
F09.21 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
PID feedback
F09.22 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
filtering time
PID output filtering
F09.23 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
Upper limit detection
value of PID 0.00-100.00; 100.00 = invalid
F09.24 % 100.00 ●
feedback feedback disconnection
disconnection
Lower limit detection
value of PID 0.00-100.00; 0.00 = invalid
F09.25 % 0.00 ●
feedback feedback disconnection
disconnection
Detection time of PID
F09.26 feedback 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
disconnection
0: Invalid
PID sleep control 1: sleep at zero speed
F09.27 0 ●
options 2: sleep at lower frequency limit
3: sleep with tube sealed
F09.29 Sleep delay time 0.0 - 6500.0 s 0.0 ●
0.00-100.00 (100.00 corresponds
F09.30 Wake-up action point % 0.00 ●
to the PID setting feedback range)
F09.31 Wake-up delay time 0.0~6,500.0 s 0.0 ●
Multi-segment PID 0.0 to PID setting feedback range
F09.32 0.0 ●
setting 1 F09.03
F09.33 0.0 ●
setting 2 F09.03
F09.34 0.0 ●
setting 3 F09.03
Coefficient of 0.0-100.0 (100% corresponds to
F09.40 % 90.0 ●
wake-up action point PID setting)
Pipeline network 0.0 to pressure sensor range
F09.41 bar 6.0 ●
alarm overpressure F09.03
F09.42 Overpressure 0-3,600 (0: invalid) S 3 ●
94
protection time
F10 Communication function group
Local Modbus
F10.00 communication 1-247; 0: broadcast address 1 ○
address
0: 4800
1: 9600
Baud rate of Modbus 2: 19200
F10.01 1 ○
communication 3: 38400
4: 57600
5: 115200
0: 1-8-N-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits
+ 1 stop bit)
1: 1-8-E-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits
+ 1 even parity check bit + 1 stop
bit)
2: 1-8-O-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits
+ 1 odd parity check bit + 1 stop
bit)
F10.02 Modbus data format 0 ○
3: 1-8-N-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits
+ 2 stop bits)
4: 1-8-E-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits
+ 1 even parity check bit + 2 stop
bits)
5: 1-8-O-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits
+ 1 odd parity check bit + 2 stop
bits)
Modbus
0.0~60.0; 0.0: invalid (valid for
F10.03 communication s 0.0 ●
master-slave mode)
timeout
Modbus response
F10.04 1 - 20 ms 2 ●
delay
Options of
master-slave 0: Invalid
F10.05 0 ○
communication 1: valid
function
0: slave
1: host (Modbus protocol
F10.06 Master-slave options 0 ○
broadcast transmission)
2: host (CANSinee protocol)
0: output frequency
F10.07 Data sent by host 1: set frequency 1 ○
2: output torque
95
3: set torque
4: PID setting
5: output current
Proportional factor of
F10.08 0.00-10.00 (multiple) 1.00 ●
slave reception
F10.09 Host sending interval 0.000-30.000 s 0.200 ●
0-10: default operation (for
Options of 485 commissioning)
F10.56 0 ○
EEPROM writing 11: writing not triggered
(available after commissioning)
F11 User-selected parameter group
User-selected
F11.00 U00.00 ●
parameter 1
User-selected
F11.01 U00.01 ●
parameter 2
User-selected
F11.02 U00.02 ●
parameter 3
User-selected
F11.03 U00.03 ●
parameter 4
User-selected
F11.04 U00.04 ●
parameter 5
User-selected
F11.05 U00.07 ●
parameter 6
User-selected
F11.06 The displayed content is Uxx.xx, U00.14 ●
parameter 7
which means that the function
User-selected
F11.07 code Fxx.xx is selected. When the U00.15 ●
parameter 8
function code F11.00 is enabled,
User-selected
F11.08 the keyboard displays U00.00, U00.16 ●
parameter 9
indicating that the first selected
User-selected
F11.09 parameter is F00.00. U00.18 ●
parameter 10
User-selected
F11.10 U00.19 ●
parameter 11
User-selected
F11.11 U00.29 ●
parameter 12
User-selected
F11.12 U02.00 ●
parameter 13
User-selected
F11.13 U02.01 ●
parameter 14
User-selected
F11.14 U02.02 ●
parameter 15
User-selected
F11.15 U03.00 ●
parameter 16
96
User-selected
F11.16 U03.02 ●
parameter 17
User-selected
F11.17 U03.21 ●
parameter 18
User-selected
F11.18 U04.00 ●
parameter 19
User-selected
F11.19 U04.20 ●
parameter 20
User-selected
F11.20 U05.00 ●
parameter 21
User-selected
F11.21 U05.03 ●
parameter 22
User-selected
F11.22 U05.04 ●
parameter 23
User-selected
F11.23 U08.00 ●
parameter 24
User-selected
F11.24 U19.00 ●
parameter 25
User-selected
F11.25 U19.01 ●
parameter 26
User-selected
F11.26 U19.02 ●
parameter 27
User-selected
F11.27 U19.03 ●
parameter 28
User-selected
F11.28 U19.04 ●
parameter 29
User-selected
F11.29 U19.05 ●
parameter 30
User-selected
F11.30 U19.06 ●
parameter 31
User-selected
F11.31 U19.12 ●
parameter 32
F12 Keyboard and display function group
0: no function
1: forward jog
2: reverse jog
M.K multi-function
F12.00 3: forward/reverse switching 1 ○
key options
4: quick stop
5: free stop
6: cursor movement to the left
0: valid only in keyboard control
Options of stop
F12.01 1: with all command channels 1 ○
function of STOP key
valid
97
0: do not lock
1: reference input not locked
F12.02 Parameter locking 0 ●
2: all locked, except for this
function code
Load speed display
F12.09 0.01~600.00 30.00 ●
coefficient
UP/DOWN
0.00: automatic rate
F12.10 acceleration and Hz/s 5.00 ○
0.01~500.00
deceleration rate
Options of 0: do not clear
F12.11 UP/DOWN offset 1: clear in non-running state 0 ○
clearing 2: clear when UP/DOWN invalid
Options of
0: do not save
UP/DOWN
F12.12 1: save (valid after the offset is 1 ○
power-down saving
modified)
of offset
0: do not clear
F12.13 Power meter resetting 0 ●
1: clear
0: No operation
1: restoration of factory defaults
Restoration of default (excluding the motor parameters,
F12.14 0 ○
setting inverter parameters, manufacturer
parameters, running and power-on
time record)
Cumulative power-on
F12.15 0~65,535 h XXX ×
time h
Cumulative power-on
F12.16 0~59 min XXX ×
time min
Cumulative running
F12.17 0~65,535 h XXX ×
time
Cumulative running
F12.18 0~59 min XXX ×
time (min)
Dependi
ng on
Rated power of
F12.19 0.40~650.00 kW the ×
inverter
motor
type
Dependi
Rated voltage of
F12.20 60~690 V ng on ×
inverter
the
98
motor
type
Dependi
ng on
Rated current of
F12.21 0.1~1,500.0 A the ×
inverter
motor
type
Functional software XXX.X
F12.24 XXX.XX ×
S/N 1 X
Functional software XX.XX
F12.25 XX.XXX ×
S/N 2 X
Monitoring mode 0: mode 0
F12.32 1
options 1: mode 1
Running status
display parameter 1
F12.33 of mode 1 (display 0.00 - 99.99 18.00 ●
parameter 5 of LED
stop status)
Running status
display parameter 2
F12.34 of mode 1 (display 0.00 - 99.99 18.01 ●
parameter 1 of LED
stop status)
Running status
display parameter 3
F12.35 of mode 1 (display 0.00 - 99.99 18.06 ●
parameter 2 of LED
stop status)
Running status
display parameter 4
F12.36 of mode 1 (display 0.00 - 99.99 18.08 ●
parameter 3 of LED
stop status)
Running status
display parameter 5
F12.37 of mode 1 (display 0.00 - 99.99 18.09 ●
parameter 4 of LED
stop status)
LCD large-line
F12.38 0.00 - 99.99 18.00 ●
display parameter 1
99
LCD large-line
F12.39 0.00 - 99.99 18.06 ●
display parameter 2
LCD large-line
F12.40 0.00 - 99.99 18.09 ●
display parameter 3
Options of
0: prohibit zero crossing
F12.41 UP/DOWN zero 0 ○
1: allow zero crossing
crossing
Commu Analog Digital Multi-seg
*
UP/DOWN function nication quantity frequency ment speed
F12.45 0/1 * 0/1 0/1 0/1 1 ○
options of keyboard
0: invalid 1: valid
F13 Torque control parameter group
Speed/torque control 0: Speed control
F13.00 0 ○
options 1: Torque control
0: digital torque setting F13.02
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
Options of torque 4:VP
F13.01 0 ○
setting source 5: retention
(Full range of the items 1-6,
corresponding to F13.02 digital
torque setting)
-200.0 to 200.0 (100.0 = the rated
F13.02 Digital torque setting % 100.0 ●
torque of motor)
Multi-segment torque
F13.03 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
1
F13.04 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
2
F13.05 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
3
Torque control
F13.06 acceleration and 0.00 - 120.00 s 0.05 ●
deceleration time
F13.07 Reserved
0: set by F13.09
1: AI1
Upper frequency limit
2: AI2
F13.08 options of torque 0 ○
6: communication percentage
control
setting
7: direct communication setting
Upper frequency limit 0.00 to maximum frequency
F13.09 Hz 50.00 ●
of torque control F00.16
100
Upper frequency limit 0.00 to maximum frequency
F13.10 Hz 0.00 ●
offset F00.16
Reverse speed limit
F13.18 0 - 100 % 100 ●
options
Reverse torque
F13.19 0-1 1 ●
control options
F14 Parameter group of motor 2
0: ordinary asynchronous motor
F14.00 Motor type asynchronous motor 0 ○
2: permanent magnet synchronous
motor
Depending
Rated power of
F14.01 0.10~650.00 KW on the ○
electric motor
motor type
Depending
Rated voltage of
F14.02 50~2000 V on the ○
motor
motor type
0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of Depending
Rated current of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F14.03 A on the ○
motor 0.1 to 6,000.0 (rated power of
motor: > 75 kW) motor type
Depending
Rated frequency of
F14.04 0.01~600.00 Hz on the ○
motor
motor type
Depending
F14.05 Rated speed 1~60,000 rpm on the ○
motor type
Depending
Motor winding 0: Y
F14.06 on the ○
connection 1: Δ
motor type
Depending
Rated power factor of
F14.07 0.600~1.000 on the ○
motor
motor type
F14.08 Motor efficiency 30.0~100.0 % Depending ○
101
on the
motor type
1-60,000 (rated power of motor: ≤ Depending
Stator resistance of 75 kW)
F14.09 mΩ on the ○
asynchronous motor 0.1-6,000.0 (rated power of
motor: > 75kW) motor type
1-60,000 (rated power of motor: ≤ Depending
Rotor resistance of 75 kW)
asynchronous motor 0.1-6,000.0 (rated power of
motor: > 75kW) motor type
Leakage inductance
motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F14.11 of asynchronous mH on the ○
motor
0.1 to 6,000.0 (rated power of Depending
Mutual inductance of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F14.12 mH on the ○
asynchronous motor 0.01 to 600.00 (rated power of
No-load excitation
motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F14.13 current of A on the ○
0.1 to 6,000.0 (rated power of
asynchronous motor
Flux weakening
F14.14 coefficient 1 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 87.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Flux weakening
F14.15 coefficient 2 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 80.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Flux weakening
F14.16 coefficient 3 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 75.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Flux weakening
F14.17 coefficient 4 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 72.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Flux weakening
F14.18 coefficient 5 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 70.00 ○
asynchronous motor
F14.19
- Reserved
F14.33
F14.34 Motor parameter 0: No operation 0 ○
102
self-learning 1: static self-learning of
asynchronous motor
asynchronous motor
Drive control mode of
motor 2
(SVC)
Speed proportional
F14.36 0.00-100.00 15.00 ●
gain ASR_P1
Speed integral time
0.000-30.000
0.000: no integral
ASR_T1
Speed proportional
F14.38 0.00-100.00 10.00 ●
gain ASR_P2
Speed integral time
0.000-30.000
0.000: no integral
ASR_T2
Switching frequency
F14.40 0.00 to switching frequency 2 Hz 5.00 ●
1
Switching frequency Switching frequency 1 to
F14.41 Hz 10.00 ●
2 maximum frequency F00.16
Speed loop
F14.42 anti-saturation 0.000 - 1.000 0.500 ●
coefficient
Filtering time
F14.43 constant of speed 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 ●
loop output
Vector control slip
F14.44 50.00-200.00 % 100.00 ●
gain
Upper limit source 0: set by F06.10 and F06.11
F14.45 selection of speed 1: AI1 0 ○
control torque 2: AI2
F14.46 0.0 - 200.0 % 150.0 ●
F14.47 0.0 - 200.0 % 150.0 ●
Excitation current
F14.48 proportional gain 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
ACR-P1
Excitation current
0.00-600.00
0.00: no integral
ACR-T1
F14.50 Torque current 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
103
proportional gain
ACR-P2
Torque current
0.00-600.00
0.00: no integral
ACR-T2
F14.52 Position loop gain 0.000 - 40.000 1.000 ●
0: braking
SVC zero-frequency
F14.53 1: not processed 2 ○
processing
2: seal the tube
SVC zero-frequency 50.0-400.0 (100.0 is the no-load
F14.54 % 100.0 ○
braking current current of the motor)
SVC low-frequency 50.0-150.0 (100.0 is the no-load
F14.55 % 100.0 ○
excitation current current of the motor)
Voltage feedforward
F14.56 0 - 100 % 0 ●
gain
0: the same as motor 1
time 1
Acceleration/decelera 2: acceleration and deceleration
F14.77 tion time options of time 2 0 ○
motor 2 3: acceleration and deceleration
time 3
time 4
Maximum frequency
F14.78 1.00~600.00 Hz 50.00 ○
of motor 2
Upper frequency limit Lower limit frequency F00.19 to
F14.79 Hz 50.00 ●
of motor 2 maximum frequency F14.78
V/F curve setting of 0: straight line V/F
F14.80 0 ○
motor 2 1: multi-point broken line V/F
Multi-point VF
F14.81 frequency F1 of 0.00 - F14.83 Hz 0.50 ●
motor 2
Multi-point VF
F14.82 0.0~100.0 (100.0 = Rated voltage) % 1.0 ●
voltage V1 of motor 2
Multi-point VF
F14.83 frequency F2 of F14.81 - F14.85 Hz 2.00 ●
motor 2
Multi-point VF
F14.84 0.0-100.0 % 4.0 ●
Multi-point VF
F14.83 to rated frequency of
F14.85 frequency F3 of Hz 5.00 ●
motor (reference frequency)
motor 2
104
Multi-point VF
F14.86 0.0-100.0 % 10.0 ●
F14.87 Stop mode of motor 2 0 ○
1: Free stop
F15 Auxiliary function group
F15.00 Jog frequency Hz 5.00 ●
F00.16
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
F15.01 Jog acceleration time 0.0~6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 5.00 ●
0~65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
F15.02 Jog deceleration time 0.0~6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 5.00 ●
0~65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
0~65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
0~65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
0~65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
0~65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
0~65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00~650.00 (F15.13=0)
0~65000 (F15.13=2)
Fundamental
frequency of 0: maximum frequency F00.16
F15.09 0 ○
acceleration and 1:50.00Hz
deceleration time
Automatic switching
0: Invalid
F15.10 of acceleration and 0 ○
1: valid
deceleration time
Switching frequency
F15.11 of acceleration time 1 Hz 0.00 ●
F00.16
and 2
Switching frequency 0.00 to maximum frequency
F15.12 Hz 0.00 ●
of deceleration time 1 F00.16
105
and 2
0:0.01s
Acceleration and
F15.13 1:0.1s 0 ○
deceleration time unit
2:1s
Frequency hopping
F15.14 0.00-600.00 Hz 600.00 ●
point 1
F15.15 Hopping range 1 0.00-20.00, 0.00 is invalid Hz 0.00 ●
Frequency hopping
F15.16 0.00-600.00 Hz 600.00 ●
point 2
Frequency hopping
F15.18 0.00-600.00 Hz 600.00 ●
point 3
Detection width of
F15.20 output frequency 0.00 - 50.00 Hz 2.50 ○
arrival (FAR)
Output frequency 0.00 to maximum frequency
F15.21 Hz 30.00 ○
detection FDT1 F00.16
F15.22 FDT1 hysteresis -(Fmax-F15.21)~F15.21 Hz 2.00 ○
F15.23 Hz 20.00 ○
Options of analog 0:AI1
F15.25 0 ○
level detection ADT 1: AI2
Analog level
F15.26 0.00-100.00 % 20.00 ●
detection ADT1
0.00 to F15.26 (valid down in one
F15.27 ADT1 hysteresis % 5.00 ●
direction)
Analog level
F15.28 0.00-100.00 % 50.00 ●
detection ADT2
0.00 to F15.28 (valid down in one
direction)
Options of energy
0: Invalid
F15.30 consumption braking 0 ○
1: valid
function
Energy consumption 110.0-140.0 (380V, 100.0 = 125.0
F15.31 % ○
braking voltage 537V) (671V)
20-100 (100 means that duty ratio
F15.32 Braking rate % 100 ●
is 1)
Operating mode with 0: running at the lower frequency
set frequency less limit
F15.33 0 ○
than lower frequency 1: Shutdown
limit 2: zero-speed running
106
0: running after power-on
1: running at startup
F15.34 Fan control 2 ○
2: intelligent operation, subject to
temperature control
Overmodulation
F15.35 1.00 - 1.10 1.05 ●
intensity
0: Invalid
F15.39 Terminal jog priority 0 ○
1: valid
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
Deceleration time for
F15.40 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 1.00 ●
quick stop
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
F15.68 Energy price 0.00 - 100.0 1.00 ●
Power-frequency load
F15.69 30.0-200.0 % 90 ○
factor
F16 Customization function group
0: general model
1: air compressor application
F16.00 Industry application 2: extruder application 0 ○
3: water pump application
4: fan application
1 - 65535 (F16.13=0)
0.1 - 6553.5 (F16.13=1)
F16.01 Set length m 1,000 ●
0.01 - 655.35 (F16.13=2)
0.001 - 65.535 (F16.13=3)
F16.02 Pulses per meter 0.1 - 6553.5 100.0 ●
F16.03 Set count value F16.04 - 65535 1,000 ●
F16.04 Specified count value 1 - F16.03 1,000 ●
Set time of regular
F16.05 0.0-6500.0; 0.0: invalid min 0.0 ●
running
F16.06 Agent password 0 - 65535 0 ●
Setting of cumulative 0-65535; 0: disable the protection
F16.07 h 0 ●
power-on arrival time when the power-on time is up
Setting of cumulative 0-65535; 0: disable the protection
F16.10 h 0 ●
running arrival time when the running time is up
XXXX
F16.09 Factory password 0 - 65535 ●
X
Analog output
percentage
F16.10 0.00-100.00 % 0.00 ○
corresponding to the
count value 0
F16.11 Analog output 0.00-100.00 % 100.00 ○
107
percentage
corresponding to the
set count value
0:1m
1:0.1m
F16.13 Set length resolution 0 ○
2:0.01 m
3:0.001m
F17 Virtual I/O function group
VX1 virtual input
F17.00 0 ○
function options
VX2 virtual input
F17.01 0 ○
function options
VX3 virtual input
F17.02 0 ○
function options
VX4 virtual input
F17.03 The same as the function options 0 ○
function options
of digital input terminal of F02
VX5 virtual input
F17.04 group 0 ○
function options
VX6 virtual input
F17.05 0 ○
function options
VX7 virtual input
F17.06 0 ○
function options
VX8 virtual input
F17.07 0 ○
function options
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1
Virtual input 0: positive logic, valid in the

000
F17.08 positive/negative closed state/invalid in the open ○
00000
logic state
1: Negative logic, invalid in the
closed state/valid in the open state
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

VX1-VX8 status 000
F17.09 0: the VXn status is the same as ○
setting options 00000
VYn output status
1: status set by F17.10
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX1-VX8 status VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1 000
F17.10 ●
setting 0: Invalid 00000
1: valid
F17.11 VX1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F17.12 VX1 invalid delay 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
108
time
VX2 invalid delay
F17.14 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VX3 invalid delay
F17.16 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VX4 invalid delay
F17.18 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY1 virtual output
F17.19 0 ○
function options
VY2 virtual output
F17.20 0 ○
function options
VY3 virtual output
F17.21 0 ○
function options
VY4 virtual output
F17.22 The same as the function options 0 ○
function options
of digital output terminal of F03
VY5 virtual output
F17.23 group 0 ○
function options
VY6 virtual output
F17.24 0 ○
function options
VY7 virtual output
F17.25 0 ○
function options
VY8 virtual output
F17.26 0 ○
function options
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VY8 VY7 VY6 VY5 VY4 VY3 VY2 VY1

Virtual output 0: positive logic, valid in the 000
F17.27 positive/negative closed state/invalid in the open ○
00000
logic state
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Control options of
0: depending on the status of 111
F17.28 virtual output ○
X1-X7 terminals (VY8: none) 11111
terminal
1: depending on the output
function status
F17.29 VY1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
109
VY1 invalid delay
F17.30 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY2 invalid delay
F17.32 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY3 invalid delay
F17.34 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
VY4 invalid delay
F17.36 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
time
Virtual input terminal 000
F17.37 0: Invalid ×
status 00000
1: valid
Virtual output 000
terminal status 00000
1: valid
F18 Monitoring parameter group
F18.00 Output frequency 0.00 to upper frequency limit Hz XXX ×
F18.01 Set frequency Hz XXX ×
F00.16
F18.02 Reserved
Estimate feedback
F18.03 0.00 to upper frequency limit Hz XXX ×
frequency
F18.04 Output torque -200.0 - 200.0 % XXX ×
F18.05 Torque setting -200.0 - 200.0 % XXX ×
motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F18.06 Output current A XXX ×
motor: > 75 kW)
Output current 0.0-300.0 (100.0 = the rated
F18.07 % 0.0 ×
percentage current of inverter)
F18.08 Output voltage 0.0 - 690.0 V XXX ×
F18.09 DC bus voltage 0 - 1200 V XXX ×
Simple PLC running
F18.10 0 - 10000 XXX ×
times
Simple PLC
F18.11 1 - 15 XXX ×
operation stage
PLC running time at
F18.12 0.0 - 6000.0 XXX ×
the current stage
F18.13 Reserved
F18.14 Load rate 0 - 65535 rpm XXX ×
110
UP/DOWN offset 0.00 to 2 * Maximum frequency
F18.15 Hz XXX ×
frequency F00.16
F18.16 PID setting 0.0 to PID maximum range XXX ×
F18.17 PID feedback 0.0 to PID maximum range XXX ×
MW
F18.18 Power meter: MWh 0 - 65535 XXX ×
h
Watt-hour meter:
F18.19 0.0 - 999.9 kWh XXX ×
kWh
F18.20 Output power 0.00~650.00 kW XXX ×
F18.21 Output power factor -1.000 - 1.000 XXX ×
Digital input terminal X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
F18.22 XXX ×
status 1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Digital input terminal * AI2 AI1 * *
F18.23 XXX ×
status 2 * 0/1 0/1 * 0/1
* * R1 * Y1
F18.25 Output terminal status XXX ×
* * 0/1 * 0/1
F18.26 AI1 0.0-100.0 % XXX ×
F18.27 AI2 0.0-100.0 % XXX ×
F18.33 Count value 0 - 65535 XXX ×
F18.34 Actual length 0 - 65535 m XXX ×
Remaining time of
F18.35 0.0 - 6500.0 min XXX ×
regular running
VF separation target
F18.39 0 - 690 V XXX ×
voltage
VF separation output
F18.40 0 - 690 V XXX ×
voltage
F18.51 PID output -300.0 to 300.0 % XXX ×
F18.60 Inverter temperature -40 to 200 °C 0 ×
F18.67 Cumulative energy 0 - 65535 MW XXX ×
saving MWH h
F18.68 Cumulative energy 0.0 - 999.9 kWh XXX ×
saving KWH
F18.69 High cumulative cost 0 - 65535 XXX ×
saving (*1000)
Low cumulative cost
F18.70 saving 0.0 - 999.9 XXX ×
Power-frequency
F18.71 power consumption 0 - 65535 MW XXX ×
MWH h
Power-frequency
F18.72 power consumption 0.0 - 999.9 kWh XXX ×
KWH
F19 Fault record group
0: No failure
F19.00 Last fault category 0 ×
E01: output short circuit
111
protection
E02: instantaneous overcurrent
E03: instantaneous overvoltage
E04: steady-state overcurrent
E05: steady-state overvoltage
E06: Steady-state undervoltage
E07: input phase loss
E08: output phase loss
E09: inverter overload
E10: inverter overheat protection
E11: Parameter setting conflict
E13: motor overload
E14: external fault
E15: inverter memory failure
E16: communication abnormality
E17: Temperature sensor
abnormality
E18: disengaged soft start relay
E19: current detection circuit
abnormality
E20: stall failure
E21: PID feedback disconnection
E22: retention
E24: parameter identification
abnormality
E25: retention
E26: off-load protection
E27: up to the cumulative
power-on time
E28: up to the cumulative running
time
Output frequency in
F19.01 0.00 to upper frequency limit Hz 0.00 ×
failure
Output current in motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F19.02 A 0.00 ×
failure 0.0 to 6500.0 (rated power of
motor: > 75 kW)
F19.03 Bus voltage in failure 0 - 1200 V 0 ×
0: not running
1: forward acceleration
Running status in
F19.04 2: reverse acceleration 0 ×
failure
3: forward deceleration
4: reverse deceleration
112
5: constant speed in forward
running
6: reverse constant speed in
reverse running
Working time in
F19.05 h 0 ×
failure
Previous fault Same as F19.00 parameter
F19.06 0 ×
category description
Output frequency in
F19.07 Hz 0.00 ×
failure
Output current in
F19.08 A 0.00 ×
failure
F19.09 Bus voltage in failure V 0 ×
Running status in Same as F19.04 parameter
F19.10 0 ×
failure description
Working time in
F19.11 h 0 ×
failure
Last two fault Same as F19.00 parameter
F19.12 0 ×
categories description
Output frequency in
F19.13 Hz 0.00 ×
failure
Output current in
F19.14 A 0.00 ×
failure
F19.15 Bus voltage in failure V 0 ×
Running status in Same as F19.04 parameter
F19.16 0 ×
failure description
Working time in
F19.17 h 0 ×
failure
113
Chapter 7 Function Code Details

7.1 Basic Function Parameter Group of F00 Group
Parameter description Unit Attribute
code name setting
Drive control
mode of motor 1
(SVC)
F00.01=0: V/F control (VVF)
It is used for one-to-many, fast and low-precision speed control.
F00.01=1: speed sensorless vector control (SVC)
The open-loop vector control is suitable for general high-performance control. An
inverter drives one motor only of the loads, e.g. machine tools, centrifuges, drawing
machines, and injection molding machines.
1. In order to improve the control performance, self-learning is needed to
obtain the correct motor parameters before vector control.
2. In the vector control mode, the inverter can be used with one motor only,
and the motor capacity should not be greatly different from the inverter capacity;
otherwise, the control performance may decline or the system may not work properly.

code name setting
0: keyboard control (LOC/REM
indicator: ON)
Options of
1: terminal control (LOC/REM
F00.02 command 0 ○
indicator: OFF)
source
2: communication control
(LOC/REM indicator: flicker)
F00.02=0: keyboard control (LOC/REM indicator ON)
The start and stop of the inverter are controlled by the RUN key RUN , STOP key
STOP
RESET and multi-function key M.K on the keyboard. In the case of no fault, press the
multi-function key M.K to enter the jog running status, and the RUN key RUN to
enter the running status. If the green LED indicator above the RUN key RUN is normally
114
ON, it indicates that the inverter is running. If this indicator is flickering, it indicates that
the inverter is in the status of deceleration to stop.
Regardless of the speed or torque reference input control, the inverter will run in the
input control mode at the jog speed once jogging is enabled.
F00.02=1: terminal control (LOC/REM indicator OFF)
The start and stop of the inverter are controlled by the start and stop control terminals
that are defined by the function codes F02.00 to F02.06. Detailed settings of terminal
control are dependent on F00.03.
F00.02=2: Communication control (LOC/REM indicator flickering)
The inverter start and stop are controlled by the host through the RS485
communication port. See the 7000H control description for details.
The final command source also depends on the input functions “24: switching
from the Run command to keyboard” and “25: switching from the Run
command to communication”. If the input function “24: switching from the
Run command to keyboard” is valid, the current command source is
“keyboard control”. If the input function “25: switching from the Run command to
communication” is valid, the current command source is “communication control”.
Otherwise, the command source depends on the setting of the function code F00.02.

code name setting
0: terminal RUN (running) and F/R
(forward/reverse)
1: terminal RUN (forward) and F/R
Options of
(reverse)
F00.03 terminal 0 ○
2: terminal RUN (forward), Xi (stop) and
control mode
F/R (reverse)
3: terminal RUN (running), Xi (stop) and
F/R (forward/reverse)
Terminal RUN: Xi terminal is set to “1: terminal RUN”
Terminal F/R: Xi terminal is set to “1: running direction F/R”
Terminal control can be divided into two types: two-line control and three-line
control.
Two-line control:
115
F00.03=0: the terminal RUN is in the running status, and F/R in the
forward/reverse status.
Enable/Disable the terminal RUN to control the start and stop of the inverter, and the
terminal F/R to control the forward/reverse running. If F00.21 is set to 1 and reverse
running is disabled, the F/R terminal will not be available. If the mode of deceleration to
stop is selected, the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 7-1(b).
F00.03=1: the terminal RUN controls forward running, and the terminal F/R is in
the reverse mode.
Enable/Disable the terminal RUN to control the forward running and stop of the
inverter, and the terminal F/R to control the reverse running and stop. When the terminals
RUN and F/R are enabled simultaneously, the inverter will be stopped. If reverse running is
disabled, the terminal F/R will not be available. If the mode of deceleration to stop is
selected, the forward/reverse logic will be run, as shown in Fig. 7-1(d).
RUN
24V Operation
Inverter RUN F/R
F/R
Forward/ f
reverse Output
frequency
COM Time
-f
(a) Wiring diagram of two-line control (b) Forward/reverse running logic

(F00.03=0) (F04.19=0, F00.03=0)
24V RUN
Forward
RUN F/R
Inverter
F/R f
Reverse
Output
frequency
COM Time
-f
116
(c) Wiring diagram of two-line control (F00.03=1) (d) Forward/reverse running logic
(F04.19=0, F00.03=1)
Fig. 7-1 Two-line Control
When the start/stop value of F00.03 is set to 0 or 1, even if the terminal RUN
is available, the inverter can be stopped by pressing the STOP key or sending
an external stop command to the terminal. In this case, the inverter will not
be in the running status until the terminal RUN is disabled and then enabled.
Three-line control:
F00.03=2: the terminal RUN controls forward running, the terminal Xi is for stop,
and the terminal F/R is in the reverse status.
The terminal RUN is normally ON for forward running, and the terminal F/R is
normally ON for reverse running, with valid pulse edges. The terminal Xi is normally
closed for stop, with the valid level. When the inverter is in the running status, press Xi to
stop it. When the mode of deceleration to stop (F04.19=0) is selected, the logic diagram is
as shown in Fig. 7-2(b). The terminal Xi is for “three-line running and stop control” as
defined by F02.00 to F02.04.
F00.03=3: the terminal RUN is for running, Xi for stop and F/R for
forward/reverse control.
The terminal RUN is normally ON for running, with the valid pulse edge, F/R for
forward/reverse switching (forward in the OFF status and reverse in the ON status), and Xi
is normally OFF for stop, with the valid level. When the mode of deceleration to stop
(F04.19=0) is selected, the logic diagram is as shown in Fig. 7-2(d).
24V RUN
Forward F/R
RUN
Inverter
F/R Xi
Parking f
Xi Output
frequency
Time
COM -f
(a) Wiring diagram of three-line control (b) Forward/reverse running logic
117
(F00.03=2) (F04.19=0, F00.03=2)
RUN
24V
Operation F/R
RUN Forward/
Inverter
reverse
F/R Xi
Parking f
Xi
Output
frequency
COM Time
-f
(c) Wiring diagram of two-line control (d) Forward/reverse running logic

(F00.03=3) (F04.19=0, F00.03=3)
Fig. 7-2 Three-line Control

The three-line control logic of the A90 series inverter is consistent with the
conventional electrical control. The keys and knob switches should be used
correctly as shown in the schematic diagram. Otherwise, operation errors may be
caused.
Function Default
code setting
F00.07
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
Options of main 4: VP (keyboard potentiometer)
F00.04 0 ○
frequency source A 5: retention
6: Percentage setting of main
8: retention
F00.04=0: digital frequency setting F00.07
The main frequency source A depends on the digital frequency setting F00.07.
F00.04=1:AI1
F00.04=2:AI2
F00.04=4:VP
118
The main frequency source A depends on the AI (percentage) * F00.16.
AI1 is the 0-10V voltage input;
AI2 is the 0-10V voltage input or 0-20mA current input, selected via the terminals
S4/S5 on the terminal block;
The percentage corresponding to the input physical quantity of the AI terminal is set
by the function codes F02.31 to F02.36. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of
F00.16 (maximum frequency).
F00.04=4: digital potentiometer setting
Operating instructions for the digital potentiometer: Rotate the digital
potentiometer forward or reversely in the monitoring interface, to increase or decrease the
set frequency.
F00.04=6 or 7: main frequency communication setting
The main frequency source A depends on the communication, etc.
 If the master-slave communication (F10.05=1) is enabled and the inverter works
as the slave (F10.06=0), the main frequency source A is set to “700FH
(master-slave communication setting) * F00.16 (maximum frequency) * F10.08
(slave receiving proportional coefficient)”, and the 700FH data range is -100.00%
to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 0-2.
 For general communication (F10.05=0):
a. F00.04=6 percentage setting: the main frequency source A is set to “7001H
(communication percentage setting of the main channel frequency A) * F00.16
(maximum frequency)”;
b. F00.04=7 direct frequency setting: the main frequency source A is set to “7015H
(communication setting of the main channel frequency A)”
The 7001H data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, and the 7015H data range is 0.00
to F00.16 (maximum frequency), as detailed in Table 0-2.
The final setting of the main frequency source A is also dependent on the DI terminal
status:
Table 7-1 Detailed Setting of Main Frequency Source A
Terminal Function Status Description Priority
11-14: multi-segment speed If one is valid, the multi-segment speed mode will be
1
terminals 1-4 enabled (F08.00-F08.14).
51: switching of main
Valid, depending on the digital frequency setting
frequency source to digital 2
F00.07, the same as the function code F00.04=0
frequency setting
119
52: switching of main Valid, depending on the AI1 input percentage setting,
3
frequency source to AI1 the same as the function code F00.04=1
53: Switching of main Valid, depending on the AI2 input percentage setting,
4
frequency source to AI2 the same as the function code F00.04=2
56: switching of main
Valid, depending on the communication input, the
frequency source to 7
same as the function code F00.04=6
communication setting
-- All invalid, depending on the setting of function
8
code F00.04
Function Default
code setting
F00.07
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
4: VP (keyboard
potentiometer)
Options of auxiliary 5: retention
F00.05 0 ○
frequency source B 6: percent setting of auxiliary
7: direct setting of auxiliary
8: retention
9: retention
10: process PID
11: simple PLC
F00.05=0: digital frequency setting F00.07
The auxiliary frequency B depends on the digital frequency setting F00.07.
F00.05=1:AI1
F00.05=2:AI2
The auxiliary frequency B is determined by AI (percentage) * F00.16.
For the details of AI1 and AI2, refer to the F00.04 description. They have the same
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F00.16 (maximum frequency).
F00.05=4: VP (keyboard potentiometer)
F00.05=6 or 7: auxiliary frequency communication setting
The auxiliary frequency B depends on the communication and others.
120

as the slave (F10.06=0), the auxiliary frequency B is set to “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F00.16 (maximum frequency) * F10.08 (slave
receiving proportional coefficient)”, and the 700FH data range is -100.00% to
100.00%, as detailed in Table 0-2.
a. F00.05=6, the auxiliary frequency B is set to “7002H (communication setting of
the auxiliary channel frequency B) * F00.16 (maximum frequency)”;
b. F00.05=7, the auxiliary frequency B is set to “7016H (communication setting of
the auxiliary channel frequency B)”.
The 7002H data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, and the 7002H data range is 0.00 to
F00.16 (maximum frequency), as detailed in Table 0-2.
F00.05=10: process PID
The auxiliary frequency B depends on the process PID function output, as detailed in
7.10. This is usually applied in on-site closed-loop process control, such as the
constant-pressure closed-loop control and constant-tension closed-loop control.
F00.05=11: Simple PLC
The auxiliary frequency B depends on the simple PLC function output, as detailed in
7.9.
1. The same physical channel (AI1 or AI2) cannot be selected for the main
frequency source A and auxiliary frequency source B;
2. The process PID and simple PLC modules will not be valid until they are
selected.

code name setting
1: auxiliary frequency source B
Options of
2: main and auxiliary operation
F00.06 frequency 0 ○
results
source
frequency source A and auxiliary
121
frequency source B
frequency source A and main and
5: switching between auxiliary
frequency source B and main and
Select the final valid frequency setting channel and operation mode.
F00.06=0: main frequency source A
The final set frequency only depends on the main frequency source A.
F00.06=1: auxiliary frequency source B
The final set frequency only depends on the auxiliary frequency source B.
F00.06=2: main and auxiliary operation results
The final set frequency depends on the main and auxiliary operation results. Refer to
the description of the function code F00.08.
F00.06=3: switching between the main frequency source A and auxiliary
frequency source B
The final set frequency is determined by the status of the input function “26:
Frequency source switching”: invalid, depending on the main frequency source A; valid,
depending on the auxiliary frequency source B.
F00.06=4: switching between main frequency source A and main and auxiliary
calculation results
Frequency source switching”: invalid, depending on the main frequency source A; valid,
depending on the main and auxiliary operation results. Refer to the description of the
function code F00.08.
F00.06=5: switching between the auxiliary frequency source B and main and
Frequency source switching”: invalid, depending on the auxiliary frequency source B; valid,
depending on the main and auxiliary operation results. Refer to the description of the
Function Default
code setting
122
Digital frequency
F00.07 0.00 to maximum frequency Hz 50.00 ●
setting
F00.07 is used to set the digital frequency, and its maximum value is limited by the
maximum frequency (F00.16).
Function Default
code setting
+ auxiliary frequency
source B
- auxiliary frequency
Options of main and
F00.08 source B 0 ○
auxiliary operation
2: larger value of main and
3: smaller value of main
and auxiliary frequency
sources
Select the main and auxiliary operation mode. The final results are limited by the
lower frequency limit (F00.19) and upper frequency limit (F00.18).
F00.08=0: main frequency source A + auxiliary frequency source B
The main and auxiliary operation result is the sum of the two items, and may be
positive or negative. That is, the result of the forward 20.00Hz and reverse 40.00Hz is
reverse 20.00Hz.
F00.08=1: main frequency source A - auxiliary frequency source B
The main and auxiliary operation result is the difference between the two items, and
may be positive or negative. That is, the result of the forward 20.00Hz and reverse 40.00Hz
is forward 50.00Hz (upper frequency limit F00.18=50.00).
F00.08=2: the larger of main and auxiliary operation results
The main and auxiliary operation result is the larger of the two items, and may be
forward 20.00Hz.
F00.08=3: the smaller of main and auxiliary operation results
The main and auxiliary operation result is the smaller of the two items, and may be
123
reverse 40.00Hz.
Function Default
code setting
Reference options of 0: relative to the maximum
auxiliary frequency frequency
F00.09 0 ○
source B in main and1: Relative to main frequency
auxiliary operation source A
During the main and auxiliary operations, the range of the auxiliary frequency source
B depends on the selected object, maximum frequency by default. If selected relative to the
main frequency source A (F00.09=1), the range of the auxiliary frequency source B will
change along with that of the main frequency source A (according to the maximum
frequency by default).
Function Default
code setting
Gain of main frequency
F00.10 0.0~300.0 % 100.0 ●
source
Gain of auxiliary
F00.11 0.0~300.0 % 100.0 ●
frequency source
Synthetic gain of main
F00.12 and auxiliary frequency 0.0~300.0 % 100.0 ●
sources
0: synthetic frequency of main
and auxiliary channels
Analog adjustment of 1: AI1 * synthetic frequency
F00.13 0 ○
synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary channels
2: AI2 * synthetic frequency
of main and auxiliary channels
Such parameters are mainly used to adjust the gain of each setting source, as shown in
Fig. 7-3. Both the main frequency source A and the auxiliary frequency source B have a set
gain. When synthesis is selected via the function code F00.06, a synthetic gain will be
generated. The final setting is limited by the analog adjustment and upper and lower
frequency limits.
124
Synthesis
Setting of main Gain of main F00.06, etc.
frequency source A frequency source Limit
F00.04, etc. F00.10 Synthetic gain of main Analog adjustment of
and auxiliary frequency synthetic frequency
Setting of auxiliary Gain of auxiliary sources (F00.12) (F00.13)
frequency source B frequency source
F00.05, etc. F00.11
Fig. 7-3 Frequency Source Setting Control (Gain Description)

The gain type function codes (F00.10 to F00.12) are for “multiplication”, i.e. “set
value = original set value * gain”. Below is only the description of the analog adjustment
(F00.13).
F00.13=0: synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary channels
The synthetic frequency is directly set to the synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary
channels.
F00.13=1: AI1 * synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary channels
F00.13=2: AI2 * synthetic frequency of main and auxiliary channels
The synthetic frequency is directly set to “AI (percentage) * synthetic frequency of
main and auxiliary channels”.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage relative to the synthetic frequency of main and
auxiliary channels.
Function Default
code setting
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
F00.14 Acceleration time 1 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 15.00 ●
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
F00.15 Deceleration time 1 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 15.00 ●
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
The acceleration time is the time for the output frequency to rise from 0.00Hz to the
set value Fbase of F15.09 (reference frequency of the acceleration and deceleration time);
and the deceleration time is the time for the output frequency to fall from Fbase to 0.00Hz,
regardless of forward and reverse running. See Fig. 7-4.
125
Output Output
frequency frequency
(Hz) (Hz)
Fbase Fbase
Time Time
(s) (s)
t1 t2
(a) Acceleration time 1 (b) Deceleration time 1

Fig. 7-4 Acceleration and Deceleration Time
Note that the acceleration and deceleration time is in 0.01 s, 0.1 s or 1s, depending
on the F15.13.
Function code Default

Function code Parameter description Unit Attribute
name setting
Maximum
F00.16 1.00~600.00 Hz 50.00 ○
frequency
The allowable maximum frequency of the inverter is represented by Fmax. The Fmax
range is from 20.00 to 600.00Hz.
Function Default
code setting
0: set by F00.18
1: AI1
2: AI2
Options of upper 3: retention
F00.17 frequency limit 5: retention 0 ○
control 6: percent setting of upper limit
7: direct setting of upper limit
Upper frequency Lower frequency limit F00.19 to
F00.18 Hz 50.00 ●
limit maximum frequency F00.16
Lower frequency 0.00 to upper frequency limit
F00.19 Hz 0.00 ●
limit F00.18
F00.17=0: set by F00.18
The upper frequency limit is set by F00.18.
F00.17=1:AI1
126
F00.17=2:AI2
The upper frequency limit depends on AI (percentage) * F00.18.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage relative to the set value of F00.18 (upper frequency
limit).
F00.17=6 or 7: communication setting
The torque depends on the communication and the like.
 If the master-slave communication (F10.05=1) is enabled, and the inverter works
as the slave (F10.06=0), the actual upper frequency limit is “700FH
(master-slave communication setting) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional
coefficient) * F00.18 (upper frequency limit)”, and the 700FH data range is
-100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 0-2.
a. F00.17=6, the actual frequency limit is “700AH (communication setting of the
upper frequency limit) * F00.18 (upper frequency limit)”.
b. F00.17=7, the actual frequency limit is “7017H (communication setting of the
upper frequency limit)”.
The 700AH data range is 0.00% to 200.00%, and the 7017H data range is 0.00 to
F00.16 (maximum frequency). For details, see Table 0-2.
F00.18 is the highest frequency allowed after the inverter is started. It is represented
by Fup, ranging from Fdown to Fmax;
F00.19 is the lowest frequency allowed after the inverter is started. It is represented by
Fdown, ranging from 0.00Hz to Fup.
1. The upper and lower frequency limits should be set carefully according to the
nameplate parameters and operating conditions of the actually controlled motor,
and the motor should be prevented from long-time operation at the low
frequency; otherwise, the motor life may be shortened due to overheat.
2. Relationship of the maximum frequency, upper frequency limit and lower frequency
limit: 0.00Hz≤Fdown≤Fup≤Fmax≤600.00Hz.
3. When the set frequency is lower than F00.19 (lower frequency limit), the running mode
is dependent on F15.33.
127

name setting
Running 0: consistent direction
F00.20 0 ●
direction 1: opposite direction
The rotation direction of the motor can be changed by modifying this function code
instead of motor wiring. This is equivalent to the change in the rotation direction of the
motor by adjusting any two wires of the motor (U, V, W).
1． After the parameters are initialized, the rotation direction of the motor will
return to its original status.
2． Be careful to conduct the aforesaid operation where it is forbidden to
change the rotation direction of the motor after system debugging.
3． When the inverter is prohibited from reverse running (e.g. F00.21=1), this function is
invalid.

name setting
0: Allow forward/reverse
F00.21 Reverse control running 0 ○
Duration of
F00.22 forward and 0.00~650.00 s 0.00 ●
reverse dead zone
F00.21=0: reversing running is allowed.
The rotation direction of the motor is controlled by the setting of the F/R terminal or
F00.20.
F00.21=1: reverse running is prohibited.
The motor can only work in one direction, and the F/R terminal and F00.20 are
invalid.
Select the forward/reverse status of the motor.
If F00.22=0.00 is set, forward and reverse running is subject to smooth transition.
If F00.22≠0 is set, when the speed drops to 0.00Hz during forward and reverse
switching, the inverter will work at 0.00Hz within the duration of the forward and reverse
dead zone (F00.22) and then in the opposite direction to the set frequency. See Fig. 7-5.
128
Output
frequency
Time
Duration of Duration of
forward and forward and
reverse dead reverse dead
zone zone
Fig. 7-5 Schematic Diagram of Duration of Forward/Reverse Dead Zone
When reverse running is allowed, the running direction of the inverter depends
on the status of the F/R terminal and the set value of F00.20. If the set forward
running direction of the inverter is inconsistent with the desired rotation direction
of the motor, exchange any two of the output terminal wires (U, V, W) of the inverter,
or set F00.20 to the opposite value.
Function Function Default

code code name setting
1.0-16.0 (rated power of the inverter: less than
4.00kW)
4.0 (7.5
1.0-10.0 (rated power of the inverter:
and
Carrier 5.50-7.50kW)
F00.23 kHz below) ●
frequency 1.0-8.0 (rated power of inverter 11.00-45.00kW)
/2.0
1.0-4.0 (rated power of inverter 55.00-90.00kW)
1.0-3.0 (rated power of inverter
110.00-560.00kW)
Increasing the carrier frequency can reduce the motor noise, but will lead to the heat
increase of the inverter. When the carrier frequency is higher than the default value and
increased by 1kHz, the load needs to be derated to some extent. Please set F00.24=1. The
actual carrier frequency of the inverter will be adjusted automatically according to the
actual situation.
The recommended relationship between the rated power and carrier frequency of the
inverter is shown in Table 7-2.
129
Table 7-2 Relationship between Rated Power and Carrier Frequency Setting of Inverter
Inverter power
Pe≤4kW 5.5kW~7.5kW 11kW~45kW 55kW~90kW 110kW~560kW
Pe
Rated carrier
4.0kHz 2.0kHz
frequency
Maximum
allowable
16.0kHz 10.0kHz 8.0kHz 4.0kHz 3.0kHz
carrier
frequency

name setting
Automatic
0: Invalid
adjustment of
F00.24 1: valid 1 1 ○
carrier
2: valid 2
frequency
F00.24=0: invalid
The carrier frequency is dependent on F00.23, but limited by the allowable maximum
carrier frequency. It will not change during operation.
F00.24=1: valid 1
The carrier frequency is affected by the inverter temperature and load based on the
F00.23 setting. If the inverter temperature is too high or the load is too heavy, the carrier
frequency will be limited. When the set carrier frequency F00.23 is greater than the limit,
the carrier frequency of the inverter will be the limit during operation.
F00.24=2: valid 2
The carrier frequency is auto-tuned on the basis of the F00.23 setting.
Function Default
code setting
Noise suppression of 0: Invalid
F00.25 0 ○
carrier frequency 1: valid
Noise suppression
F00.27 10~150 Hz 100 ●
intensity
When the noise suppression function is enabled (F00.25=1), the motor noise can be
suppressed to a certain extent.
130
name setting
Options of motor 0: parameter group of motor 1
F00.28 0 ○
parameter group 1: parameter group of motor 2
The A90 series inverter supports time-sharing control of two motors. The motor
parameters and control parameters can be set separately. The corresponding parameters of
the motor 1 are in the F00 group, F01 group and F06 group, and those of the motor 2 are in
the F14 group.
The valid motor can be selected in conjunction with F00.28 and the input function
“Motor 1/Motor 2 switching”, as detailed in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Details of Motor Parameter Group Options
F00.28: Motor parameter 30: motor 1/motor 2 Related parameter
Valid motor
group options switching group
0: parameter group of Invalid Motor 1 F00/F01/F06
motor 1 Valid Motor 2
F14
1: parameter group of Invalid Motor 2
motor 2 Valid Motor 1 F00/F01/F06

name setting
F00.29 User password 0 - 65535 0 ○
F00.29 is used to set a password to enable the password protection and prevent the
function code parameters of the inverter from modification by unauthorized personnel. If
the password is set to 0, the password function will be invalid. When a non-zero user
password is set, all parameters (except this function code) can only be viewed and are not
modifiable.
name setting
0: G type
F00.30 Inverter type 0 ○
1: P type
F00.30=0: set the inverter to G type, suitable for mechanical and constant-torque
loads;
F00.30=1: set the inverter to P type, suitable for fans or pumps (i.e. square or cubic
torque loads).
★: When the P type is set, refer to the nameplate for the applicable motor power. This
must not be applied to constant-torque loads.
131
7.2 Motor 1 parameter group of F01 group

Function Default
code setting
0: ordinary asynchronous
motor
F01.00 Motor type 0 ○
asynchronous motor
2: permanent magnet
synchronous motor
The A90 series inverter supports asynchronous and synchronous motors. Please set this
parameter correctly according to the actual situation.
Function Function code

Parameter description Unit Default setting Attribute
code name
Rated power of Depending on the
F01.01 0.10~650.00 kW ○
electric motor motor type
Rated voltage of Depending on the
F01.02 50~2000 V ○
motor motor type
0.01 ~ 600.00 (rated power
Rated current of of motor: ≤ 75 kW) Depending on the
F01.03 A ○
motor 0.1 ~ 6000.0 (rated power of motor type
motor: > 75 kW)
Rated frequency Depending on the
F01.04 0.01~600.00 Hz ○
of motor motor type
Depending on the
F01.05 Rated speed 1~60000 rpm ○
motor type
Motor winding 0: Y Depending on the
F01.06 ○
connection 1: Δ motor type
Rated power Depending on the
F01.07 0.600~1.000 ○
factor of motor motor type
Depending on the
F01.08 Motor efficiency 30.0~100.0 % ○
motor type
The above function codes are the nameplate parameters of the asynchronous motor.
When the motor is connected to the inverter for the first time, regardless of VF control or
vector control, the above parameters must be correctly set according to the motor nameplate
before operation.
When the rated power (F01.01) of the motor is changed, the values of F01.03 to
F01.08 of the inverter will change automatically. Pay attention to this during operation.
132
code name setting
1~60,000 (rated power of motor: ≤
Stator resistance Depending
75 kW)
F01.09 of asynchronous mΩ on the ○
0.1~6,000.0 (rated power of
motor motor type
motor: > 75kW)
1~60,000 (rated power of motor: ≤
Rotor resistance Depending
75 kW)
F01.10 of asynchronous mΩ on the ○
0.1~6,000.0 (rated power of
motor motor type
motor: > 75kW)
Leakage 0.01 ~ 600.00 (rated power of
Depending
inductance of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
asynchronous 0.001~ 60.000 (rated power of
motor type
motor motor: > 75 kW)
Mutual 0.1 ~ 6,000.0 (rated power of
Depending
asynchronous 0.01 ~ 600.00 (rated power of
motor type
motor motor: > 75 kW)
No-load
0.01 ~ 600.00 (rated power of
excitation Depending
motor: ≤ 75 kW)
F01.13 current of A on the ○
0.1 ~ 6,000.0 (rated power of
asynchronous motor type
motor: > 75 kW)
motor
The function codes F01.09 to F01.13 are the parameters of the asynchronous motor.
They are usually unavailable to users. Please get them through motor parameter
self-identification (F01.34).
When the motor parameters (F01.01 to F01.08) are modified, the values of F01.09 to
F01.13 of the inverter will change automatically. Pay attention to this during operation.
Before the motor parameter self-identification, be sure to set F01.00 to F01.08
correctly according to the actual situation.
The specific meanings of motor parameters are shown in Fig. 7-6:
133
R1 L1-Lm R2 L2-Lm
I1
I2
U1 (1-s)/s*R2
I0 Lm
Fig. 7-6 Steady-state Equivalent Model of Asynchronous Motor

R1, L1, R2, L2, Lm, and I0 in the figure represent: stator resistance, stator inductance,
rotor resistance, rotor inductance, mutual inductance, no-load excitation current.
Function Default
code setting
Magnetic saturation
F01.14 coefficient 1 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 87.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
F01.15 coefficient 2 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 80.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
F01.16 coefficient 3 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 75.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
F01.17 coefficient 4 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 72.00 ○
asynchronous motor
Magnetic saturation
F01.18 coefficient 5 of 10.00 - 100.00 % 70.00 ○
asynchronous motor
The magnetic saturation coefficient of the asynchronous motor is automatically set
during the motor parameter self-identification. Users do not need to set it under normal
circumstances.

code name setting
Stator 1~60,000 (rated power of motor: Depending
resistance of ≤75kW)
synchronous 0.1 ~ 6,000.0 (rated power of
motor motor: > 75 kW) motor type
134
d-axis 0.01 ~ 600.00 (rated power of Depending
synchronous 0.001 ~ 60.000 (rated power of
q-axis 0.01 ~ 600.00 (rated power of Depending
synchronous 0.001~ 60.000 (rated power of
Counter
electromotive Depending
10.0~2,000.0 (counter electromotive
F01.22 force of V on the ○
force of rated speed)
synchronous motor type
motor
Initial
electrical angle 0.0~359.9 (valid for synchronous
F01.23 0.0 ○
of synchronous motor)
motor
The function codes F01.19 to F01.23 are the parameters of the synchronous motor. They
are usually unavailable to users. Please get them through motor parameter
self-identification (F01.34).
Before the motor parameter self-identification, be sure to set F01.00 to F01.08
correctly according to the actual situation. In particular, select the motor type (F01.00=2)
correctly.
Function Default
code setting
0: No operation
asynchronous motor
Motor parameter
F01.34 asynchronous motor 0 ○
self-learning
synchronous motor
12: rotary self-learning of
synchronous motor
F01.34=0: not identified
F01.34=1: the asynchronous motor remains stationary during parameter
self-identification.
Prior to the static self-learning of the asynchronous motor, please set the motor type
135
(F01.00) and motor nameplate parameters (F01.01 to F01.08) correctly. Relevant

parameters (F01.09 to F01.13) of the asynchronous motor can be obtained during static
self-learning.
This mode is mainly used when the motor cannot rotate. Static self-learning has poorer
effects than rotary self-learning.
F01.34=2: the asynchronous motor rotates during parameter self-identification.
Prior to the rotary self-learning of the asynchronous motor, please set the motor type
parameters (F01.09 to F01.18) of the asynchronous motor can be obtained during rotary
self-learning.
This mode is mainly used when the motor can rotate. However, loads should be
avoided or minimized; otherwise, self-learning will have poor effects.
F01.34=11: the synchronous motor remains stationary during parameter
self-identification.
Prior to the static self-learning of the synchronous motor, please set the motor type
parameters (F01.09 to F01.21) of the synchronous motor and current loop parameters
(F06.12 to F06.15) can be obtained during static self-learning.
This mode is mainly used when the motor cannot rotate. It is necessary to manually
enter the counter electromotive force (F01.22).
F01.34=12: the synchronous motor rotates during parameter self-identification.
Prior to the rotary self-learning of the synchronous motor, please set the motor type
parameters (F01.09 to F01.21) of the synchronous motor, current loop parameters (F06.12
to F06.15) and counter electromotive force (F01.22) can be obtained during rotary
self-learning.
This mode is mainly used when the motor can rotate. However, loads should be
avoided or minimized; otherwise, self-learning will have poor effects.
1. Motor parameter self-learning is valid only in the keyboard-controlled
start/stop mode (F00.02=0): Set F01.34 to the corresponding value, and press
the ENTER key ENTER
for confirmation and then the RUN key RUN to
start motor parameter self-learning. After the parameter self-learning, F01.34
136
of the inverter will be automatically set to 0.
2. If there is an overcurrent or overvoltage fault during self-learning, extend the
acceleration and deceleration time and try again.
3. The first group of motor parameters is taken as an example above. For the second
group of motor parameters, refer to the above description.
7.3 Function Parameter Group of Input Terminal of F02 Group

The standard A90 series inverter is equipped with five multi-function digital input
terminals (X1 to X5) and two analog input terminals (AI1 and AI2, to be used with the
corresponding function set to digital input, as detailed in the F02.31 description).
Function Parameter Default
Function code name Unit Attribute
code description setting
Options of X1 digital input
F02.00 1 ○
function
F02.01 2 ○
function
F02.02 See Table 7-4 11 ○
function
Function List of
F02.03 Multi-function 12 ○
function
Digital Input
F02.04 Terminals 13 ○
function
Options of AI1 digital input
F02.07 0 ○
function
Options of AI2 digital input
F02.08 0 ○
function
The terminals X1 to X5, AI1 and AI2 are seven multi-function input terminals. The
functions of the input terminals can be defined by setting the values of the function codes
F02.00 to F02.14.
For example, if you define F02.00=1, the function of the X1 terminal is “RUN”. If the
command source is set to terminal control (F00.02=1) and the X1 terminal input is valid,
the “RUN” function of the inverter will be enabled. Specific options are described in Table
7-4.
If multiple terminals are set to the same function (except for #34 function terminal),
the function status is dependent on the “OR logic” of the two terminals. In the case of
137
F02.00=1 and F02.04=1, once one of the terminals X1 or X5 is valid, the “RUN” function
of the inverter will be enabled.
Table 7-4 Function List of Multi-function Digital Input Terminals
Settings Function Description
The function is not used or the fault terminal is set to “0: no
0 No function
function” to avoid misoperation.
When the command source is set to terminal control
(F00.02=1), and the function terminal is valid, the inverter
Running terminal
1 will execute the corresponding RUN function according to
(RUN)
the set value of the terminal control mode option (F00.03).
(See the explanation of the function code F00.03 for details.)
(F00.02=1), and the function terminal is valid, the inverter
Running direction
2 will execute the corresponding F/R function according to the
F/R
set value of the terminal control mode option (F00.03). (See
the explanation of the function code F00.03 for details.)
(F00.02=1), the terminal control mode is set to three-line
Stop control of
3 control (F00.03=2/3) and the function terminal is valid, the
three-line operation
inverter will execute the stop command. (See the explanation
of the function code F00.03 for details.)
4 Forward jog (FJOG) (F00.02=1), and the function terminal FJOG is valid, the
inverter will run forward; if the function terminal RJOG is
valid, the inverter will run reversely; and if the two function
terminals are valid at the same time, the inverter will
5 Reverse jog (RJOG) decelerate to stop.
★: When reverse running is prohibited, the reverse jog will
be invalid.
If the function terminal UP is valid, the frequency offset will
6 Terminal UP be increase at the rate defined by F12.11; and if the function
terminal DOWN is valid, the frequency offset will decrease
at the rate defined by F12.11.
If the UP/DOWN offset clear terminal is valid, the frequency
7 Terminal DOWN
offset will be cleared to 0.
Final set frequency of the frequency source A = set
frequency of the frequency source A + UP/DOWN offset.
★: The UP/DOWN function is valid only when the main
Clear UP/DOWN frequency source A is involved in setting.
8
offset The offset frequency can be viewed via F18.15.
The function of the terminal UP/DOWN is the same as that
of the UP/DOWN on the keyboard.
138
If this function terminal is valid during inverter operation,
9 Free stop the output will be blocked, the inverter will stop in the free
status, and the motor will not be controlled by the inverter.
If the inverter fails and the faulty point is eliminated, you
10 Fault resetting can use this terminal to reset the inverter. This has the same
function as the Reset key on the keyboard.
When the speed control and main frequency source A are
involved in setting, four function input terminals can be
Multi-segment defined as multi-segment speed terminals. The current set
11 frequency of the inverter depends on the code combination
speed terminal 1
of these four terminals and the settings of related function
codes. Details are given in the following table. (0/1: the
current function terminal is invalid/valid.)
★: When a function has no corresponding input terminal
options, it is invalid (0) by default.
Multi-segment
12 14 13 12 11 Set frequency of the inverter
speed terminal 2
Depending on the option (F00.04)
0 0 0 0
of the main frequency source A
0 0 0 1 Multi-segment speed 1 (F08.00)
Multi-segment
13 0 1 0 0 Multi-segment speed 4 (F08.03)
speed terminal 3
Multi-segment 1 0 1 1 Multi-segment speed 11 (F08.10)
14
speed terminal 4 1 1 0 0 Multi-segment speed 12 (F08.11)
The 4-segment PID setting can be performed via these two
Multi-segment PID terminals, as detailed in the following table (0/1: the current
15
terminal 1 function terminal is invalid/valid).
16 15 Multi-segment PID setting
0 0 Depending on the PID setting source
Multi-segment PID (F09.00)
16 0 1 Multi-segment PID setting 1 (F09.32)
terminal 2
1 0 Multi-segment PID setting 2 (F09.33)
1 1 Multi-segment PID setting 3 (F09.34)
139
The 4-segment torque setting can be performed via these two
Multi-segment terminals, as detailed in the following table (0/1: the current
17
torque terminal 1 function terminal is invalid/valid).
18 17 Multi-segment torque setting
0 0 Depending on the torque setting source
option (F13.01)
Multi-segment
18 0 1 Multi-segment torque 1 (F13.03)
torque terminal 2
1 0 Multi-segment torque 2 (F13.04)
1 1 Multi-segment torque 3 (F13.05)
The inverters of this series have four groups of acceleration
and deceleration time in total. You can define two function
input terminals as acceleration and deceleration time
Acceleration and terminals. The current acceleration/deceleration time of the
19 deceleration time inverter depends on the code combination of these four
terminal 1 terminals and settings of related function codes. Details are
given in the following table. (0/1: the current function
terminal is invalid/valid); or see the function codes F15.03 to
F15.13 for details.
20 19 Acceleration and deceleration time
0 0 The first group (acceleration time: F00.14;
deceleration time: F00.15)
Acceleration and 0 1 The second group (acceleration time: F15.03;
20 deceleration time deceleration time: F15.04)
terminal 2 1 0 The third group (acceleration time: F15.05;
Deceleration time: F15.06)
1 1 The fourth group (acceleration time: F15.07;
Deceleration time: F15.08)
When the acceleration and deceleration prohibition terminal
is valid, the execution of acceleration and deceleration
Acceleration and
commands will be prohibited, and the output frequency of
21 deceleration
the inverter will remain unchanged. The inverter in the
prohibition
overcurrent protection status will run based on the current
limit.
The inverter decelerates to stop, but all running parameters
will be kept in the memory, such as PLC and PID
22 Operation pause
parameters. When this terminal is invalid, the inverter will
restore the running status before stop.
Using this terminal, you can input the fault signal of the
external device, to facilitate fault monitoring and protection
23 External fault input of the external device via the inverter. Upon receiving an
external fault signal, the inverter will display “E14” and
freely stop running.
140
Switching of RUN The current command channel depends on the status of these
24 command to two terminals and setting of F00.02. The priority is as
keyboard follows: “24: switching of RUN command to keyboard” >
Switching of RUN “25: switching of RUN command to communication” >
25 command to “F00.02: command source option”. Refer to the F00.02
communication description for details.
This terminal is mainly used to switch the frequency sources
Frequency source in conjunction with the function code F00.06. When
26
switching F00.06=3 to 5, this terminal will be valid. Refer to the
F00.06 description.
The regular running function is defined by F16.05. This
Clearing of regular terminal can be used to clear the running time (reset the
27
running time remaining time of regular running). Refer to the F16.05
description.
Speed These two terminals are used to change the current inverter
28 control/torque control mode in conjunction with F13: When #28 terminal is
control switching valid, speed control and torque control can be switched; and
Torque control when #29 terminal is valid, only speed control is enabled.
29
prohibition See the F13.00 description.
This terminal is used to determine the current valid motor in
Motor 1/Motor 2 conjunction with F00.28. If #30 terminal is valid, the motors
30
switching will be switched based on the F00.28 setting. See the F00.28
description.
Resetting of simple
PLC status (running When this terminal is valid, the simple PLC module will
from the first restart running from the first segment. To further understand
31
segment, with the this function, you can view the simple PLC description of
running time the F08 group.
cleared)
When this terminal is valid, the simple PLC module will
simple PLC time
keep running at the current segment. When this terminal is
32 pause (keep running
invalid, the simple PLC module will continue to run after
at current segment)
running at the current segment.
33 Reserved
It is a pulse input terminal that has the counting function.
counter input The input pulse frequency is limited to 250Hz or below, and
34
(≤250Hz) only one terminal can be set with this function. See the
description of the function codes F16.03 to F16.04.
It is a pulse input terminal that has the counting function.
high-speed count The input pulse frequency is limited to 100kHz or below.
35 input (≤100kHz, This is valid only for the terminal X7 (that is, only
only valid for X7) F02.06=35 can be set). See the description of the function
codes F16.03 to F16.04.
141
This terminal is used to clear the counter that has a counting
36 Count clearing
function.
This is the pulse input terminal that has a length counting
Length counter function, the input pulse frequency is limited to 250Hz or
37
input (≤250Hz) below, and only one terminal can be set with this function.
See the description of the function codes F16.01 to F16.02.
This is the pulse input terminal that has a length counting
High-speed count function, and the input pulse frequency is limited to 100kHz
38 input (≤100kHz, or below. It is invalid only for the terminal X7 (that is, only
only valid for X7) F02.06=38 can be set). See the description of the function
codes F16.01 to F16.02.
39 Length clearing This length clearing terminal has a length counting function.
This is a pulse signal input terminal, and the input pulse
frequency is limited to 100kHz or below. It is valid only for
Pulse input (≤ 100 the terminal X7.
40 kHz, only valid for ★: This is used only to set the equivalent AI percentage
X7) instead of other special functions (e.g. counting). When
F00.04=5, you need to set F02.06=40 and the set frequency
pulse needs to be inputted from the terminal X7.
When this terminal is valid, PID adjustment will be stopped,
and the output of the process PID module will remain
41 Process PID pause
unchanged. For more information, refer to the description of
the function code F09.18.
When this terminal is valid, the PID integral adjustment will
Process PID integral be suspended, but the proportional and differential
42
pause adjustment of the PID will be still valid. This function is
known as integral separation. See the F09.20 description.
If the digital input terminal (F09.11=1) for PID parameter
PID parameter
43 switching is valid, PID parameters will be switched. See the
switching
PID When this terminal is valid, the PID positive/negative modes
44 positive/negative will be switched. See the description of the function code
switching F09.04.
When a stop command is triggered and the frequency
reaches the starting frequency (F04.20) for direct braking
Stop and DC
45 during stop, braking will be enabled. The braking time is
braking
subject to the longer of the terminal closing time and
stop/DC braking time (F04.22).
The stop command is not triggered. When there is a stop
command, and the frequency reaches the starting frequency
46 DC braking at stop (F04.20) for direct braking during stop, braking will be
enabled. The braking time is subject to the longer of the
terminal closing time and stop/DC braking time (F04.22).
142
The inverter will immediately stop running and be subject to
Immediate DC
47 DC braking at the current frequency. The braking current is
braking
dependent on the DC braking current (F04.21) in stop.
Fastest deceleration The inverter will stop running within the minimum
48
to stop allowable acceleration and deceleration time.
49 Reserved
When this terminal is valid, the inverter will stop running
50 External stop according to the set stop mode (F04.19) and
acceleration/deceleration time 4 (F15.07/F15.08).
Switching of main
frequency source to
51
digital frequency
setting
Switching of main
52 frequency source to
AI1 When the main frequency source A is involved in setting, the
Switching of main multi-segment speed model is not enabled and this terminal
53 frequency source to is valid, the main frequency source will be switched to the
AI2 corresponding setting. The functions 51 to 56 can work
Switching of main independently, but subject to the priority. See the description
frequency source to of the function code F00.04 Table 7-1.
55
high-frequency
pulse input
Switching of main
frequency source to
56
communication
setting
When the inverter meets the operating conditions and the
current function terminal is valid, the inverter is able to run.
Otherwise, it will not run even if other operating conditions
are met.
57 Inverter enabling ★: Inverter enabling function: If no terminal is selected, this
function is valid by default; if one terminal is selected, the
status of the selected terminal will prevail; and if more than
one terminal is selected and any selected terminal is invalid,
this function will not be valid.
58-68 Reserved
Prohibition of When this terminal is valid, its function is the same as that in
69
reversing the case of F00.21=1.
70-78 Reserved
Switching of main
165
frequency to VP
143
Function Function code Default Attri

Parameter description Unit
code name setting bute
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Positive/negati * * * X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
ve logic 1 of 0: positive logic is valid in the closed *00
F02.15 ○
digital input state/invalid in the open state 00000
terminal 1: negative logic is valid in the closed
state/invalid in the open state
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Positive/negat * * * * * * AI2 AI1
ive logic 2 of 0: positive logic is valid in the closed 000
F02.16 ○
digital input state/invalid in the open state 00000
terminal 1: negative logic is valid in the closed
state/invalid in the open state
Xi input Close Off
Positive logic
sampling Valid Invalid
Negative logic
sampling Invalid Valid
Fig. 7-7 Schematic Diagram of Positive/Negative Logic Sampling of Terminal

When the bit is set to 0, the multi-function input terminal is valid in the closed status
and invalid in the open status;
When the bit is set to 1, the multi-function input terminal is valid in the open status
and invalid in the closed status.
These function code are subject to bit operation. You only need to set the
corresponding bit to 0 or 1. Take F02.15 as an example, as shown in the following table:
Table 7-5 Function Code Details of Bit Operation
Setting item * * * X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
Correspond * * * 4 3 2 1 0
ing bit
Settings * * * 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
The seventh bit is reserved and cannot be set. The specific displayed value does not
mean anything.
144
For example: To set the terminal X1 to reverse logic, you only need to set the 0th bit
corresponding to X1 to 1, i.e. F02.15=xxx xxxx1.
To set the terminals X1 and X5 to reverse logic, you only need to set the 0 th bit
corresponding to X1 and 4th bit corresponding to X5 to 1. That is, 02.15=xxx 1xxx1.
★ This function is for logic matching with other external devices.
Function Default
code setting
Filtering times of digital 0-100; 0: no filtering; n:
F02.17 2 ○
input terminal sampling once in n ms
Sampling
clock
1ms
Xi input
Note: Assume that

the number of anti-
Times of shaking filtering
Anti-interference Times of interference interference operations is “2”
less than anti-shaking greater than anti- (default).
processing filtering shaking filtering
Fig. 7-8 Schematic Diagram of Terminal Filter Sampling

Since the multi-function input terminal is triggered by level or pulse, digital filtering is
needed when the terminal status is read, in order to avoid interference.
★ The parameters of this code do not need to be adjusted under normal
circumstances. Where adjustment is required, pay attention to the relationship
between the filtering time and terminal action duration, to avoid the susceptibility
to interference due to insufficient filtering times or slow responses and command
losses arising from excessive filtering times.
145
Function Default
code setting
F02.18 X1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F02.19 X1 invalid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
Xi input
Delay
processing
Valid delay Invalid delay
Fig. 7-9 Schematic Diagram of Terminal Delay Sampling

In the event of changes in the status of the function terminal, a response will be made
with delay according to the function code settings. Currently only the terminals X1 to X4
support this function. Specifically, it is embodied in: This function will take effect when the
function terminal changes from the invalid to valid status and is maintained with the valid
delay, and not take effect when the function terminal changes from the valid to invalid
status and is maintained with the invalid delay.
★ If the function code is set to 0.000s, the corresponding delay will be invalid.

code name setting
Ones place: AI1
0: analog input
Options of 1: digital input (0 below 1V, 1 above
F02.31 analog input 3V, the same as last time under 1-3V) 0000D ○
function Tens place: AI2
0: analog input
1: digital input (the same as above)
The analog input terminals AI1 and AI2 of the A90 series inverter can be used as
146
digital input terminals. You only need to set the corresponding bit to 1. To use the AI2
terminal as a digital terminal, you only need to set F02.31=xx1x. The analog input and
digital logic conversion are as follows:
 When the input voltage of the terminal is less than 1V, its corresponding logic
status will be invalid;
 When the input voltage of the terminal is greater than 3V, its corresponding
logic status will be valid;
 When the input voltage of the terminal is within [1V, 3V], its corresponding
logic status will remain unchanged.
Logic
1
0
0
1V 3V Voltage
V
Fig. 7-10 Correspondence between Analog Input Terminal Voltage and Current Logic
Status
If it is used as an analog input terminal, the filter time and corresponding offset curve
can be set via F02.32 to F02.60. The terminals AI1 to AI4 can be set separately.
Function Default
code setting
Ones place: Options
of AI1 curve
0: curve 1
1: curve 2
Options of analog input
F02.32 2: curve 3 3210D ○
curve
3: curve 4
Tens place: AI2 curve
selection
0: curve 1
147
1: curve 2
2: curve 3
3: curve 4
F02.33 Minimum input of curve 1 0.00 - F02.35 V 0.10 ●
Minimum input setting of
F02.34 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
curve 1
F02.35 Maximum input of curve 1 F02.33 - 10.00 V 9.90 ●
Maximum input setting of
F02.36 –100.0 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
curve 1
F02.37 Minimum input of curve 2 -10.00 - F02.39 V 0.10 ●
F02.38 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
curve 2
F02.40 –100.0 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
curve 2
F02.41 Minimum input of curve 3 0.00V - F02.43 V 0.10 ●
F02.42 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
curve 3
Input of inflection point 1 of
F02.43 F02.41 - F02.45 V 2.50 ●
curve 3
Input setting of inflection
F02.44 –100.0 - +100.0 % 25.0 ●
point 1 of curve 3
F02.45 F02.43 - F02.47 V 7.50 ●
curve 3
F02.46 –100.0 - +100.0 % 75.0 ●
point 2 of curve 3
F02.48 –100.0 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
curve 3
F02.49 Minimum input of curve 4 -10.00 - F02.51 V 0.10 ●
F02.50 –100.0 - +100.0 % 0.0 ●
curve 4
F02.51 F02.49 - F02.53 V 2.50 ●
curve 4
F02.52 –100.0 - +100.0 % 25 ●
point 1 of curve 4
F02.53 F02.51 - F02.55 V 7.50 ●
curve 4
F02.54 –100.0 - +100.0 % 75 ●
point 2 of curve 4
F02.56 Maximum input setting of –100.0 - +100.0 % 100 ●
148
curve 4
F02.57 AI1 filtering time 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.10 ●
F02.58 AI2 filtering time 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.10 ●
F02.32 is used to select the corresponding offset curve for each analog input terminal.
In total, four groups of offset curves are available. Among them, the curves 1 and 2 indicate
two-point offsets, while the curves 3 and 4 indicate four-point offsets. After selecting an
offset curve, you can set the corresponding function code to meet the input requirements.
The filtering time can be adjusted according to the analog input and actual working
conditions. The actual effect will prevail.
Function Default
code setting
F02.61 AD sampling hysteresis 2 - 50 2 ○
This function code can be increased properly in the case of analog input hysteresis,
long input lines or excessive on-site interference resulting in significant input fluctuations.
In principle, this function code should be minimized.
7.4 Function Parameter Group of Output Terminal of F03 Group

The standard A90 series inverter is equipped with one multi-function digital output
terminal (Y1) and one relay output terminal (R1).
Function Default
code setting
F03.00 Options of Y1 output function see Table 7-6 1 ○
Function List of
F03.02 Options of R1 output function Multi-function Digital 7 ○
Output Terminals
Y1 and R1 are two multi-function digital output terminals. Their functions can be
defined separately by setting the function codes F03.00 to F03.02.
For example, if you define F02.00=1, the function of the R1 terminal is “inverter
fault”. When the inverter is in the fault status, the output of the function terminal R1 will be
valid; and when the inverter is in the normal status, the output of the function terminal R1
will be invalid. Specific options are described in Table 7-6.
149
Table 7-6 Function List of Multi-function Digital Output Terminals

The function is not used or the fault terminal is set to “0: no
0 No output
function” to avoid incorrect output.
The inverter is in the status of slave running, slave stop, jog
Inverter running
1 running or jog stop. The current output is valid in the
(RUN)
aforesaid statuses and invalid in other statuses.
When the |output frequency-set frequency| is less than or
equal to the frequency detection width (F15.20) in the
running status, the current output will be valid. When the
Up to output
2 inverter is not in the running status, or the |output
frequency (FAR)
frequency-set frequency| is beyond the frequency detection
width (F15.20), the current output will be invalid. See the
description of the function code F15.20.
When the |output frequency| is greater than the result of
output frequency detection FDT1 (F15.21) in the running
status, the current output will be valid. When the inverter is
not in the running status, or the |output frequency| is less
Output frequency
3 than or equal to the result of output frequency detection
detection FDT1
FDT1 (F15.21) minus FDT1 hysteresis (F15.22), the
current output will be invalid. In other statuses, the current
output will remain unchanged. See the description of the
function codes F15.21 and F15.22.
When the |output frequency| is greater than the result of
output frequency detection FDT2 (F15.23) in the running
status, the current output will be valid. When the inverter is
not in the running status, or the |output frequency| is less
Output frequency
4 than or equal to the result of output frequency detection
detection FDT2
FDT2 (F15.23) minus FDT2 hysteresis (F15.24), the
current output will be invalid. In other statuses, the current
output will remain unchanged. See the description of the
function codes F15.23 and F15.24.
When the running direction and acceleration/deceleration
of the inverter is in the status of reverse acceleration,
Reverse running
5 reverse deceleration or reverse constant speed, the current
(REV)
output will be valid. In other statuses, the current output
will be invalid.
When the inverter is in the status of JOG running or JOG
6 Jog running
stop, the current output will be valid.
150
In other statuses, the current output will be invalid.
The current output will be valid when the inverter is in the
Failure of frequency
7 fault status and invalid when the inverter is in other
converter
statuses.
When the inverter has been powered on and completely
Inverter ready to run initialized without any abnormality, the current output will
8
(READY) be valid. When the inverter is not suitable for running, the
current output will be invalid.
When the inverter is in the JOG or slave running status, the
output frequency (F18.00) is greater than or equal to the
Reach the upper upper frequency limit (F00.17||F00.18), and the set
9
frequency limit frequency (F18.01) is greater than or equal to the upper
frequency limit (F00.17||F00.18), the current output will be
valid. Otherwise, the current output will be invalid.
When the inverter is in the JOG or slave running status, the
output frequency (F18.00) is less than or equal to the lower
Reach the lower frequency limit (F00.19), and the set frequency (F18.01) is
10
frequency limit less than or equal to the lower frequency limit (F00.19), the
current output will be valid. Otherwise, the current output
will be invalid.
When the output current (F18.06) is greater than or equal to
the current limit (F07.12), the current output will be valid;
Reach the current when the output current (F18.06) is less than or equal to the
11
limit current limit (F07.12), the current output will be invalid;
and when the output current is an intermediate value, the
current output will remain unchanged.
When the output voltage (F18.07) is greater than or equal
to the voltage of overvoltage stall control (F07.07), the
current output will be valid; when the output voltage
Reach the voltage of
12 (F18.07) is less than or equal to the voltage of overvoltage
overvoltage stall
stall control (F07.07) minus 10V, the current output will be
invalid; and when the output voltage is an intermediate
value, the current output will remain unchanged.
When the simple PLC is in the mode of stop after a single
operation (F18.15=0), it will be stopped after one operation
Complete simple and the current output will be valid; when the simple PLC
13
PLC cycle is in the mode of stop after a limited number of operations
(F18.15=1), it will be stopped after the operations set by
F08.16, and the current output will be valid; otherwise (e.g.
151
further running, simple PLC status resetting), the current
output will be invalid.
When the input pulse count value (F18.34) is greater than
Reach the set count or equal to the set count value (F16.03), the current output
14
value will be valid; otherwise, the output will be invalid. See the
description of function codes F16.03 to F16.04.
When the input pulse count value (F18.34) is greater than
Reach the specified or equal to the specified count value (F16.04), the current
15
count value output will be valid; otherwise, the output will be invalid.
See the description of function codes F16.03 to F16.04.
When the input pulse conversion length (F18.34) is greater
than or equal to the set length (F16.01), the current output
16 Reach the length
will be valid; otherwise, the output will be invalid. See the
When the current motor current is greater than or equal to
Motor overload
17 the motor pre-alarm coefficient (F07.02), the current output
pre-alarm
will be valid; otherwise, the current output will be invalid.
When the inverter temperature is greater than or equal to
the hot spot (-10°C), the pre-alarm output will be valid; and
Inverter overheat
18 when the inverter temperature is less than the hot spot
pre-alarm
minus 15°C, the pre-alarm output will be invalid (5°C
hysteresis).
If the PID feedback (F18.17) is greater than or equal to the
Reach the upper
upper limit (F09.16) of PID output during operation, the
19 limit of PID
current output will be valid; otherwise, the output will be
feedback
invalid.
If the PID feedback (F18.17) is less than or equal to the
Reach the lower
lower limit (F09.17) of PID output during operation, the
20 limit of PID
current output will be valid; otherwise, the output will be
feedback
invalid.
Analog level When the selected analog channel input is greater than or
21
detection ADT1 equal to the result of analog level detection (F15.26/28), the
corresponding output will be valid; when the selected
analog channel input is less than or equal to the result of
Analog level analog level detection (F15.26/28) minus hysteresis
22
detection ADT2 (F15.27/29), the corresponding output will be invalid; and
in other statuses, the current output will remain unchanged.
See the description of the function codes F15.25 to F15.29.
23 Reserved
152
When the DC bus voltage (F18.08) is less than or equal to
the voltage of undervoltage stall control (F07.08), the
current output will be valid; when the DC bus voltage
24 Undervoltage status (F18.08) is greater than or equal to the voltage of power
failure end judgment (F07.10), and the holding time is
greater than or equal to the determined delay time of power
failure end, the current output will be invalid.
If the current motor temperature (F18.38) is greater than or
equal to the motor overheat pre-alarm threshold (F07.05),
Motor overheat
25 the current output will be valid; otherwise, the output will
pre-alarm
be invalid. See the description of the function codes F07.03
to F07.05.
When it reaches the regular running time, the current output
26 Up to the set time will be valid; otherwise, the output will be invalid. See the
When the inverter is in the JOG or slave running status and
Running at zero the output frequency (F18.00) is less than or equal to the
27
speed zero servo start frequency (F04.29), the current output will
be valid; otherwise, the current output will be invalid.
28-37 Reserved
38 Off-load The inverter is in the off-load status.
39-46 Reserved
When this function is selected for the output terminal, the
output of Y1, Y2, R1, R2 and Y3 will be controlled by the
47 PLC output corresponding bit of F03.31. If the corresponding bit is 1,
the output will be valid; and if the corresponding bit is 0,
the output will be invalid.
This is dedicated to water supply applications. When the
59 Sleep indicator water pump meeting the sleep conditions is in the sleep
status, the output of this function will be valid.
FDT1 lower limit This is similar to #3/4 function. The difference is that the
69 output will be valid when the frequency is lower than the
(pulse)
“setting-hysteresis” and automatically turn invalid after
FDT2 lower limit some time. If the single pulse output is set, the time will be
70 set by F03.17 to F03.20; and if the level output is enabled,
(pulse)
the time is 0.1 s by default.
FDT1 lower limit
71 (pulse, invalid in This function is the same as #69/70 function, except for no
JOG) output in the JOG status.
72 FDT2 lower limit
153
(pulse, invalid in
JOG)
The two multi-function output ports are of open collector output type, with COM as
the common output port. If the selected function is disabled, the electronic switch will be
OFF, and the multi-function output ports will be in the invalid status. If the selected
function is enabled, the electronic switch will be ON, and the multi-function output ports
will be in the valid status. The open collector can be powered on internally, as shown in Fig.
7-11(a); or by an external power supply, as shown in Fig. 7-11(b). If an external power
supply is used, the voltage should be 12-30V.
+24V 24V +24V 24V

A90 A90
PLC PLC
+5V Y1.Y2 +5V Y1.Y2

Relay Relay
+
DC -
COM COM
a) Internal power supply b) External power supply

Fig. 7-11 Power Supply of Multi-function Terminal
The relay output is from the internal relay of the
inverter. The relay has one set of normally open EA
contacts and one set of normally closed contacts. EB
Relay E
When the selected function is disabled, the EB-EC is coil
EC
normally closed and EA-EC is normally open. When
the selected function is enabled, the internal relay coil
will be powered on, the EB-EC will be disconnected,
and the EA-EC will be engaged. See Fig. 7-12.
Fig. 7-12 Relay Contacts

code name setting
Options of D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
F03.05 output signal * * * * * R1 * Y1 **0*0 ○
type 0: level
154
1: single pulse
Function i
output Valid Invalid
Level
Single pulse
Pulse output
width
Fig. 7-13 Schematic Diagram of Level and Single Pulse Output of Digital Output Terminal
The digital output terminal Y1 and relay output terminal R1 have two output types:
level and single pulse, as shown in Fig. 7-13. For the level output, the output status of the
function terminal is consistent with the function status; and for the single pulse output, the
active level of a certain pulse width will not be outputted until the function is enabled.
This function code is subject to bit operation. For specific settings, refer to the
Function Default
code setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
* * * * * R1 * Y1
0: positive logic is valid in the
Positive/negative
F03.06 logic of digital 00000 ○
state
output
state
155
Pre-output Valid Invalid
Positive Active
logic output Inactive level
level
Negative Inactive
logic output level Active level
Fig. 7-14 Schematic Diagram of Positive and Negative Logic Output of Digital Output
Terminal
The multi-function digital output terminal has two output logics according to the
design:
0: Positive logic. When the function is enabled, the multi-function output terminal will
output the active level; otherwise, the multi-function output terminal will output the
inactive level.
1: Negative logic. When the function is enabled, the multi-function output terminal
will output the inactive level; otherwise, the multi-function output terminal will output the
active level.
★ This function is for logic matching with other external devices.
Active level: Y1, low level by default; R1, high level by default.
Function Default
code setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Output status
F03.08 * * * REV FDT2 FDT1 FAR RUN 00000 ○
control in jogging
0: valid in jogging
1: invalid in jogging
It is usually not necessary for DO to output certain statuses during jog running. The
corresponding output can be shielded by setting the corresponding bit of this function code
to 1. If F03.08=xxx1x is set and the FAR output is valid, the actually selected output
156
terminal will not output the active level.
Function Default
code setting
F03.09 Y1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.10 Y1 invalid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.13 R1 valid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F03.14 R1 invalid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
Function i
Level
Valid
Invalid
delay
delay
Single pulse
Pulse output width
Fig. 7-15 Schematic Diagram of Level and Single Pulse Output of Digital Output Terminal
When the status of the selected function changes, the corresponding output terminal
will make a response with delay based on the function code settings. At present, the
terminals Y1 and R1 support this function. Details under default conditions: When the
function changes from the invalid to valid status and is maintained with the valid delay, the
corresponding output terminal will output the active level. When the function changes from
the valid to invalid status and is maintained with the invalid delay, the corresponding output
terminal will output the inactive level.
★ If the function code is set to 0.000s, the delay will be invalid.

F03.17 Single pulse time of 0.001 - 30.000 s 0.250 ●
157
Y1 output
F03.19 0.001 - 30.000 s 0.250 ●
R1 output
When one function output terminal is in the single pulse output mode (see F03.05 for
details), the pulse width of the active level can be controlled by setting the single pulse
output time, in order to meet different process or control requirements. Details are given in
Fig. 7 and Fig. 7.
Function Default
code setting
F03.21 Options of analog
see Table 7-7 Function 0 ○
output M1
List of Multi-function
F03.22 Options of analog
Analog Output Terminal 2 ○
output M2
M1 and M2 are two multi-function analog output terminals. Their functions can be
defined separately by setting the values of the function codes F03.21 to F03.22.
For example, if F03.21=0 is defined, the function of the M1 terminal is to output the
“operating frequency (absolute value)”. The current |operating frequency| is reflected by the
output voltage. If the operating frequency increases from 0.00Hz to 50.00Hz (assuming
F00.16=50.00), the voltage of the M1 output port will increase from 0.00V to 10.00V under
the default conditions, showing the same change trend. Specific options are described in
Table 7-7.
Table 7-7 Function List of Multi-function Analog Output Terminal
Operating frequency 0.00Hz to Fmax, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
0
(absolute value) 100.0%
Set frequency 0.00Hz to Fmax, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
1
Output torque 0.0% to 200.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
2
Set torque (absolute 0.0% to 200.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
3
value) 100.0%
4 Output current 0.0A to 2*Ie, corresponding to the output 0.0% to 100.0%
5 Output voltage 0.0V to 1.5*Ue, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
158
100.0%
0V to about 2.63*Ue, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
100.0%
(That is, for the 220V driver, 579V corresponds to the
6 Bus voltage output 100.0%; and for the 380V driver, 1000V
corresponds to the output 100.0%. Drivers at different
voltage levels have the same output voltage at their rated
voltages.)
0.00kW to 2*Pe, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
7 Output power
100.0%
8 AI1 Output the actual input voltage, instead of the offset
result.
9 AI2 0.0% to 100.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
100.0%
13 Reserved
14 Count value 0 to F16.03, corresponding to the output F16.10 to F16.11
15 Length value 0 to F16.01, corresponding to the output F16.10 to F16.11
PID output -100.0% to 100.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
16
percentage 100.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
18 PID feedback
100.0%
-100.0% to 100.0%, corresponding to the output 0.0% to
19 PID setting
100.0%
Output frequency
21
(actual value)
Set frequency (actual
22
value)
Output current
23
(actual value)
Output torque
24
(actual value)
Set torque (actual
25
value)
Estimated feedback
26 frequency (actual
value)
Synchronization
27 frequency (actual
value)
159
Acceleration and
29 deceleration output
frequency
★ Fmax, maximum frequency (F00.16)
Ie, rated current of the inverter (F12.21)
Ue, rated voltage of the inverter (F12.20)
Pe, rated power of the inverter (F12.19)
The output physical quantity of the analog output terminal can be switched between
the voltage signal (0.00V to 10.00V) and current signal (0.00mA to 20.00mA) via the DIP
switch. For the voltage signal output, the value from 0.0% to 100.0% corresponds to the
output 0.00V to 10.00V. For the current signal output, the value from 0.0% to 100.0%
corresponds to the output 0.00mA to 20.00mA. For details, please see “0 Wiring of analog
output terminals”.

code name setting
F03.27 M1 output bias -100.0 - 100.0 % 0.0 ●
F03.28 M1 output gain -10.00 - 10.00 1.00 ●
F03.29 M2 output bias -100.0 - 100.0 % 0.0 ●
F03.30 M2 output gain -10.00 - 10.00 1.00 ●
The above function codes are usually used to correct the zero drift of analog output
and the deviation of output amplitude. They can also be used to customize the required AO
output curve to meet the requirements of different instruments or others. If the offset is
represented by “b”, the gain by “k”, actual output by “Y” and standard output by “X”, the
actual output is: Y=kX+b.
1. In order to meet the needs of different instruments or external devices, the
full-scale voltage of M1 and M2 is actually 10.9V and the full-scale current is
actually 22mA.
2. M1 and M2 are set to 0.00-10.00V by default.
3. Where there are high precision requirements for the analog output during operation,
test the no-load outputs of the terminals M1 and M2 with a multimeter first.
Function Default
code setting
Control logic D7 D6 D5 D4 D3
F03.31 options of PLC D2 D1 D0 00000 ●
output terminal * * * * *
160
R1 * Y1
0: no output
1: output
When the output functions of Y1 and R1 are set to “47: PLC output”, the output result
will be controlled by the corresponding bit of F03.31. 0 indicates no output and 1 indicates
that there is output.
7.5 Start/Stop Control Parameter Group of F04 Group

code name setting
0: direct start
F04.00=0: direct start
The inverter will be started at the starting frequency, following DC braking (no DC
braking in the case of F04.04=0) and pre-excitation (no pre-excitation if F04.07 is set to 0).
After the starting frequency duration expires, the inverter will run at the set frequency.
F04.00=1: start with speed tracking
The inverter is smoothly started from the current rotation frequency of the motor,
following the speed tracking (size and direction).
Function Default
code setting
F04.01 Start frequency 0.00 - 10.00 Hz 0.00 ○
Start frequency hold
F04.02 0.00-60.00, 0.00 is invalid s 0.00 ○
time
In order to ensure the motor torque during the start, please set the appropriate starting
frequency. To fully establish the magnetic flux during the motor start, the starting frequency
should be maintained for some time. The starting frequency F04.01 is not limited by the
lower frequency limit.
Function Default
code setting
Starting current of DC 0.0~100.0 (100.0 = Rated
F04.03 % 100.0 ○
braking current of motor)
Starting time of DC
F04.04 0.00 - 30.00 s 0.00 ○
braking
Before the inverter is started, the motor may be in the status of low-speed running or
161
reverse rotation. If the inverter is started immediately, it may have an overcurrent fault. In
order to avoid such faults, it is necessary to perform DC braking to stop the motor and then
make the motor run in the set direction to the set frequency before the inverter is started.
When F04.03 is set to different values, DC braking torques can be enabled.
F04.04 is used to set the time to enable DC braking. The inverter will start running
once the set time is up. If F04.04=0.00, DC braking is invalid during start.
★ DC braking is started as shown in Fig. 7.
When multiple motors are driven by a single inverter, this function can be applied.

code name setting
Pre-excitation 50.0-500.0 (100.0 =
F04.06 % 100.0 ○
current no-load current)
F04.07 Pre-excitation time 0.00 - 10.00 s 0.10 ○
The inverter will start running after the magnetic field is established according to the
set pre-excitation current F04.06 and the set pre-excitation time F04.07 is up. If the
pre-excitation time is set to 0, the inverter will be started directly without pre-excitation.
The pre-excitation current F04.06 is the percentage relative to the rated no-load current
of the motor.

Ones place: Tracking start
frequency
1: stop frequency
2: power frequency
Speed
Tens place: Selection of search
F04.08 tracking 0 ○
direction
mode
0: search only in command
direction
1: Search in the opposite direction
if the speed cannot be found in the
command direction
When the speed tracking start mode (F04.00=1) is selected, the inverter will be subject
to speed tracking according to the setting of F04.08 during the start. For quicker tracking to
162
the current operating frequency of the motor, please select the appropriate mode based on
the working conditions.
If the units place of F04.08 is 0, tracking will be performed from the maximum
frequency. This can be applied when the operating conditions of the motor are completely
uncertain (for example, the motor is already rotating when the inverter is powered on).
If the units place of F04.08 is 1, tracking will be performed from the stop frequency.
This mode is usually applied.
If the units place of F04.08 is 2, tracking will be performed from the power frequency.
This mode can be applied during switching from the power frequency.
If the tens place of F04.08 is 0, search will be performed only in the command
direction after speed tracking is enabled. In case that the corresponding speed is not found,
the inverter will start running from the zero speed.
If the tens place of F04.08 is 1, search will be performed first in the command
direction after speed tracking is enabled and then in the opposite direction if no speed is
found.

Deceleration time of
F04.10 0.1 - 20.0 s 2.0 ○
speed tracking
30.0-150.0 (100.0 =
F04.11 Speed tracking current rated current of % 50.0 ○
inverter)
Speed tracking
F04.12 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 ○
compensation gain
F04.10: scanning speed for speed tracking from the predetermined frequency. The
duration is the time for the rated frequency to decrease to 0.00Hz.
F04.11: current tracking, ratio to the rated current of the inverter. The lower the current,
the less the impact on the motor is, and the higher the tracking accuracy is. If the set value
is too small, the tracking result may be inaccurate, causing failure in start. The higher the
current, the less the motor speed drops. This value should be increased during heavy-load
tracking.
163
F04.12: tracking intensity, usually taking the default value. When the tracking speed is
high and an overvoltage fault occurs, you can try to increase this value.

0: linear acceleration and
Acceleration deceleration
and 1: acceleration and deceleration of
F04.14 0 ○
deceleration continuous S curve
mode 2: acceleration and deceleration of
intermittent S curve
(F15.13=0)
Starting time
F04.15 of S curve in s 1.00 ●
(F15.13=1)
acceleration
(F15.13=2)
(F15.13=0)
Ending time
(F15.13=1)
acceleration
(F15.13=2)
0.00 to system deceleration time/2
(F15.13=0)
Starting time
(F15.13=1)
deceleration
0 to system deceleration time/2
(F15.13=2)
(F15.13=0)
Ending time
(F15.13=1)
deceleration
0 to system deceleration time/2
(F15.13=2)
F04.14=0: linear acceleration and deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases linearly. The acceleration and
deceleration time is set by the function codes F00.14 and F00.15 by default.
F04.14=1: continuous S-curve acceleration and deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases according to the curve. The S curve is
usually where there are relatively low requirements for start and stop, such as elevators and
164
conveyor belts. In the acceleration process shown in Fig. 7-15, t1 is the set value of F04.15,
and t2 is the set value of F04.16. In the deceleration process, t3 is the set value of F04.17,
and t4 is the set value of F04.18. The slope of the output frequency remains unchanged
between t1 and t2 as well as between t3 and t4.
F04.14=2: intermittent S-curve acceleration and deceleration
Compared with the continuous S-curve, the intermittent S-curve will not be over-tuned.
The current S-curve trend will be stopped immediately according to changes in the settings
and acceleration/deceleration time, and the new planned S-curve trend will be applied.
Output
frequency
Linear
acceleration
and
deceleration
S-curve
acceleration
and
deceleration
t1 t2 t3 t4
Acceleration time Deceleration time
Fig. 7-16 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Control Diagram
Function Default
code setting
1: Free stop
F04.19=0: deceleration to stop
The motor decelerates to stop according to the set deceleration time [default setting:
based on F00.15 (deceleration time 1)].
F04.19=1: free stop
When the stop command is valid, the inverter will stop output immediately, and the
motor will freely coast to stop. The stop time depends on the inertia of the motor and load.
165
If the free stop terminal has been set and enabled, the inverter will be immediately in
the free stop status. Even if this terminal is disabled, the inverter will not restart running.
Instead, the running command must be entered again to start the inverter.
Function Default
code setting
Starting frequency of DC 0.00 to maximum
F04.20 Hz 0.00 ○
braking in stop frequency F00.16
DC braking current in 0.0 to 150.0 (100.0 =
F04.21 % 100.0 ○
stop rated current of motor)
0.00~30.00 0.00:
F04.22 DC braking time in stop s 0.00 ○
invalid
Demagnetization time for
F04.23 0.00 - 30.00 s 0.50 ○
DC braking in stop
F04.20: Set the starting frequency of DC braking in deceleration to stop. Once the
output frequency is less than the set frequency during deceleration stop, and the time of DC
braking for stop is not 0, DC braking for stop will be enabled.
F04.21: Set different values to apply the torques of DC braking for stop.
F04.22: Set the duration of DC braking for stop. If F04.22=0.00, DC braking for stop
will be invalid. When an external terminal sends a signal of DC braking for stop, the
duration of DC braking for stop will be larger of the valid time of the signal of DC braking
for stop from the external terminal and the set time of F04.22.
F04.23: When the output frequency reaches the set value of F04.20 during
deceleration to stop, and the set time of F04.23 is up, DC braking will be enabled.
The process of DC braking for stop is shown in Fig. 7-18.
Output Output
frequency frequency
Time Time
0 0
Motor
Motor speed
speed
Time Time
0 0
Braking
current Braking current
Degaussing time
Time Time
0 0
Brake time Degaussing time Brake time
166
Fig. 7-17 DC Braking Process for Start Fig. 7-18 DC Braking Process for Stop
In the presence of heavy loads, the motor cannot be stopped completely through
normal deceleration due to inertia. You can extend the duration of DC braking for
stop or increase the current of DC braking for stop to stop the motor from rotating.

code name setting
F04.24 Flux braking gain 100-150 (100: no flux braking) 100 ○
When the magnetic flux braking is valid (F04.24>100), the motor can be quickly
slowed down by increasing its magnetic flux, and the electric energy can be converted into
thermal energy during motor braking.
Flux braking may lead to quick deceleration, but the output current may be high. The
flux braking intensity (F04.24) can be set restriction and protection to avoid damage to the
motor. If flux braking is not applied, the deceleration time will be extended but the output
current will be low.

code name setting
0: start according to F04.00
Start mode after
F04.26 setting mode 0 ○
failure/free stop
The start after the fault or free stop may be set by default according to the F04.00
setting (F04.26=0), or set to the speed tracking start (F04.26=1). For the stop mode, see the
Function Default
code setting
0: Not required for
Second confirmation of
F04.27 confirmation 0 ○
terminal start command
1: to be confirmed
F04.27=0: not confirmed
The running terminal (RUN or F/R) is closed, F00.03 is set to 0 or 1, and the terminal
is powered on during start/stop or directly run once enabled by switching the start/stop
mode.
F04.27=1: confirmed
The running terminal is closed, F00.03 is set to 0 or 1, and the terminal is powered on
167
during start/stop or cannot directly run once enabled by switching the start/stop mode. It is
necessary to first disconnect the running terminal and then close it to start running.
Function Default
code setting
Zero speed check
F04.29 0.00 - 5.00 Hz 0.25 ●
frequency
When the output frequency is lower than the zero speed judgment frequency, the
terminal “zero-speed running” will be valid.
Function Default
code setting
Initial position search 0: Invalid
F04.30 1 ●
after power-on or fault 1: valid
When the synchronous motor is used (e.g. F01.00=2) and subjected to VF control, the
initial angle is essential for the control performance. In particular, reversing may occur at
the moment of start. Thus, the initial position is searched by default after power-on or
failure, in order to achieve a better control performance.
7.6 VF Control Parameter Group of F05 Group

The function codes in this group are valid for V/F control and invalid for vector
control.
V/F control is suitable for general-purpose loads such as fans and pumps, or when
multiple motors are driven by one inverter or the power of the inverter is quite different
from that of the motor.
code name setting
0: straight line V/F
1: multi-point broken line V/F
2: 1.3-power V/F
3: 1.7-power V/F
4: square V/F
V/F curve
F05.00 5: VF complete separation mode (Ud 0 ○
setting
= 0, Uq = K * t = voltage of
6: VF semi-separation mode (Ud = 0,
Uq = K * t = F/Fe * 2 * voltage of
168
F05.00=0: linear V/F

It is suitable for ordinary constant-torque loads.
F05.00=1: multi-point V/F
It is suitable for special loads such as dehydrators, centrifuges and cranes. Any V/F
relationship curve can be obtained by setting the parameters F05.01 to F05.06.
F05.00=2/3: 1.3th power/1.7th power of V/F
It is a VF curve between the linear VF and square VF.
F05.00=4: square V/F
It is suitable for centrifugal loads such as fans and pumps.
F05.00=5: VF complete separation mode
In this case, the output frequency and output voltage of the inverter are independent of
each other. The output frequency depends on the frequency source, and the output voltage
is determined by F05.07 (VF separation voltage source).
The VF complete separation mode is usually applied in induction heating, inverter
power supply, torque motor control, etc.
F05.00=6: VF semi-separation mode
In this case, V and F are proportional, but their proportional relationship can be set by
the voltage source F05.07. In addition, the relationship between V and F is also related to
the rated voltage and rated frequency of the motor in the F1 group.
Assuming that the voltage source input is X (X is 0 to 100%), the relationship between
the output voltage V and frequency F of the inverter is:
V/F=2*X* (rated voltage of the motor)/(rated frequency of the motor)

code name setting
Frequency point F1
F05.01 0.00 - F05.03 Hz 0.50 ●
of multi-point VF
Voltage point V1 of 0.0~100.0 (100.0 = Rated
F05.02 % 1.0 ●
multi-point VF voltage)
Frequency point F2
F05.03 F05.01~F05.05 Hz 2.00 ●
of multi-point VF
Voltage point V2 of
F05.04 0.0-100.0 % 4.0 ●
multi-point VF
Frequency point F3 F05.03 to rated frequency of
F05.05 Hz 5.00 ●
of multi-point VF motor (reference frequency)
Voltage point V3 of
F05.06 0.0-100.0 % 10.0 ●
multi-point VF
169
The code parameters F05.01 to F05.06 are valid when the multi-point polyline VF is
selected (F05.00=1).
All V/F curves are dependent on the curve set by the percentage of input frequency
and the percentage of output voltage, linearized in sections within different input ranges.
The rated frequency of the motor is the final frequency of the V/F curve, and also the
frequency corresponding to the highest output voltage. Percentage of the input frequency:
rated frequency of the motor = 100.0%; percentage of the output voltage: rated voltage U e
of the motor = 100.0%.
The relationships of the three voltage points and frequency points must meet the
following requirements: V1＜V2＜V3, F1＜F2＜F3;
If the slope of the V/F curve is too large, an “overcurrent” fault may occur. Particularly, if
the low-frequency voltage is too high, the motor may be overheated and even burnt, and
the inverter may be subject to overcurrent stall or overcurrent protection.
Output voltage (%)
Rated voltage of
motor
V3
V2
V1
Output frequency
(%)
F1 F2 F3 Rated frequency of motor
Fig. 7-19 Schematic Diagram of Multi-point Polyline V/F Curve

Function code Unit Attribute
code name description setting
0: digital setting
Voltage of VF separation
source of VF voltage
F05.07 0 ○
separation 1: AI1
mode 2: AI2
3-4: retention
170
5: PID
6:
Communication
setting
7: VP
Note: 100% is the
rated voltage of
the motor.
Digital
0.0 to 100.0
setting of VF
F05.08 (100.0=Rated % 0.0 ●
separation
voltage of motor)
voltage
VF separation is usually applied in induction heating, inverter power supply, torque
motor control, etc.
When VF separation control is selected, the output voltage can be set by the function
code F05.08 or according to the analog, high-speed pulse, PID or communication settings.
For non-digital settings, 100% of each setting corresponds to the rated voltage of the motor.
When the percentage set by the analog output is negative, the set absolute value will be
taken as the valid set value.
F05.07=0: digital setting of VF separation voltage (F05.08)
The VF separation output voltage depends on the digital setting of VF separation
voltage (F05.08).
F05.07=1:AI1
F05.07=2:AI2
F05.07=5: process PID
The VF separation output voltage depends on the process PID function output, as
described in 7.10.
F05.07=6: communication setting
The VF separation output voltage depends on the communication.
as the slave (F10.06=0), the VF separation output voltage is “700FH
(master-slave communication setting) * F01.02 or others (rated voltage of the
motor) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional coefficient)”. The 700FH data
range is 0.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 0-2.
 For general communication (F10.05=0), the VF separation output voltage is
“7006H (voltage setting of the VF separation mode) * F05.08 (digital setting of
171
the VF separation voltage)”, and the 7006H data range is 0.00% to 100.00%, as
detailed in Table 0-2.
Function Default
code setting
Rise time of VF
F05.09 0.00 - 60.00 s 2.00 ●
separation voltage
The rise time of VF separation voltage refers to the time for the output voltage to
increase from 0 to the rated voltage of the motor.
Output voltage
Rated voltage
of motor
VF separation
voltage
Actual rise time
0 Time t
Set rise time
Fig. 7-20 Rise Time Description of VF Separation Voltage
Function Default Attrib

Function code name Parameter description Unit
code setting ute
Compensation gain of
F05.10 0.00 - 200.00 % 100.00 ●
V/F stator voltage drop
It is used to compensate for the voltage drop caused by the stator resistor and wire, and
improve the low-frequency load capacity.
Function Default
code setting
V/F slip compensation
F05.11 0.00 - 200.00 % 100.00 ●
gain
F05.12 V/F slip filtering time 0.00 - 10.00 s 1.00 ●
As the load increases, the rotor speed of the motor will decrease. To make the rotor
speed of the motor close to the synchronous speed under rated load, slip compensation can
be enabled. When the motor speed is less than the target value, the set value of F05.11 can
be increased.
★: In the case of F05.11=0, slip compensation is invalid. This parameter is valid only for
the asynchronous motor.
172
The slip is 100% during the quick start with large inertia and 0 when the frequency
reaches the set value. Quick increase or decrease of the output frequency will cause
overvoltage or overcurrent. F05.12 filtering can slow down the rise of voltage and current.

F05.13 Oscillation suppression gain 0 - 20000 100 ●
Oscillation suppression cutoff
F05.14 0.00-600.00 Hz 55.00 ●
frequency
This parameter can be adjusted to suppress motor oscillations during the open loop
control (VVF). When the motor does not oscillate, this parameter should not be adjusted as
little as possible or properly reduced. If the motor oscillates obviously, this parameter can
be increased properly.

code name setting
Droop control
F05.15 0.00 - 10.00 Hz 0.00 ●
frequency
This function is usually applied for load distribution when one load is driven by
multiple motors.
Droop control is to reduce the output frequency of the inverter with the load increasing,
so that the output frequency of the motor drops more in the load driven by multiple motors,
thus reducing the load on this motor and leading to evener distribution of the load on
multiple motors.
This parameter refers to the output frequency drop of the inverter under the rated load.
Default
Function code Function code name Parameter description Unit Attribute
setting
F05.16 Energy saving rate 0.00 - 50.00 % 0.00 ●
F05.17 Energy saving action time 1.00 - 60.00 s 5.00 ●
The energy saving rate (F05.16) reflects the energy saving capacity. The larger the set
value, the more energy will be saved. If the set value is 0.00, energy saving will be invalid.
When energy-saving operation is valid, energy saving control will be enabled once the
energy saving conditions are met and have been maintained for the energy saving time
(F05.17).
The default settings of the VF control optimization parameters of the synchronous
173
motor are used under normal circumstances.
On the basis of the VF separation voltage source setting, the set value of F05.20
changes at intervals of one minute in the power supply setting.
7.7 Vector Control Parameter Group of F06 Group

Function Default
code setting
Speed proportional
F06.00 0.00-100.00 12.00 ●
gain ASR_P1
Speed integral time
F06.01 0.000 - 30.000, 0.000: no integral s 0.200 ●
constant ASR_T1
Speed proportional
F06.02 0.00-100.00 8.00 ●
gain ASR_P2
Speed integral time
F06.03 0.000 - 30.000, 0.000: no integral s 0.300 ●
constant ASR_T2
F06.04 Switching frequency 1 0.00 to switching frequency 2 Hz 5.00 ●
Switching frequency 1 to
F06.05 Switching frequency 2 Hz 10.00 ●
maximum frequency F00.16
In the vector control mode, the dynamic speed response of the inverter is adjusted by
changing the speed proportional gain (ASR_P) and speed integral time (ASR_T) of the
speed PI regulator. The increase in ASR_P or decrease in ASR_T may accelerate the
dynamic response of the speed loop. If ASR_P is too large or ASR_T is too small, however,
the system may be over-tuned to cause oscillation.
Users should adjust the above speed PI parameters according to the actual load
characteristics. Generally, as long as the system does not oscillate, ASR_P should be
increased as much as possible, and then ASR_T should be adjusted, so that the system
makes response fast, without excessive over-tuning.
To enable fast dynamic responses of the system at low and high speeds, PI regulation
should be performed separately at low and high speeds. During the actual operation, the
speed regulator will automatically calculate the current PI parameters based on the current
frequency. The speed PI parameters are P1 and T1 at the switching frequency 1, and P2 and
T2 at the switching frequency 2. If the frequency is greater than the F06.04 switching
frequency 1 and less than F06.05 switching frequency 2, the switching frequency 1 and
switching frequency 2 will be subject to linear transition. See Fig. 7-21.
174
PID parameters
P1,Ti1
P2,Ti2
Switching Switching Feedback

frequency 1 frequency 2 frequency
Fig. 7-21 Schematic Diagram of PI Parameters
1. The parameters F06.00 to F06.05 need to be adjusted carefully. They should

not be adjusted under normal circumstances.
2. While setting the switching frequency, note that the F06.04 switching
frequency 1 must be less than or equal to the F06.05 switching frequency 2.
Function Default
code setting
Filtering time constant of
F06.07 0.000 - 0.100 s 0.001 ●
speed loop output
Speed loop output filtering can reduce the impact on the current loop, but the value of
F06.07 should not be too large. Otherwise, slow responses may be caused. Use the default
settings under normal circumstances.
Function Default
code setting
Vector control slip
F06.08 50.00-200.00 % 100.00 ●
gain
As the load increases, the rotor speed of the motor will increase. To make the rotor
speed close to the synchronous speed under the rated load, slip compensation can be
enabled. When the motor speed is less than the target value, the set value of F06.08 can be
175
increased.
For the speed sensorless vector control, this parameter can be used to adjust the speed
accuracy of the motor. Increase this parameter if the motor speed is low under load, and
vice versa.
Function Default
code setting
0: set by F06.10 and
F06.11
Upper limit source
1: AI1
F06.09 selection of speed control 0 ○
2: AI2
torque
5: Communication
setting (percentage)
F06.10 0.0 - 250.0 % 165.0 ●
F06.11 0.0 - 250.0 % 165.0 ●
Vector control is used to set the operating conditions of the torque limit. If the output
torque of the inverter is greater than the set upper limit, the torque limit function will be
enabled, thus controlling the output torque not to exceed the upper limit of speed control
torque.
F06.09=0: depending on F06.10 and F06.11
The upper limit of electric torque is F06.10, and that of braking torque is F06.11.
F06.09=1:AI1
F06.09=2:AI2
The upper torque limit is dependent on AI (percentage) * F06.10/F06.11.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F06.10/F06.11.
The upper torque limit depends on the communication.
as the slave (F10.06=0), the upper torque limit is “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * 250.0% * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional
coefficient)”, and the 700FH data range is 0.00% to 100.00%.
176
 For the general communication (F10.05=0), the upper torque limit is “7019H
(communication setting of the upper torque limit for speed control) *
F06.10/F06.11”, and the 7019H data range is 0.0 to 250.0%.
1. This code parameter represents the ratio of the output torque in the torque limit
action to the rated output torque of the inverter.
2. The user can set the upper torque limit according to the actual needs, to protect
the motor or meet the working conditions.
3. The electric mode and braking mode are set separately.
Function Default
code setting
Excitation current proportional
F06.12 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
gain ACR-P1
Excitation current integral time 0.0.00 - 600.00
F06.13 ms 10.00 ●
constant ACR-T1 0.00: no integral
Torque current proportional
F06.14 0.00-100.00 0.50 ●
gain ACR-P2
Torque current integral time 0.0.00 - 600.00
F06.15 ms 10.00 ●
constant ACR-T2 0.00: no integral
The parameters of the current loop PID regulator directly affect the performance and
stability of the system. The user does not need to change the default settings under normal
circumstances.

code name setting
F06.16 Position loop gain 0.000 - 40.000 1.000 ●
The simple servo function is valid only for synchronous motor control. Gain
adjustment will enhance the system rigidity.
Function Default
code setting
SVC 0: braking
F06.17 zero-frequency 1: not processed 2 ○
processing 2: seal the tube
SVC
50.0-400.0 (100.0 is the
F06.18 zero-frequency % 100.0 ○
no-load current of the motor)
braking current
In the case of SVC control (e.g. F00.01=1) and zero-frequency operation, the inverter
will work according to the F06.17 setting.
177
F06.17=0: braking by the set current of F06.18 for zero servo operation;
F06.17=1: no processing;
F06.17=2: the inverter freely stop running with its output blocked.
Function Default
code setting
Voltage feedforward
F06.20 0 - 100 % 0 ●
gain
In the vector control mode, voltage feedforward adjustment is added to automatically
increase the torque, i.e. the compensation for stator voltage drop.
Function Default
code setting
0: Invalid
F06.21 Flux weakening control options 1: direct calculation 1 ○
2: automatic adjustment
F06.22 Flux weakening voltage 70.00-100.00 % 100.00 ●
0.0-150.0 (100.0 is the
Maximum flux weakening
F06.23 rated current of the % 100.0 ●
current of synchronous motor
motor)
Proportional gain of flux
F06.24 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
weakening regulator
Integral time of flux weakening
F06.25 0.01 - 60.00 s 2.00 ●
regulator
The synchronous motor is subject to flux weakening control.
F06.21=0: invalid
Flux weakening control is not performed. The maximum speed of the motor is related
to the bus voltage of the inverter. When the maximum speed of the motor does not meet
user requirements, the flux weakening function of the synchronous motor should be enabled
to increase the speed.
A90 has two flux weakening modes: direct calculation and automatic adjustment.
F06.21=1: direct calculation
In the direct calculation mode, the flux weakening current is calculated according to
the target speed and can be adjusted manually via the option 06.22. The lower the flux
weakening current, the lower the total output current will be, but the desired effect of flux
weakening may not be achieved.
178
F06.21=2: automatic adjustment

In the automatic adjustment, the optimal flux weakening current will be selected
automatically, but it may affect the dynamic performance of the system or become unstable.
The speed of flux weakening current adjustment can be changed by setting the
proportional gain (F06.24) and integral time (F06.25). However, fast adjustment of the flux
weakening current adjustment may cause instability. This does not need to be changed
manually under normal circumstances.
Function Default
code setting
Self-learning gain at
F06.27 0 - 200 % 100 ●
initial position
This parameter is used to determine the amplitude of the high-frequency current
injected during the initial position identification. The larger this value, the higher the
“squeak” sound will be.

code name setting
Frequency of low
0.00-100.00 (100.00 is the
rated frequency of the motor)
injection current
Injection current of
0.0-60.0 (100.0 is the rated
F06.29 low frequency % 40.0 ●
band
Regulator gain of
low frequency
F06.30 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
band of injection
current
Regulator integral
time of low
F06.31 0.00 - 300.00 ms 10.00 ●
frequency band of
injection current
Frequency of high
0.00-100.00 (100.00 is the
rated frequency of the motor)
injection current
Injection current of
0.0-30.0 (100.0 is the rated
F06.33 high frequency % 8.0 ●
band
F06.34 Regulator gain of 0.00 - 10.00 0.50 ●
179
high frequency
band of injection
current
Regulator integral
time of high
F06.35 0.00 - 300.00 ms 10.00 ●
frequency band of
injection current
Injection
current
F06.29
High frequency band
Low frequency band
F06.33
0 F06.28 F06.32 Frequency
Fig. 7-22 Schematic Diagram of High Frequency Injection

The injection current depends on F06.29 in the low frequency band (output frequency
<F06.28) and F06.33 in the high frequency band (output frequency> F06.32).
To get better results, the gain and integral time of the regulator can be adjusted.
Default settings can be used under normal circumstances.
They must not be adjusted by non-professionals.

0: VF
Open-loop low-frequency
1: IF
F06.41 processing of synchronous 0 ○
2: IF in start and VF
motor
in stop
Open-loop low-frequency
F06.42 processing range of 0.0 - 50.0 % 8.0 ○
synchronous motor
F06.43 IF injection current 0.0 - 600.0 % 80.0 ○
180
The default settings of low frequency optimization options of the synchronous motor
are suitable for most applications. If a larger torque is required at the low frequency, you
can enable the IF mode.
Functio Parameter Default

n code description setting
Speed tracking proportional gain
F06.46 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 ○
of synchronous motor
Speed tracking integral gain of
F06.47 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 ○
synchronous motor
Filtering time constant of speed
F06.48 0.00 - 10.00 ms 0.40 ○
tracking of synchronous motor
Speed tracking control intensity
F06.49 1.0 - 100.0 5.0 ○
Speed tracking control threshold
F06.50 0.00 - 10.00 0.20 ○
Injection current (Iq) rise time of
F06.51 0.010 - 1.000 S 5.0 ○
synchronous motor
Tuning parameters for speed tracking of the synchronous motor.
7.8 Fault Protection Parameter Group of F07 Group

E20 E22 E13 E06 E05 E04 E07 E08

Protection 000
F07.00 ○
shield 0: valid protection 00000
1: shielded protection
Bit setting = 0: when the inverter detects a fault corresponding to this bit, it will stop
the output and enter the fault status.
Bit setting = 1: when the inverter detects a fault corresponding to this bit, it will keep
the original status without protection.
This code is subject to bit operation. You only need to set the corresponding bit to 0 or
1. As shown in the table below:
181
Table 7-8 Detailed Definition of Shield Bit for Fault Protection
Protection E20 E22 E13 E06 E05 E04 E07 E08
code
Corresponding 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
bit
Settings 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
For example: To shield the E07 protection, you only need to set the first bit
corresponding to E07 to 1, i.e. F07.00=xxx xxx1x.
To shield the E08 and E13 protection, you only need to set the 0th bit corresponding to
E08 and the 5th bit corresponding to E13 to 1. That is, F07.00=xx1 xxxx1.
Unless there are special needs, please do not shield any protection function, so as
to prevent the inverter from damage as a result of no protective action after
failure.
Function Default
code setting
Motor overload
F07.01 0.20 - 10.00 1.00 ●
protection gain
Motor overload
F07.02 50 - 100 % 80 ●
pre-alarm coefficient
The inverse time curve of motor overload protection is: 200% × (F07.01) × rated
current of the motor, sending an alarm of motor overload fault (E13) if the duration reaches
one minute; 150% × (F07.01) ×rated current of the motor, sending an alarm of motor
overload (E13) if the duration reaches 15 minutes.
The user needs to set F07.01 correctly according to the actual overload capacity of the
motor. If the set value is too large, the motor may be damaged as a result of overheat but the
inverter may not send an alarm!
The F07.02 warning coefficient is used to determine the extent of motor overload for a
protection warning. The larger this value, the less the warning is advanced.
When the cumulative output current of the inverter is greater than the product of the
inverse time curve of load by F07.02, the multi-function digital DO terminal of the inverter
will output the valid signal “17: Motor overload pre-alarm”.
★: The motor overheat fault (E12) cannot be reset immediately. You must wait until the
182
motor temperature drops to be far below the protection threshold.

code name setting
Ones place: Instantaneous
stop/no-stop function options
0: Invalid
Bus voltage control 1: deceleration
F07.06 2: deceleration to stop 10 ○
options Tens place: Overvoltage stall
function options
0: Invalid
1: valid
Voltage of
110.0 - 150.0 (380V, 131.0
F07.07 overvoltage stall % ○
100.0=537V) (703V)
control
60.0 to instantaneous
Instantaneous stop/no-stop recovery voltage
F07.08 stop/no-stop 76.0 ○
(100.0 = standard bus
operating voltage voltage)
F07.06=0X: Invalid
The overvoltage stall is invalid. It is recommended not to set it to 0 in the case of no
external braking unit.
The undervoltage stall is also invalid.
F07.06=1X: Valid overvoltage stall
When the overvoltage stall is valid, the stall control voltage is dependent on F07.07.
The DC bus overvoltage is usually caused by deceleration. Due to the energy feedback
during deceleration, the DC bus voltage will rise.
When the DC bus voltage is greater than the overvoltage threshold and the overvoltage
stall is valid (F07.06=2/3), the deceleration of the inverter will be suspended, the output
frequency will remain unchanged, and the energy feedback will be stopped until the DC bus
voltage is normal. Then the inverter will restart deceleration. The process of overvoltage
stall protection in deceleration is shown in Fig. 7-23.
183
DC bus voltage
Voltage of
overvoltage stall
Invalid voltage of
overvoltage stall
Output frequency
Treatment of
regenerated
overvoltage
Time
Fig. 7-23 Schematic Diagram of Overvoltage Stall Protection

Function Default
code setting
Instantaneous
F07.09 stop/no-stop recovery Instantaneous stop/no-stop % 86.0 ●
voltage operating voltage to 100.0
Check time for
F07.10 instantaneous 0.00-100.00 s 0.5 ●
stop/no-stop recovery
voltage
When the bus voltage is lower than the voltage of undervoltage stall control (F07.08),
the inverter will be in the power-down status. When the bus voltage is greater than the
voltage of power failure end judgment (F07.09) and this lasts for the delay time of power
failure end judgment (F07.10), the inverter will recover its normal status.
code name setting
0: Invalid
Current limit
F07.11 1: limit mode 1 2 ○
control
2: limit mode 2
Current limit 20.0-180.0 (100% = rated current of
F07.12 % 150.0 ●
level inverter)
F07.11=0: invalid
The current limit does not work.
F07.11=1: limit mode 1
F07.11=2: limit mode 2
When the output current reaches the current limit level (F07.12) and the current limit
184
control is valid (F07.11=1) during operation, the current limit function of the inverter will
be enabled. The output frequency will be reduced to limit the increase in output current,
thus disabling the overcurrent stall of the inverter. When the output current decreases to
below the current limit level, the original running status will be restored. The current limit
process is shown in Fig. 7-24.
Fig. 7-24 Current Limit Process

F07.12 is used to set the operating conditions of current limit. If the current of the
inverter is greater than the set value of this code, the current limit function will be enabled,
thus controlling the output current not to exceed the current limit level.
The current limit is valid only for the V/F drive mode. It is recommended to use
this function in the case of large inertia or fan type loads or driving of multiple
motors by a single inverter.
Function Default
code setting
Quick current limit 0: Invalid
F07.13 0 ○
options 1: valid
F07.13=0: invalid
The quick current limit does not work.
F07.13=1: valid
The quick current limit can reduce overcurrent faults.
185
Function Default
code setting
Number of retries
F07.14 0-20; 0: disable retry after failure 0 ○
after failure
Options of digital
0: no action
F07.15 output action in 0 ○
1: action
Interval of retries
F07.16 0.01 - 30.00 s 0.50 ●
after failure
Restoration time in
F07.17 0.01 - 30.00 s 10.00 ●
E07 E03 E02 E06 E05 E04
Options of retries **0
F07.18 0: allow retry after failure ○
after failure 00000
1: disable retry after failure
The function of retry after failure is to prevent the impact of accidental faults on the
normal operation of the system. This is valid only for the faults listed in F07.18.
If retry after failure is enabled, this will be performed when a corresponding fault
occurs. That is, the fault will be reset. The fault status depends on F07.15 and the output of
the digital output terminal. If a fault is still detected after the retry interval, the retry will be
continued to the set number of retries after failure (F07.14) and then the corresponding fault
will be reported. If the fault is not detected after several retries, the retries will be deemed
successful and the inverter will continue to run normally.
When the retries after failure succeed and no fault is detected within the recovery time
(F07.17), the number of retries after failure will be cleared. If a fault occurs again, retries
will be performed from zero. In the case of a fault within this period, retries will be carried
out based on the last count.
code code name Parameter description Unit setting Attribute
Action E21 E16 E15 E14 E13 E12 E08 E07
000
F07.19 option 1 0: free stop 00000 ○
after failure 1: stop according to stop mode
Action E28 E27 E25 E23
F07.20 option 2 0: free stop *0000 ○
after failure 1: stop according to stop mode
With regard to some faults, the action mode of the inverter can be selected via this
function code. The inverter will stop running freely when the corresponding bit is set to 0
and according to the stop mode (F04.19) when the corresponding bit is set to 1.
These two function codes are subject to bit operation. You only need to set the
corresponding bit to 0 or 1. As shown in the table below:
186
Table 7-9 Detailed Definition of Action Bits after Failure

F07.19 E21 E16 E15 E14 E13 E12 E08 E07
F07.20 * * * * E28 E27 E25 E23
Correspond 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ing bit
Settings 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
For example: To stop the inverter according to the stop mode (F04.19) after the E08
and E13 failure, you only need to set the 1st bit corresponding to E08 and the 3rd bit
corresponding to E13 to 1. That is, F07.19=xxx x1x1x.
Function Default
code setting
F07.21 0: invalid 1: valid 0 ●
protection
F07.22 Load loss detection level 0.0-100.0 % 20/1000 ●
F07.23 Load loss detection time 0.0 - 60.0 s 1.0 ●
0: fault reporting and free stop
1: fault reporting and stop
F07.24 according to the stop mode 1 ○
protection action
2: Continue to run, with DO
status output
When the off-load protection is valid (F07.21=1), the inverter will be in the running
status without DC braking, and the output current is below the off-load detection level
(F07.22) and maintained for the off-load detection time (F07.23), the inverter will be in the
off-load status. Specific processing depends on F07.24.
Default
setting
0: Invalid
F07.27 AVR function 1: valid 1 ○
2: automatic
F07.27=0: invalid
The automatic voltage regulation (AVR) function is invalid.
F07.27=1: valid
The AVR function is continuously valid. If the input voltage is lower than the rated
input voltage, and the output frequency is greater than the corresponding frequency on the
VF curve, the inverter will output the maximum voltage to maximize the power output of
the motor. If the input voltage is higher than the rated input voltage, the output voltage of
the inverter will decrease, and the VF ratio will remain unchanged.
F07.27=2: automatic
The AVR function is valid automatically (invalid during deceleration): the inverter will
automatically adjust the output voltage according to changes in the actual grid voltage, to
keep it at the rated output voltage.
187
Default
setting
Stall fault detection 0.0-6000.0 (0.0: no stall fault
F07.28 s 0.0 ○
time detection)
Stall control
F07.29 0 - 100 % 100 ○
intensity
When the continuous stall time exceeds the set value of F07.28, the driver will report a
stall fault.
In the stall status, the driver will perform automatic control according to the set value
of F07.29. The intensity setting depends on the on-site application, instead of
maximization.
7.9 Multi-segment Speed and Simple PLC Parameter Group of F08

Group
code name setting
Multi-segment 0.00 to maximum frequency
F08.00 Hz 0.00 ●
speed 1 F00.16
F08.01 Hz 5.00 ●
speed 2 F00.16
F08.02 Hz 10.00 ●
speed 3 F00.16
F08.03 Hz 15.00 ●
speed 4 F00.16
F08.04 Hz 20.00 ●
speed 5 F00.16
F08.05 Hz 25.00 ●
speed 6 F00.16
F08.06 Hz 30.00 ●
speed 7 F00.16
F08.07 Hz 35.00 ●
speed 8 F00.16
F08.08 Hz 40.00 ●
speed 9 F00.16
F08.09 Multi- speed 10 Hz 45.00 ●
F00.16
F08.10 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 11 F00.16
F08.11 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 12 F00.16
188
F08.12 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 13 F00.16
F08.13 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 14 F00.16
F08.14 Hz 50.00 ●
speed 15 F00.16
The 16-segment speed can be provided according to the multi-segment speed control
terminal, 15-segment frequency command and digital frequency setting F00.07.
Table 7-10 Combination of Multi-segment Speed Command and Multi-segment Speed
Terminal
Multi-seg Multi-seg
Multi-seg Multi-segm
Segment ment ment Selected Corresponding
ment speed ent speed
Speed speed speed frequency function code
terminal 4 terminal 1
terminal 3 terminal 2
Digital
Depending on
1 Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid frequency
F00.07
setting
Multi-segment
2 Invalid Invalid Invalid Valid F08.00
speed 1
Multi-segment
3 Invalid Invalid Valid Invalid F08.01
speed 2
Multi-segment
4 Invalid Invalid Valid Valid F08.02
speed 3
Multi-segment
5 Invalid Valid Invalid Invalid F08.03
speed 4
Multi-segment
6 Invalid Valid Invalid Valid F08.04
speed 5
Multi-segment
7 Invalid Valid Valid Invalid F08.05
speed 6
Multi-segment
8 Invalid Valid Valid Valid F08.06
speed 7
Multi-segment
9 Valid Invalid Invalid Invalid F08.07
speed 8
Multi-segment
10 Valid Invalid Invalid Valid F08.08
speed 9
Multi- speed
11 Valid Invalid Valid Invalid F08.09
10
Multi-segment
12 Valid Invalid Valid Valid F08.10
speed 11
Multi-segment
13 Valid Valid Invalid Invalid F08.11
speed 12
189
Multi-segment
14 Valid Valid Invalid Valid F08.12
speed 13
Multi-segment
15 Valid Valid Valid Invalid F08.13
speed 14
Multi-segment
16 Valid Valid Valid Valid F08.14
speed 15
Precautions for setting:

★ The start and stop in multi-segment speed operation depends on the function code
F00.02.
★ The acceleration/deceleration time in multi-segment speed operation can be
controlled by the external terminal with the acceleration/deceleration time
function.
The direction of multi-segment speed operation is controlled by the terminals F/R and
RUN.

code name setting
0: stop after a single run
1: stop after a limited number
of cycles
Simple PLC
F08.15 2: run at the last segment 0 ●
running mode
after a limited number of
cycles
3: continuous cycles
Limited number of
F08.16 1 - 10000 1 ●
cycles
In addition to the multi-segment speed mode, it also has the simple PLC function.
There are four running modes in total, as detailed in Table 7-11.
Table 7-11 Details of PLC Running Mode
F08.15 Description
0 The inverter will be stopped after running in the last segment.
The inverter will run cyclically and be stopped after the set cycles. The number
1
of cycles depends on the function code F08.16.
The inverter will run cyclically and keep the speed of the last segment after
2 running in the last segment, until a stop command is received. The number of
cycles depends on the function code F08.16.
3 The inverter will continue cyclic operation until a stop command is received.
190
★ The last segment refers to the segment that is not set to 0, judged from the running
time (F08.48) of the 15th segment toward the 1st segment.
Output 5
frequency (Hz)
2
1
Time (s)
4
12
13
T1 T2 T4 T5 T12 T13
Fig. 7-25 Schematic Diagram of Simple PLC Operation

Fig. 7-25 shows the operation diagram in the running mode “0: stop after a single run”.
Since the running time of the 3rd segment is set to 0 (F08.24=0.0), the 3rd segment will not
be put into actual operation. The running time of the 14th and 15th segments is set to 0
(F08.46=0.0, F08.48=0.0), so the last segment is the 13th segment, and the inverter will be
stopped after running in the 13th segment.

code name setting
Ones place: Stop
memory options
0: no memory (from the
first segment)
1: memory (from the
Simple PLC moment of stop)
F08.17 00 ●
memory options Tens place: Power-down
memory options
0: no memory (from the
first segment)
1: Memory (from the
power-down moment)
The PLC stop memory is to record the current simple PLC running times (F18.10),
running stage (F18.11), and running time at the current stage (F18.12). The inverter will
continue to run from the memory stage during next operation. If you choose no memory,
191
the PLC process will be performed every time the inverter is started.
The PLC power-down memory is to record the current simple PLC running times
(F18.10), running stage (F18.11), and running time at the current stage (F18.12) before the
memory is powered off. The inverter will continue to run from the memory stage when the
inverter is powered on again. If you choose no memory, the PLC process will be performed
every time the inverter is powered on.
Default
setting
0: s (second)
F08.18 Simple PLC time unit 0 ●
1: min (minute)
In order to meet different working conditions, the running time involved in the PLC
function is set to a numerical value. Its specific meaning needs to be set in conjunction with
the simple PLC time unit (F08.18). At present, there are two types of unit: second and
minute.
Function Default
code setting
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the first 0: acceleration and
F08.19 0 ●
segment deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.20 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
first segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
Setting of the second 0: forward
F08.21 0 ●
segment 1: reverse
192
0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.22 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
second segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the third 0: acceleration and
F08.23 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.24 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
third segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the fourth 0: acceleration and
F08.25 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.26 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fourth segment
F08.27 Setting of the fifth Ones place: Running 0 ●
193
segment direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.28 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fifth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the sixth 0: acceleration and
F08.29 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.30 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
sixth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the deceleration time options
F08.31 0 ●
seventh segment 0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
194
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.32 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
seventh segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the eighth 0: acceleration and
F08.33 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.34 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
eighth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the ninth 0: acceleration and
F08.35 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.36 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
ninth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
Setting of the tenth
F08.37 1: reverse 0 ●
segment
0: acceleration and
195
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.38 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
tenth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the 0: acceleration and
F08.39 0 ●
eleventh segment deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.40 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
eleventh segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the twelve 0: acceleration and
F08.41 0 ●
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.42 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
twelfth segment
Setting of the Ones place: Running
F08.43 0 ●
thirteenth segment direction options
196
0: forward
1: reverse
0: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.44 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
thirteenth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the 0: acceleration and
F08.45 0 ●
fourteenth segment deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.46 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fourteenth segment
Ones place: Running
direction options
0: forward
1: reverse
Setting of the
F08.47 0: acceleration and 0 ●
fifteenth segment
deceleration time 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 2
2: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
3: acceleration and
197
deceleration time 4
Running time of the
F08.48 0.0 - 6000.0 s/min 5.0 ●
fifteenth segment
When the simple PLC is running, the operating frequency, operating direction,
acceleration/deceleration time and operating time in the entire segment can be set separately.
This is described below with the 13th segment (the last segment) as an example. The
specific operation is shown in Fig. 7.
F08.12=50.00: the operating frequency of 13th segment is 50.00Hz.
F08.43=31: the operating direction in the 13th segment is reverse, and the acceleration and
deceleration are controlled based on the acceleration and deceleration time 4
(F15.07/F15.08).
F08.44=5.0: the operating time in the 13th segment is 5.0s (F08.18=0 by default).
7.10 PID Function Parameter Group of F09 Group
The A90 series inverter has a process PID function, as described in this section.
Process PID control is mainly for pressure control, flow control and temperature control.
Kp
+
+

Ref KpKi Out
+ Ts
+
d
Fdb KpKdTs
dt
Fig. 7-26 Block Diagram of Process PID

PID control is a kind of closed-loop control. The output signal (Out) of the object
controlled by the system is fed back to the PID controller, and the output of the controller is
adjusted after PID operation, thus forming one or more closed loops. This function is to
make the output value (Out) of the object controlled by the system consistent with the set
target value (Ref). The specific block diagram is shown in Fig. 7-26.
The PID controller is used for control by calculating the control quantity with three
calculation factors, i.e. proportion (P), integral (I) and differential (D), according to the
difference between the set target (Ref) and feedback signal (Fdb). The features of each
198
calculation factor are as follows:
Proportion (P):
Proportional control is one of the simplest control modes. The output of the controller
is proportional to the input error signal. When only proportional control is enabled, there
are steady-state errors in the system output.
Integral (I):
In the integral control mode, the output of the controller is proportional to the integral
of the input error signal. Steady-state errors can be eliminated, so that the system has no
steady-state errors while operating in the steady state. However, drastic changes cannot be
tracked.
Differential (D):
In the differential control mode, the output of the controller is proportional to the
differential (i.e. change rate of the error) of the input error signal. This can predict the trend
of changes in errors, quickly respond to drastic changes, and improve the dynamic features
of the system in the control process.
Function Default
code setting
0: digital PID setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: retention
F09.00 PID setting source 4:VP 0 ○
5: retention
0.0 to PID setting
F09.01 Digital PID setting 0.0 ●
feedback range F09.03
PID setting feedback
F09.03 0.1 - 6000.0 100.0 ●
range
F09.00=0: digital PID setting F09.01
The PID setting depends on the digital PID setting (F09.01), and the specific
percentage is F09.01/F09.03 * 100.00%.
F09.00=1:AI1
F09.00=2:AI2
For the details of AI1 to AI2, refer to the description of F00.04. For PID setting, the
199
percentage is directly given, and the maximum output is 100.00%.

F09.00=4:VP
In the case of 09.00=4VP, the PID setting source is the digital potentiometer setting.
The percentage of PID setting depends directly on the communication (percentage).
as the slave (F10.06=0), the specific setting percentage is “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional coefficient)”, and
the 700FH data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 0-2.
 For the general communication (F10.05=0), the specific setting percentage is
“7004H (communication setting of process PID setting)”, and the 7004H data
range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 0-2.
Default
setting
1: AI1
F09.02 PID feedback source 2: AI2 1 ○
F09.02=1:AI1
F09.02=2:AI2
The PID feedback percentage is directly dependent on the AI (percentage).
For the details of AI1 to AI2, see the description of F00.04. When it is used as the PID
feedback, the percentage will directly turn the feedback value, and the maximum output is
100.00%.
The PID feedback percentage is directly dependent on the communication
(percentage).
as the slave (F10.06=0), the specific feedback percentage is “700FH
(master-slave communication setting) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional
coefficient)”, and the 700FH data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in
Table 0-2.
 For the general communication (F10.05=0), the specific feedback percentage is
200
“7005H (communication setting of process PID feedback)”, and the 7005H data
Function Default
code setting
PID positive and
0: positive
F09.04 negative action 0 ○
1: negative
selection
The process PID action mode depends jointly on the setting of the function code
F09.04 and the status of the input function “44: PID positive/negative action switching”, as
Table 7-12 Description of PID Positive/Negative Action
F09.04 44: PID positive/negative Mode of action Note
switching
0 0 Positive action Both the deviation and
output are positive.
0 1 Negative action The deviation is positive
and the output is negative.
1 0 Negative action The deviation is positive
and the output is negative.
1 1 Positive action Both the deviation and
output are positive.
Note: The deviation in PID control is usually “setting - feedback”.
 When the feedback signal is greater than the PID setting, the output frequency
of the inverter should decrease for PID balance. Take the water supply
control as an example. When the pressure increases, the pressure feedback
will increase. The output frequency of the inverter must be decreased to
reduce the pressure and keep the constant pressure. In this case, the PID
should be set to the positive action.
 When the feedback signal is greater than the PID setting, the output frequency
of the inverter needs to increase for PID balance. Take temperature control as
an example. The PID regulator needs to be set to negative action to control
the temperature.
Function Default
code setting
201
0.000 to 30.000; 0.000: no
F09.06 Integral time 1 s 10.000 ●
integral
0.000 to 30.000; 0.000: no
F09.09 Integral time 2 s 10.000 ●
integral
0: no switching
1: switching via digital
PID parameter
F09.11 input terminal 0 ●
switching conditions
2: automatic switching
according to deviation
PID parameter
F09.12 switching deviation 0.00 - F09.13 % 20.00 ●
1
PID parameter
F09.13 switching deviation F09.12 - 100.00 % 80.00 ●
2
For a variety of complex scenes, two sets of PID parameters have been introduced into
the process PID module. Switching or linear interpolation of the two sets of parameters can
be performed according to the function setting (F09.11) and input conditions (e.g. input
function “43: PID parameter switching”, and deviation e(k)). See the instruction Table 7-13
for details.
Table 7-13 Description of PID Parameter Options
Method
Description
F09.11 Other conditions
0 -- PID parameters are not switched. The first group of
parameters is used.
43: PID parameter PID parameters are switched via the digital input terminal
switching (43: PID parameter switching).
1
0 Invalid switching, the first group of parameters
1 Valid switching, the second group of parameters
|e (k)| - F09.12/13 PID parameters are automatically switched according to
the deviation.
|e(k)|< F09.12 The first group of parameters
2
|e(k)|< F09.13 The second group of parameters
According to the deviation, linear interpolation is
Middle
performed based on the two groups of parameters.
As described in the table, when the function code F09.11 is set to 0, the PID
parameters will not be switched, and the first group of parameters (F09.05 to F09.07) will
202
prevail; when the function code is set to 1, the PID parameters will be selected according to
the status of the input function “43: PID parameter switching”; when the function code 2 is
used, the PID parameters will be selected according to the absolute value |e(k)|
(=|setting-feedback|) of the current deviation and the relationship between the function
codes F09.12 and F09. Or, the linear difference may be used.
In the case of “F09.12≤|e(k)|≤F09.13”, the current PID parameters are obtained
through linear interpolation of the first and second groups of parameters. The specific
principle is shown by the intermediate segment in Fig. 7-27.
PID
parameters
Parameter
2 (e2 , Y2 )
Parameter
1 (e1 , Y1 )
|Deviation|
0 Switching Switching
100.00%
deviation 1 deviation 2
Fig. 7-27 Schematic Diagram of Automatic Switching of PID Parameters based on

Deviation (F19.11=2)
Default
setting
F09.14 Initial PID value 0.00-100.00 % 0.00 ●
F09.15 PID initial value holding time 0.00~650.00 s 0.00 ●
The inverter starts running, and the process PID module constantly outputs the initial
PID value (F09.14) for the initial PID holding time (F09.15). Then the output is adjusted by
the PID based on the deviation. Specific effects are shown in Fig. 7-28.
When the initial PID holding time is set to 0.00s, i.e. F09.15=0.00, the initial PID
output function will be invalid.
203
Output
frequency
Initial PID
value
F09.14
Time
0 Holding time of initial
PID value (F09.15)
Fig. 7-28 Schematic Diagram of Initial PID Output
Default
setting
F09.16 Upper limit of PID output F09.17 - +100.0 % 100.0 ●
F09.17 Lower limit of PID output –100.0 - F09.16 % 0.0 ●
The PID output is limited. The output range of the PID module in the whole process is
(F09.17, F09.16). That is, if the actual adjustment result is beyond this range, the output
will be based on the boundaries.
Default
setting
F09.18 PID deviation limit 0.00-100.00 (0.00: invalid) % 0.00 ●
When the deviation between the PID setting and feedback is less than or equal to the
deviation limit (F09.18), the PID will stop the adjustment. When the deviation between the
setting and feedback is smaller, the output frequency will remain stable. This is valid for
some closed-loop control applications.
If the input terminal function “41: process PID pause” is valid, the PID will also
stop the adjustment. Users need to use these two modes together.
Default
setting
F09.19 PID differential limit 0.00-100.00 % 5.00 ●
The differential (D) component of the PID regulator must not be greater than the PID
204
differential limit (F09.19), in order to avoid the excessive deviation and output at a certain
moment to cause system oscillations. If this value is set correctly, the impact of sudden
interference on the system can be well suppressed.

code name setting
PID integral
0.00-100.00 (100.00% =
F09.20 separation % 100.00 ●
invalid integral separation)
threshold
For better PID regulation, only PD or P adjustment is needed sometimes, while
integral adjustment is not needed. For this reason, the A90 series inverter has a special
integral separation function. When the deviation between the PID setting and feedback is
greater than the PID integral separation threshold (F09.20), the integral separation will be
valid. That is, the integral (I) adjustment of the PID regulator will be suspended. To
facilitate remote control, the input terminal function “42: process PID integration pause”
can be used. But if the function code setting is invalid (F09.20=100.00), the input terminal
function will not work, as detailed in Table 7-14.
Table 7-14 Description of Integral Separation Function
Method Description
F09.20 DI(42) F09.20: PID integral separation threshold; DI (42): Process PID
integral pause
100.00% -- The integral (I) is always valid.
Depending on the relationship between |e(k)| and F09.20 as well
0.00%
as the status of the DI function
~
Invalid If |e(k)|>F09.20, the integral separation is valid.
99.99%
Valid The integral separation is valid.
Default
setting
F09.21 PID setting change time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
The PID setting change time refers to the time required for the setting to change from
0.0% to 100.0%, similar to the acceleration and deceleration time function. When the PID
setting changes, the actual PID setting will change linearly, thus reducing the impact of
sudden changes on the system. Smoothing is invalid during the initial setting. The setting
will change from the current feedback value during the start.
205
Default
setting
F09.22 PID feedback filtering time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F09.23 PID output filtering time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
F09.22 is used to filter the PID feedback. This is helpful to reduce the impact of
interference on the feedback, but will cause the decline of the response performance of the
process closed-loop system.
F09.23 is used to filter the PID output. This is helpful to reduce the sudden changes in
the output frequency of the inverter, but will also cause the decline of the response
performance of the process closed-loop system.
Function Default
code setting
Upper limit detection 0.00-100.00; 100.00 =
F09.24 value of PID feedback invalid feedback % 100.00 ●
disconnection disconnection
Lower limit detection 0.00-100.00; 0.00 =
F09.25 value of PID feedback invalid feedback % 0.00 ●
disconnection disconnection
Detection time of PID
F09.26 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
feedback disconnection
The function of PID feedback disconnection detection is to prevent galloping caused
by feedback disconnection. Depending on the nature of the feedback sensor, the settings are
different.
If the 0.0% type sensor is fed back at the time of disconnection, the lower limit of PID
feedback disconnection detection (F09.25) needs to be set to an appropriate value. If the
feedback amount is below the F09.25 setting and has been maintained for the PID feedback
disconnection detection time (F09.26), the PID feedback will be regarded disconnected.
When the 100.0% type sensor is fed back at the time of disconnection, the upper limit of
PID feedback disconnection detection (F09.24) needs to be set to an appropriate value. If
the feedback amount is greater than the feedback amount and has been maintained for the
time corresponding to F09.26, the PID feedback will be regarded disconnected.
★ Once the feedback sensor is determined, only the corresponding detection mode
can be applied. The upper limit detection and lower limit detection cannot be
enabled at the same time.
206
code name setting
0: Invalid
1: sleep at zero speed
PID sleep control
F09.27 2: sleep at lower frequency 0 ●
options
limit
3: sleep with tube sealed
0.00-100.00 (100.00
F09.28 Sleep action point corresponds to the PID setting % 100.00 ●
feedback range)
F09.29 Sleep delay time 0.0 - 6500.0 s 0.0 ●
0.00-100.00 (100.00
Wake-up action
F09.30 corresponds to the PID setting % 0.00 ●
point
feedback range)
Wake-up delay
F09.31 0.0 - 6500.0 s 0.0 ●
time
When the output value and feedback value tend to be stable or the controlled quantity
is within the allowable range on some occasions or at a certain moment, and the output is
not allowed, the sleep status can be applied for a short time. If the controlled quantity is
beyond the control range, the inverter will be awakened and generate the output. These
steps will be repeated to make the controlled quantity within the allowable range and also
save the energy. The detailed function description is shown in Table 7-15.
Table 7-15 Description of Sleep/Wake-up Function

Method
Mode of State Description
action
Judgment of the sleep conditions: If the |Feedback| is greater than
the sleep action point (F09.28) (necessary condition: the feedback
pressure must be greater than or equal to the set pressure during
Positive restart after the stop or sleep), or the output frequency of the
action Normal inverter reaches the lower limit, causing the failure to continue to
(e.g. work decelerate (due to the lower frequency limit or lower output limit of
constant the inverter), and these conditions have been met and maintained to
pressure the sleep delay time (F09.29), the sleep status will be enabled.
control) ★: The PID continues the output during the delay period. The
output depends on the function code after the delay period.
Sleep Judgment of the wake-up conditions: If the |Feedback| is less than
status or equal to the value of the wake-up action point (F09.30), and this
207
has been maintained for the wake-up delay time (F09.31), the sleep
status will be disabled.
★: The output depends on the function code during the delay
period; and the PID can continue normal output after the delay
period.
Judgment of the sleep conditions: If the |Feedback| is less than the
sleep action point (F09.28) (necessary condition: the feedback
pressure must be lower than or equal to the set pressure during
restart after the stop or sleep), or the output frequency of the
Normal inverter reaches the lower limit, causing the failure to continue to
work decelerate (due to the lower frequency limit or lower output limit of
Negative
the inverter), and these conditions have been met and maintained to
action
the sleep delay time (F09.29), the sleep status will be enabled.
(e.g.
★: The PID continues the output during the delay period. The
constant
output depends on the function code after the delay period.
temperature
Judgment of the wake-up conditions: If the |Feedback| is greater
control)
than or equal to the value of the wake-up action point (F09.30), and
this has been maintained for the wake-up delay time (F09.31), the
Sleep
sleep status will be disabled.
status
★: The output depends on the function code during the delay
period; and the PID can continue normal output after the delay
period.
Suggestion: F09.28 (sleep action point) is greater than or equal to F09.30 (wake-up action
point) during the positive action, and less than or equal to F09.30 (wake-up action point)
during the negative action.

code name setting
Multi-segment 0.0 to PID setting feedback
F09.32 0.0 ●
PID setting 1 range F09.03
F09.33 0.0 ●
F09.34 0.0 ●
208
PID settings are determined in conjunction with the setting of the function code F09.00.
The A90 series inverter has a multi-segment PID setting function, and its switching
conditions are mainly dependent on the input functions “15: multi-segment PID terminal 1”
and “16: multi-segment PID terminal 2”, as detailed in Table 7-16.
Table 7-16 Details of Multi-segment PID Setting Function
Method
Setting Scope PID Setting
16 15 F09.00
0 F09.01 0.0 - F09.03 0.00% - 100.00%
1 AI1 -100.00% - 100.00% -100.00% - 100.00%
Invalid Invalid
2 AI2 -100.00% - 100.00% -100.00% - 100.00%
6 485 -100.00% - 100.00% -100.00% - 100.00%
Invalid Valid -- F09.32 0.0 - F09.03 0.00% - 100.00%
Valid Invalid -- F09.33 0.0 - F09.03 0.00% - 100.00%
Valid Valid -- F09.34 0.0 - F09.03 0.00% - 100.00%
7.11 Communication Function Parameter Group of F10 Group

The A90 series inverter supports the RTU format Modbus protocol, and the
“single-master multi-slave” communication network with RS-485 bus.
Function Default
code setting
Local Modbus
1-247; 0: broadcast
F10.00 communication 1 ○
address
address
For the entire communication network, the inverter as a slave must have its own
unique address. Its setting range is 1 to 247. That is, a network supports 247 slave stations
at most.
★ 0 is the broadcast address, which does not need to be set. All slave inverters can be
recognized.
The slaves and hosts attached to the same network must follow the same sending and
receiving principles (e.g. baud rate, data format, and protocol format) to ensure normal
communication. Hence, there are three corresponding function codes, i.e. F10.01 (baud
rate), F10.02 (data format) and F10.10 (protocol format, Modbus-RTU protocol by default
for the A90 series inverter). The devices connected to the network must have the same
settings.
209
code name setting
0:4800
1:9600
Baud rate of
2:19200
F10.01 Modbus bps 1 ○
3:38400
communication
4:57600
5:115200
During the communication based on the Modbus-RTU protocol, the A90 series
inverter supports six different baud rates in bps (bit/s). Take F10.01=9600bps as an example.
It means that data is transmitted at a rate of 9600bits per second. By default, each byte
consists of valid 8-bit data (such as 0x01). When 10-bit data needs to be transmitted in the
actual situation, the transmission time is about 1.04ms (approximately
1.04167ms=10bit/9600bps).

0: 1-8-N-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
stop bit)
1: 1-8-E-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
even parity check bit + 1 stop bit)
2: 1-8-O-1 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
Modbus data odd parity check bit + 1 stop bit)
F10.02 0 ○
format 3: 1-8-N-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 2
stop bits)
4: 1-8-E-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
even parity check bit + 2 stop bits)
5: 1-8-O-2 (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1
odd parity check bit + 2 stop bits)
In the UART transmission, the data usually consists of a start bit, valid data (8 bits by
default), check bit (optional), and a stop bit. The A90 series inverter supports six data
formats according to the Modbus-RTU combinations in communication.
Start Bit Valid Data Check Bit Stop Bit
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 N/O/E 1
If F10.02=0, it means that the current data consists of one start bit + eight data bits +
no check bit + one stop bit.
★ N (NONE): no parity; E (EVEN): even parity; O (ODD), odd parity.
210
In order to meet different needs, the inverter also supports communication timeout and
response delay during the communication based on the Modbus protocol.

Modbus
0.0 to 60.0; 0.0: invalid (also valid
F10.03 communicat s 0.0 ●
for master-slave mode)
ion timeout
As shown in Fig. 7-29, the communication time interval △t is defined as the period
from the previous reception of valid data frames by the slave station (inverter) to next
reception of valid data frames. If △t is greater than the set time (depending on the function
code F10.03; this function is invalid if set to 0), it will be regarded communication timeout.
1# 2# 3# 1#
Send Return Return Send Return Send Return

△t
Fig. 7-29 Schematic Diagram of Communication Timeout

Example of this function: If the master station must send data to a slave station (e.g. #1)
within a certain period, you can use the communication timeout function of #1 slave station
and set F10.03>T. The communication timeout fault will not be triggered during normal
communication. However, if the master station does not send data to #1 slave station within
the specified time T, and this lasts for more than the set value of F10.03, a communication
fault (E16) will be reported. Once informed of the “communication fault of #1 slave
station”, the staff can conduct troubleshooting.
★ The set value of F10.03 must be greater than the set time T, but must not be too
large, in order to avoid adverse effects arising from too long operation in the fault status.
★ F10.03 should be set to be invalid under normal circumstances. This parameter

will be set only in the continuous communication system to monitor the communication.
211
Default
setting
F10.04 Modbus response delay 1 - 20 ms 2 ●
The response delay (twait2) is defined as the time interval from the reception of the
valid data frame 1 by the inverter to data parsing and return. To ensure the stable operation
of the protocol chip, the response delay should be set within 1-20ms (it must not be set to 0).
If the communication data involves EEPROM operation, the actual response delay
time will be extended, i.e. “EEPROM operation time + F10.04”.
1: valid data frame: sent by the external master station to inverter, in which the function
code, data length and CRC are correct.
Fig. 7-30 shows the data sending segment (tsend), sending end segment (twait1),
75176-to-sending wait segment (twait2), data return segment (treturn), and 75176-to-receiving
wait segment (twait3).
t
twait 2 twait 3
tsend twait 1 treturn
Fig. 7-30 Parsing Diagram of Complete Data Frame Timing
Function Default
code setting
Options of master-slave
0: Invalid
F10.05 communication 0 ○
1: valid
function
0: slave
F10.06 Master-slave options 1: host (Modbus protocol 0 ○
broadcast transmission)
0: output frequency
1: set frequency
2: output torque
F10.07 Data sent by host 1 ○
3: set torque
4: PID setting
5: output current
212
Proportional factor of
F10.08 0.00-10.00 (multiple) 1.00 ●
slave reception
F10.09 Host sending interval 0.000-30.000 s 0.200 ●
The A90 series inverter supports the master-slave communication function. That is,
one inverter works as the host and others as slaves. The slaves work according to the
command sent by the host, so that these inverters can work synchronously.
 The inverter used as the host is set as follows:
F10.05=1: enable the master-slave communication function;
F10.06=1 or 2: select the current inverter as the host (only one inverter can be set
as the host in a network);
F10.07: select the variable to be synchronized, such as the output current (set
F10.07=5).
 The inverter is used as the slave is set as follows:
F10.05=1: enable the master-slave communication function;
F10.06=0: select the current inverter as the slave;
Select one setting as the communication setting. If F09.00=6 is set and the process
PID is set separately (F00.05=10, F00.06=1), the slave inverter will be set to the host
output current for PID adjustment.
You can set the receiving proportional coefficient (F10.08) to determine how the slave
inverter receives data. If F10.08=0.80 is set, the final application data is “Recv (received
data) * 0.80 (F10.08)”.
Functio Function code Default
n code name setting
0-10: default operation (for
Options of 485
commissioning)
F10.56 EEPROM 0 ○
11: writing not triggered
writing
(available after commissioning)
For the application “PLC controller/HMI + inverter”, you can set F10.56=11 after
debugging. Then all write data of PLC communication will not be stored, which can avoid
damage to the memory.
If you need parameter settings and power-down storage, set F10.56=0 first.
7.12 User-selected Parameter Group of F11 Group

The keyboard of the A90 series inverter supports the user-selected function. First, the
213
user should select specific function codes by setting the parameters of the F11 group. Then
the user-selected mode (--U--, as detailed in 4.2.2) can be enabled. The selected function
<
codes can be switched cyclically via the Up or Down key. This function is mainly
<
used where less than 32 specific function codes are involved, which can avoid the trouble
caused by too many function codes.
Function Function
code code name
User-selected
F11.00 U00.00 ●
parameter 1
User-selected
F11.01 U00.01 ●
parameter 2
User-selected
F11.02 U00.02 ●
parameter 3
User-selected
F11.03 U00.03 ●
parameter 4
User-selected
F11.04 U00.04 ●
parameter 5
User-selected
F11.05 U00.07 ●
parameter 6
User-selected The displayed content is
F11.06 U00.14 ●
parameter 7 Uxx.xx, which means that the
User-selected Fxx.xx function code is
F11.07 U00.15 ●
parameter 8 selected. If the F11.00
User-selected function code is enabled, the
F11.08 U00.16 ●
parameter 9 keyboard will display U00.00,
User-selected indicating the first optional
F11.09 U00.18 ●
parameter 10 parameter F00.00.
User-selected
F11.10 U00.19 ●
parameter 11
User-selected
F11.11 U00.29 ●
parameter 12
User-selected
F11.12 U02.00 ●
parameter 13
User-selected
F11.13 U02.01 ●
parameter 14
User-selected
F11.14 U02.02 ●
parameter 15
User-selected
F11.15 U03.00 ●
parameter 16
214
User-selected
F11.16 U03.02 ●
parameter 17
User-selected
F11.17 U03.21 ●
parameter 18
User-selected
F11.18 U04.00 ●
parameter 19
User-selected
F11.19 U04.20 ●
parameter 20
User-selected
F11.20 U05.00 ●
parameter 21
User-selected
F11.21 U05.03 ●
parameter 22
User-selected
F11.22 U05.04 ●
parameter 23
User-selected
F11.23 U08.00 ●
parameter 24
User-selected
F11.24 U19.00 ●
parameter 25
User-selected
F11.25 U19.01 ●
parameter 26
User-selected
F11.26 U19.02 ●
parameter 27
User-selected
F11.27 U19.03 ●
parameter 28
User-selected
F11.28 U19.04 ●
parameter 29
User-selected
F11.29 U19.05 ●
parameter 30
User-selected
F11.30 U19.06 ●
parameter 31
User-selected
F11.31 U19.12 ●
parameter 32
F11.00=U00.00, indicating that the first user-selected parameter is the function code
F00.00. The function codes in the user-selected mode of the keyboard are switched
according to the function code order from F11.00 to F11.31.
215
7.13 Keyboard and Display Function Parameter Group of F12 Group

code name setting
0: no function
1: forward jog
2: reverse jog
M.K 3: forward/reverse
F12.00 multi-function key switching 1 ○
options 4: quick stop
5: free stop
6: cursor movement to the
left
M.K is a multi-function key, of which the function can be performed by setting the
function code F12.00. If F12.00=0, this key has no effect when pressed. For other settings,
the corresponding effects will be obtained when this key is pressed.

code name setting
0: valid only in keyboard
Options of stop
control
F12.01 function of STOP 1 ○
1: with all command channels
key
valid
According to the setting of the function code F00.02 (command source option), the
command sources are divided into the keyboard, terminal and communication. If the
STOP
terminal is selected as the current command source, the Run RUN and Stop RESET key
on the keyboard will be unavailable. In more dangerous cases, however, the fastest way is
STOP
to stop the inverter via the Stop RESET key on the keyboard to resolve dangers. It is the
most convenient to use the keyboard to stop the inverter during normal operation. Therefore,
the function code “F12.01: stop function options of the STOP key” is added. In addition,
the STOP key is always valid by default.
★ It is recommended not to modify this parameter. If necessary, please set it
carefully.

code name setting
0: do not lock
F12.02 Parameter locking 1: reference input not locked 0 ●
2: all locked, except for this
216
function code
In order to avoid unnecessary danger caused by keyboard operation or misoperation of
non-workers, the keyboard has a parameter locking function. The current function code is
unlocked by default, and all function codes can be set. After the function code is debugged
according to the working conditions, the parameters can be locked.
 1: reference input not locked
In the lock mode, all function codes cannot be modified, expect this function code and
those with reference input properties. Specific function codes with parameter input
properties are shown in Table 7-17.
Table 7-17 List of Function Codes with Reference Input Properties
Function code Function code name Function code Function code name
Digital frequency Multi-segment speed
F00.07 F08.11
setting 12
Multi-segment speed
F08.00 Multi-segment speed 1 F08.12
13
Multi-segment speed
14
Multi-segment speed
15
F08.03 Multi-segment speed 4 F13.02 Digital torque setting
F08.04 Multi-segment speed 5 F09.01 Digital PID setting
Multi-segment PID
setting 1
Multi-segment PID
setting 2
Multi-segment PID
setting 3
1
Multi-segment speed Multi-segment torque
F08.09 F13.04
10 2
Multi-segment speed Multi-segment torque
F08.10 F13.05
11 3
 2: all locked, except for this function code

In the lock mode, all function codes cannot be set except this function code. This mode
is mostly used when it is not necessary to set parameters after debugging. We can only
217
perform running, stop and parameter monitoring in this mode.
We can press the ESC key ESC to enable the monitoring mode (see 0 Operation
Monitoring) and right shift key >> to switch the parameters in cycles. The function
codes F12.04 to F12.08 are used to select the parameters to be displayed in the cycle
display queue. The selected items basically correspond to the monitoring parameter group
of the F18 group, so you can directly view the current values of all parameters in the F18
group. This function is mainly conducive to parameter display, especially during operation.
By default, several common items are included in the cycle display queue, including
the output frequency (F18.00), set frequency (F18.01), output current (F18.06), output
voltage (F18.08) and DC bus voltage (F18.09). Please set the corresponding bit to 1 to
select other display parameters and 0 to hide the selected parameters.
★ Some bits of the function codes for display parameter selection are reserved.
Please set them carefully.
Function Default
code setting
Load speed display
F12.09 0.01~600.00 30.00 ●
coefficient
The inverter output is mostly displayed in the frequency form. To set the current load
speed (F18.13), you can change the current parameter from frequency output to speed
output based on the actual working conditions, so that F18.14 displays the current load
speed correctly.
If F12.09=30.00 (related to the number of motor pole pairs, transmission ratio and the
like), the output frequency (0.00 to 50.00 Hz) corresponds to the load speed (0 to 1,500
rpm).
Function Default
code setting
UP/DOWN
0.00: automatic rate
F12.10 acceleration and Hz/s 5.00 ○
0.01 - 500.00
deceleration rate
Options of 0: do not clear
F12.11 UP/DOWN offset 1: clear in non-running state 1 ○
clearing 2: clear when UP/DOWN
218
invalid
Options of
0: do not save
UP/DOWN
F12.12 1: save (valid after the 0 ○
power-down saving
offset is modified)
of offset
The UP/DOWN functions are mainly divided into the keyboard UP/DOWN and
terminal UP/DOWN, which are handled separately and can be enabled at the same time.
 Keyboard UP/DOWN: It is valid in the Level 0 monitoring menu. When the
current setting is not the digital potentiometer setting, the UP function can be
performed by forward spinning of the digital potentiometer via the keyboard and
the DOWN function by reverse spinning.
 During the forward or reverse spinning of the digital potentiometer under the
monitoring menu, the offset frequency will increase/decrease at the rate of
F12.10, the keyboard will display “F18.01: set frequency”, and the final
frequency will be the set frequency plus offset frequency. The keyboard will
have the normal display 2 s after the key is released.
 Terminal UP/DOWN: After the digital input port is set to the corresponding
function, terminal control will be enabled.
When the UP/DOWN terminal is valid, the offset frequency will increase/decrease at
the rate of F12.10 and the final frequency is the set frequency plus offset frequency.
The display content of the keyboard remains unchanged during this period.
★ When the keyboard UP and terminal DOWN are valid at the same time, or the
keyboard DOWN and terminal UP are valid at the same time, despite of the same
acceleration and deceleration rates, the offset frequency will fluctuate because of
different valid moments. This is a normal phenomenon.

Power meter 0: do not clear
F12.13 0 ●
resetting 1: clear
The A90 series inverter has a watt-hour meter function (see the description of the
function codes F18.18 and F18.19). The user can set the current function code to 1 to clear
the current count.
219
0: No operation
1: restoration of factory defaults
Restoration
(excluding the motor parameters,
F12.14 of default 0 ○
inverter parameters, manufacturer
setting
parameters, running and power-on
time record)
You can set this parameter to 1 to restore the default settings of all parameters, except
the motor parameters (F01 group), inverter parameters, manufacturer parameters, power-on
time (F12.15/16) and operating time (F12.17, 18).
★ This operation is irreversible. Please set it carefully.

code name setting
Cumulative
F12.15 0 - 65535 h 0 ×
power-on time h
Cumulative
F12.16 0 - 59 min 0 ×
power-on time min
F12.15 and F12.16 are used together to check the cumulative power-on time of the
inverter from delivery to the current moment (you only need to power on the inverter). The
cumulative power-on time is accurate to one minute and nearly 65,536 hours (about 7.5
years) at most.
If F12.15=50 and F12.16=33, it means that the current inverter has been powered on
for 2 days, 2 hours and 33 minutes.
★ This parameter can be viewed only and cannot be changed or cleared.

code name setting
Cumulative
F12.17 0 - 65535 h 0 ×
running time
Cumulative
F12.18 0 - 59 min 0 ×
running time (min)
F12.17 and F12.18 are used together to check the cumulative operating time of the
inverter from delivery to the current moment (the inverter should be in the running status).
220
The cumulative power-on time is accurate to one minute and nearly 65536 hours (about 7.5
years) at most.
If F12.17=47 and F12.18=39, it means that the current inverter has been running for 1
day, 23 hours and 39 minutes.
★ This parameter can be viewed only and cannot be changed or cleared.

code name
Rated power of Depending on
F12.19 0.40 - 650.00 kW ×
inverter the motor type
Rated voltage of Depending on
F12.20 60 - 690 V ×
Rated current of Depending on
F12.21 0.1 - 1500.0 A ×
It is used to view the rated power, rated voltage and rated current of the current
inverter.
★ This parameter is can be viewed only and cannot be changed.

code name setting
Performance
F12.22 XXX.XX XXX.XX ×
software S/N 1
Performance
F12.23 XX.XXX XX.XXX ×
software S/N2
Functional
software S/N 1
Functional
software S/N 2
Keyboard software
serial number 1
Keyboard software
serial number 2
It is used to view the software version of the current inverter.
★ This parameter is can be viewed only and cannot be changed.

F12.31 LCD language options 0: Chinese 0 ●
221
1: English
2: retention
LCD keyboard language options
Function Default
code setting
0: mode 0
F12.32 Monitoring mode options 1 ●
1: mode 1
Running status display
parameter 1 of Mode 1
F12.33 0.00 - 99.99 18.00 ●
(LED stop status display
parameter 5)
F12.34 0.00 - 99.99 18.01 ●
parameter 1)
F12.35 0.00 - 99.99 18.06 ●
parameter 2)
F12.36 0.00 - 99.99 18.08 ●
parameter 3)
F12.37 0.00 - 99.99 18.09 ●
parameter 4)
F12.32=0: monitoring mode 0. The LED switching display and LCD small-line
(7-line) display are dependent on the settings of the function codes F12.04 to F12.08. For
the selected function codes, please refer to their parameter description.
F12.32=1: monitoring mode 1. The LED switching display and LCD small-line
(7-line) display are dependent on the settings of the function codes F12.33 to F12.37. You
can select any function code. F12.33=18.00 means that the function code F18.00 is
displayed.
222
LCD large-line display parameter
F12.38 0.00 - 99.99 18.00 ●
1
F12.39 0.00 - 99.99 18.06 ●
2
F12.40 0.00 - 99.99 18.09 ●
3
Select the function code for LCD large line display. F12.38=18.00 means that the function
code F18.00 is displayed on the first line. When the LCD large line display is in the default
mode, three function codes (F18.00, F18.06 and F18.09) can be monitored on one screen.
★ The small and large line display switching of the LCD keyboard is shown below.
ENTER
ESC
For the operation of the LCD keyboard, please refer to its instructions.
Refer to Section 4 of Chapter 4 for monitoring mode selection.
Function Default
code setting
Options of
0: prohibit zero crossing
F12.41 UP/DOWN zero 0 ○
1: allow zero crossing
crossing
The UP/DOWN function is valid. When F12.41=0, the UP/DOWN function can
reduce the output frequency of the inverter to 0 without reversing. When F12.41=1, the
UP/DOWN function can reduce the output frequency of the inverter to 0, followed by
reverse running of the motor.
For the digital potentiometer setting, see the setting of the main frequency source A.
7.14 Torque Control Parameter Group of F13 Group

Function Default
code setting
223
Speed/torque control 0: Speed control
F13.00 0 ○
options 1: Torque control
F13.00=0: speed control
The control mode is speed input, and the input is frequency.
F13.00=1: torque control
The input control mode is torque input, and the input is the percentage of the rated
torque current of the motor. This is valid only in the mode of speed sensorless vector
control (SVC), i.e. F00.01=1.
The final control mode is also related to the function terminals “29: torque control
prohibition” and “28: speed control/torque control switching” as detailed below.
Table 7-18 Details of Final Control Mode of Inverter
29: torque control 28: speed control/torque
F13.00 Final control
prohibition control switching
Speed
Valid * *
control
Torque
0
control
Valid
Speed
1
control
Invalid
Speed
0
control
Invalid
Torque
1
control

code name setting
0: digital torque setting F13.02
1: AI1
2: AI2
Options of
F13.01 torque setting 0 ○
(Full range of the items 1-6,
source
corresponding to F13.02 digital
torque setting)
7: retention
Digital torque -200.0 to 200.0 (100.0 = the
F13.02 % 100.0 ●
setting rated torque of motor)
F13.01=0: digital torque setting F13.02
The torque depends on F13.02.
224
F13.01=1:AI1
F13.01=2:AI2
The torque is dependent on AI (percentage) * F13.02.
as the slave (F10.06=0), the specific setting percentage is “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional coefficient)”, and
the 700FH data range is -100.00% to 100.00%, as detailed in Table 0-2.
For the general communication (F10.05=0), the specific setting percentage is “7003H
(torque communication setting) * F13.02 (digital torque setting)”, and the 7003H data
code name setting
Multi-segment
F13.03 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
torque 1
Multi-segment
F13.04 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
torque 2
Multi-segment
F13.05 -200.0 - 200.0 % 0.0 ●
torque 3
For diversified torque applications, the A90 series inverter supports the multi-segment
torque function. Specifically, the input terminal functions “17: multi-segment torque
terminal 1” and “18: multi-segment torque terminal 2” need to be set. See the instruction
Table 7-19 for details.
Table 7-19 Combination of Multi-segment Torque Command and Multi-segment Torque
Terminal
18: multi-segment 17: multi-segment torque Number of Torque setting
torque terminal 2 terminal 1 Segments
Invalid Invalid Multi-segment Depending on the
torque 1 F13.01 setting
Invalid Valid Multi-segment F13.03
torque 2
Valid Invalid Multi-segment F13.04
torque 3
225
Valid Valid Multi-segment F13.05
torque 4
Function Default
code setting
Torque control
F13.06 acceleration and 0.00 - 120.00 s 0.05 ●
deceleration time
The motor speed can be changed gently by setting the acceleration and deceleration
time of torque control.
F13.06 represents the time for the torque current to rise from 0 to the rated torque
current or fall from the rated current to 0.
Function Default
code setting
0: set by F13.09
1: AI1
Upper frequency limit 2: AI2
F13.08 options of torque 6: communication 0 ○
control percentage setting
7: direct communication
setting
Upper frequency limit 0.00 to maximum
F13.09 Hz 50.00 ●
of torque control frequency F00.16
Upper frequency limit 0.00 to maximum
F13.10 Hz 0.00 ●
offset frequency F00.16
Reverse speed limit
F13.18 0 - 100 % 100 ●
options
Speed priority enabling 0: Disable
F13.19 1 ●
of torque control 1: Enable
F13.08=0: depending on F13.09
The upper frequency limit depends on F13.09 during torque control.
F13.08=1:AI1
F13.08=2:AI2
The upper frequency limit in torque control is AI (percentage) * F13.09.
meaning. 100.00% is the percentage to the set value of F13.09 (upper frequency limit of
226
torque control).
F13.08=6 or 7: communication setting
as the slave (F10.06=0), the upper frequency limit is “700FH (master-slave
communication setting) * F10.08 (slave receiving proportional coefficient) *
F00.18 (upper frequency limit)”, and the 700FH data range is -100.00% to
100.00%, as detailed in Table 0-2.
a. F13.08=6: the upper frequency limit is “700BH (communication percentage

setting of the upper frequency limit of torque control) * F13.09 (upper frequency
limit of torque control)”;
b. F13.08=7: the upper frequency limit is “7018H (communication setting of the

upper frequency limit of torque control)”.
The 700BH data range is 0.00% to 200.00%, and the 7018H data range is 0.00 to
F00.16 (maximum frequency), as detailed in Table 0-2.
The upper frequency limit of torque control is used to set the maximum forward
or reverse running frequency of the inverter in the torque control mode.
In the torque control mode, if the load torque is less than the output torque of the
motor, the motor speed will rise continuously, and the maximum speed of the motor
must be limited during torque control to prevent the mechanical system from galloping
and other accidents; if the load exceeds the output torque of the motor and even the
motor is drive to run reversely, the maximum operating load frequency of the motor is
still restricted in the case of F13.19=1 and not restricted in the case of F13.19=0.
The upper frequency limit of reverse running is dependent on F13.09 * F13.18.
Example: The torque is set to be positive and the upper frequency limit of torque
control is the AI1 analog input. When the AI1 analog input is positive, the upper frequency
limit corresponding to the forward speed limit is AI1 (percentage) * F13.09 and that
corresponding to the reverse speed limit is AI1 (percentage) * F13.09 * F13.18; and when
the AI1 analog input is negative, the upper frequency limit corresponding to the forward
227
speed limit is AI1 (percentage) * F13.09 * F13.18 and that corresponding to the reverse
speed limit is AI1 (percentage) * F13.09.
Maximum operating frequency in torque control = upper frequency limit of torque
control + offset of upper frequency limit (valid only when F13.08=1 to 5), but the
maximum operating frequency is limited by the maximum frequency of F00.16.
Function Default
code setting
Static friction torque
F13.11 0.0-100.0 % 0.0 ●
compensation
Frequency range of static
F13.12 0.00 - 50.00 Hz 1.00 ●
friction compensation
Dynamic friction torque
F13.13 0.0-100.0 % 0.0 ●
compensation
When the motor drives an object to move, it is necessary to overcome static/dynamic
friction. You can set this group of parameters to enable the motor rotation at the specified
torque while overcoming the inherent static/dynamic friction. The motor is mainly subject
to static friction before rotation and dynamic friction after starting rotating. In short, the
output performance of the motor is related to this group of parameters.
The specific description of this group of parameters is as follows: “when the actual
frequency (estimate frequency in SVC) is less than or equal to the set value of F13.12, the
output torque is the „set torque + F13.11 static friction torque compensation‟; and when the
actual frequency is greater than the set value of F13.12, the output torque is „set torque +
F13.13 dynamic friction torque compensation‟”. The larger the compensation value, the
stronger the compensation force will be. The compensation percentage is equal to the
torque setting percentage.
7.15 Parameter Group of Motor 2 of F14 group

The two motors of the A90 series inverter can be switched. For the two motors, the
motor nameplate parameters, encoder parameters and VF control or vector control
parameters can be set separately, and the VF control or vector control can be selected
independently. In addition, the parameters of the two motors can be tuned separately.
All motor parameters in the second group are included in the F14 group, and the
function codes are defined the same as those in the first group. The function codes F14.00
228
to F14.34 correspond to F01.00 to F01.34, which are motor nameplate parameters, motor
parameters and encoder parameters; the function code F14.35 corresponds to F00.01, which
is used to select the motor drive mode; the function codes F14.36 to F14.76 correspond to
F06.00 to F06.40, which are vector control parameters; and the function code F14.77 is
used to select the acceleration/deceleration time of the motor 2. Only the parameters of
F14.72 are described below. For the rest of the parameters, refer to the relevant parameters
of the motor 1.
Function Default
code setting
0: the same as motor 1
1: acceleration and
deceleration time 1
Acceleration/decelerati 2: acceleration and
F14.77 on time options of deceleration time 2 0 ○
motor 2 3: acceleration and
deceleration time 3
4: acceleration and
deceleration time 4
F14.77=0: the acceleration/deceleration time of the motor 2 is the same as that of the
motor 1. For details, see the description of the function codes F15.03 to F15.09;
F14.77=1/2/3/4: the acceleration/deceleration time of the motor 2 is fixed as the
acceleration/deceleration time 1/2/3/4, corresponding to the function codes F00.14,
F00.15/F15.03, F15.04/F15.05, F15.06/F15.07 and F15.08, respectively.
7.16 Auxiliary Function Parameter Group of F15 Group

code name setting
0.00 to maximum
F15.00 Jog frequency Hz 5.00 ●
frequency F00.16
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
Jog acceleration
F15.01 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1) s 5.00 ●
time
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
Jog deceleration 0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
F15.02 s 5.00 ●
time 0.0 - 6500.0 (F15.13=1)
229
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
As shown in Fig. 7-31, when the jog running command (FJOG/RJOG) is valid, the
inverter will start running at the set frequency of F15.00; and when the jog running
command is invalid, the inverter will be stopped according to the stop mode.
F15.01 and F15.02 are set as the acceleration and deceleration time during operation.
Their values (e.g. 500) depend on the acceleration and deceleration time unit (F15.13), and
have different meanings and ranges. For example, F15.13=0 means that the acceleration
and deceleration time is 5.00s, and F15.13=1 means that the acceleration and deceleration
time is 50.0s.
Output
frequency
Fundamental
frequency of
acceleration and
deceleration time Invalid jog running
F15.09
Jog frequency
F15.00
Valid jog running
0 Actual Actual deceleration time

acceleration time Time t
Jog acceleration Jog deceleration
time time
F15.01 F15.02
Fig. 7-31 Schematic Diagram of Jog Running

★: The separate set frequency and acceleration/deceleration time are applied in jog
running, and not shared in normal running, but with the same physical meanings.
The triggering conditions of the jog running command vary depending on the control
mode and valid conditions, as detailed in Table 7-20.
Table 7-20 Details of Jog Running Command
Command Source
Jog running command
Option (F00.02)
Set the M.K multi-function key option (F12.00) to “1: forward
jog” or “2: reverse jog”. Press the M.K key to enable the jog
0: keyboard control
running command and release this key to disable the jog running
command.
230
★: Unplug the keyboard during JOG running to stop the inverter.
Select the digital input terminal function “4: forward jog (FJOG)”
or “5: reverse jog (RJOG)”. By default, if the function terminal is
1: Terminal control
valid, the jog running command will be valid; and if the function
terminal is invalid, the jog running command will be invalid.
If the host writes “0003H: JOG forward” or “0004: JOG reverse”
2: Communication to the register 7000H through the MODBUS protocol, the jog
control running command will be valid; if it writes “0007H: free stop”, the
jog running command will be invalid.
Function Default
code setting
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
0.00 - 650.00 (F15.13=0)
0 - 65000 (F15.13=2)
Fundamental
frequency of
F15.09 F00.16 0 ○
acceleration and
1: 50.00Hz
deceleration time
The system has four groups (F00.14 and F00.15 in the first group) of acceleration and
deceleration time options to meet different needs for normal operation. After completing the
setting, the user can switch them via the combination of digital input functions “19:
acceleration and deceleration time terminal 1” and “20: acceleration and deceleration time
terminal 2”. For details, please see “Table 7-4 Function List of Multi-function Digital Input
231
Terminals”.
Output
frequency
Fundamental
frequency of
acceleration and
deceleration time
F15.09
Set frequency
0 Actual Actual deceleration time

acceleration time Time t
Set acceleration Set deceleration

time time
Fig. 7-32 Schematic Diagram of Acceleration and Deceleration Time

As shown in Fig. 7-32, the acceleration time is defined as the time of acceleration from
0.00 Hz to the reference frequency of acceleration/deceleration time; and the deceleration
time is defined as the time of deceleration from the reference frequency of
acceleration/deceleration time to 0.00 Hz. The actual acceleration/deceleration time varies
according to the ratio between the set frequency and reference frequency.
The reference frequency of acceleration/deceleration time is set by function code
F15.09 that represents the reference frequency of acceleration/deceleration time. If
F15.09=0, the reference frequency depends on the function code F00.16 (maximum
frequency). Assuming F00.16=100.00Hz, the acceleration (deceleration) time is expressed
as the time for the output frequency to increase (decrease) from 0.00Hz (100.00Hz) to
100.00Hz (0.00Hz).
Functio Parameter Default

n code description setting
Automatic switching of
0: Invalid
F15.10 acceleration and deceleration 0 ○
1: valid
time
Switching frequency of 0.00 to maximum
F15.11 Hz 0.00 ●
acceleration time 1 and 2 frequency F00.16
Switching frequency of 0.00 to maximum
F15.12 Hz 0.00 ●
deceleration time 1 and 2 frequency F00.16
232
If the motor 1 is running at the normal (e.g. non-PLC/PID) speed (e.g. non-torque) and
the acceleration/deceleration time terminals (19: acceleration and deceleration time terminal
1; 20: acceleration and deceleration time terminal 2) are invalid, the
acceleration/deceleration time 1 and acceleration/deceleration time 2 can be switched by
setting F15.10 to 1, as detailed in Fig. 7-33.
Fig. 7-33 Schematic Diagram of Automatic Switching of Acceleration and Deceleration

Time
During acceleration, if the output frequency is less than the switching frequency of the
acceleration time 1 and 2 (F15.11), the acceleration time 1 will be the current valid
acceleration time; otherwise, the acceleration time 2 will be the current valid acceleration
time.
During deceleration, if the output frequency is less than the switching frequency of the
deceleration time 1 and 2 (F15.12), the deceleration time 1 will be the current valid
deceleration time; otherwise, the deceleration time 2 will be the current valid deceleration
time.

0:0.01s
Acceleration and deceleration
F15.13 1:0.1s 0 ○
time unit
2:1s
Under different working conditions, the acceleration and deceleration time
requirements may vary greatly. The system provides three acceleration and deceleration
time units, depending on the function code F15.13. F15.13=1 means that the
233
acceleration/deceleration time unit is “0.1s”. Except for that in torque control (F13.06), all
the acceleration and deceleration time will change. For example, the value of F00.14 will
change from 15.00s to 150.0s by default.
Function Default
code setting
Frequency hopping
F15.14 0.00-600.00 Hz 600.00 ●
point 1
Frequency hopping
F15.16 0.00-600.00 Hz 600.00 ●
point 2
Frequency hopping
F15.18 0.00-600.00 Hz 600.00 ●
point 3
The frequency hopping function (FH function for short) can prevent the output
frequency of the inverter from the mechanical resonance frequency point of the mechanical
load. If the inverter is prohibited from running at a constant speed within the frequency
hopping range, hopping will not occur during acceleration. Instead, the inverter will run
smoothly.
Set frequency
Frequency Hopping range 3

hopping point 3
Hopping range 2
Frequency
hopping point 2
Frequency Hopping range 1
hopping point 1
Time
Fig. 7-34 Schematic Diagram of Frequency Hopping

As shown in Fig. 7-34, the frequency hopping function is set in the form of “frequency
234
hopping point + hopping range”. The specific frequency hopping range is (frequency
hopping point - hopping range, frequency hopping point + hopping range). At most three
frequency hopping areas can be set. When the respective hopping range is 0, the
corresponding frequency hopping function will be invalid.
When the frequency hopping function is valid and the set frequency rises within the
regulation range, the final set frequency is “frequency hopping point - hopping range”; and
when the frequency hopping function drops, the final set frequency is “frequency hopping
point + hopping range”.
Multiple frequency hopping areas can be superimposed, as shown in the frequency
hopping areas 1 and 2 in Fig. 7. The final frequency hopping range is (frequency hopping
point 1 - hopping range 1, frequency hopping point 2 + hopping range 2).

Detection width of output
F15.20 0.00 - 50.00 Hz 2.50 ○
frequency arrival (FAR)
Output frequency
Set frequency +
width
Set frequency
Set frequency -
width
0
Time
Output terminal
Valid
Invalid Valid Invalid Invalid
0 Time
Fig. 7-35 Schematic Diagram of FAR Detection

As shown in Fig. 7-35, when the multi-function output terminal or relay output is set
to “2: up to output frequency (FAR)”, and the absolute value of the difference between the
|output frequency| and |given frequency| is less than or equal to the set value of FAR
detection width (F15.20) during inverter operation, the corresponding function terminal will
output the active level. Otherwise, this terminal will output the inactive level.
235
Function Default
code setting
F15.21 Hz 30.00 ○
F15.23 Hz 20.00 ○
Output
frequency (Hz)
Output
frequency
detection 1 Hysteresis 1
Hysteresis 2
Output (negative)
frequency
detection 2
Output
terminal 1
Invalid
Valid
Output
terminal 2
Invalid Valid
Fig. 7-36 Schematic Diagram of FDT Detection

As shown in Fig. 7-36, when the multi-function output terminal or relay output is set
to “3: output frequency detection FDT1” or “4: output frequency detection FDT2” and the
inverter is running:
1. If the hysteresis is positive and the |output frequency| is greater than the result of “output
frequency detection FDT1/2” (F15.21/F15.23), the corresponding function terminal will
output the active level; if the |output frequency| drops to less than the result of “output
frequency detection FDT1/2 (F15.21/F15.23) - FDT1/2 hysteresis (F15.22/F15.24)”, the
corresponding function terminal will output the inactive level; and if the |output frequency|
is within the range of (output frequency detection - hysteresis, output frequency detection),
the output level of the corresponding function terminal will remain unchanged.
236
2. If the hysteresis is negative and the |output frequency| is greater than the result of “output
frequency detection FDT1/2” (F15.21/F15.23), the corresponding function terminal will
output the active level; if the |output frequency| drops to less than the result of “output
frequency detection FDT1/2 (F15.21/F15.23) - FDT1/2 hysteresis (F15.22/F15.24)”, the
corresponding function terminal will output the inactive level; and if the |output frequency|
is within the range of (output frequency detection, output frequency detection - hysteresis,),
the output level of the corresponding function terminal will remain unchanged.
Function Default
code setting
Options of analog level 0:AI1
F15.25 0 ○
detection ADT 1: AI2
Analog level detection
F15.26 0.00-100.00 % 20.00 ●
ADT1
0.00 to F15.26 (valid
down in one direction)
Analog level detection
F15.28 0.00-100.00 % 50.00 ●
ADT2
0.00 to F15.28 (valid
down in one direction)
The analog level detection function is used to detect and monitor the analog input of
the current selected F15.25 channel, and also perform internal operation and external alarm
monitoring. Two detection conditions can be set, but only one analog input channel can be
detected.
237
Analog
AI%
Detection
level Hysteresis
0
Time (s)
Output
terminal
Invalid Valid Invalid
0 Time (s)
Fig. 7-37 Schematic Diagram of ADT Detection

As shown in Fig. 7-37, a valid starting point has been set for the detection level. When
the percentage of analog input is above the detection level after offset processing, the ADT
function will be valid. The conditions for invalid ADT function are dependent on the
one-way downward hysteresis. When the conversion result of analog input decreases to less
than the result of “detection level - hysteresis”, the ADT function will be invalid.
code name
Options of energy
0: Invalid
F15.30 consumption 0 ○
1: valid
braking function
Energy
110.0-140.0 (380V,
F15.31 consumption % 125.0(671V) ○
100.0 = 537V)
braking voltage
20-100 (100 means that
F15.32 Braking rate % 100 ●
duty ratio is 1)
Energy consumption braking is a braking method for quick deceleration by converting
the energy generated in deceleration into the thermal energy of the braking resistor. It is
suitable for braking under large-inertia loads or stop by rapid braking. In this case, it is
necessary to select the appropriate braking resistor and braking unit, as detailed in “0
Braking Resistor” and “0 Braking Unit”.
238
Bus voltage
Energy consumption
braking voltage
F15.30
0
Energy Time t
consumption
braking
No braking Braking No braking
0
Time t
Fig. 7-38 Schematic Diagram of Energy Consumption Braking

In the case of valid energy consumption braking (F15.30=1), as shown in Fig. 7-38,
when the bus voltage is greater than the energy consumption braking voltage (F15.31),
energy consumption braking will be started; and when the bus voltage decreases to less
than the aforesaid value, energy consumption braking will be disabled.
The IGBT in the braking unit is engaged during energy consumption braking. Energy
can be quickly released by the braking resistor. The braking utilization rate (F15.32) is the
duty cycle of IGBT running. The greater the duty cycle, the larger the degree of braking is.
Function Default
code setting
Operating mode with set 0: running at the lower
F15.33 frequency less than lower frequency limit 0 ○
frequency limit 1: Shutdown
When the set frequency of the inverter is lower than the lower frequency limit
(F00.19), the running status depends on the function code F15.33.
Function Function
code code name
0: running after power-on
F15.34 Fan control 1 ○
2: intelligent operation,
subject to temperature control
In order to use the fan reasonably, the fan system has three running modes, depending
239
on the fan control function code (F15.34). The specific running mode of the fan is shown in
Table 7-21.
Table 7-21 Details of Fan Operation
Fan control Fan operation
0: running after
When the inverter is powered on, the fan will start running.
power-on
When the inverter starts running, the fan will start running. When
this parameter is set to 1 min, the fan will stop running.
When the temperature of the inverter is greater than 45°C, the fan
2: intelligent operation, will start running; when the temperature of the inverter is less
subject to temperature than 40°C, the fan will stop running; and when the temperature of
control the inverter is in between the two values, the fan will remain
unchanged.
★ When “2: intelligent operation, subject to temperature control” is selected, make
sure that the temperature detection module of the inverter works properly.
Parameter Default
Function code Function code name Unit Attribute
description setting
F15.35 Overmodulation intensity 1.00 - 1.10 1.05 ●
When the input voltage of the inverter is lower than the output voltage, you can
increase the overmodulation intensity to improve the bus voltage utilization and thus
increase the upper limit of output voltage. When F15.35=1.10, the upper limit of output
voltage can be increased by 10%, thus reducing the output current under heavy loads, but
the current harmonics will increase.
Function code Function code name Parameter description Unit Default setting Attribute
0: Invalid
F15.39 Terminal jog priority 0 ○
1: valid
In the terminal control mode (F00.02=1), this function code is used to set the highest
priority of the jog command. If the terminal jog priority is valid (F15.39=1), the running
status can be switched to jog running in the presence of a valid jog terminal; and if the
terminal jog priority is invalid (F15.39=0), the running status cannot be directly switched to
jog running.
240
Parameter Default
Function code Function code name Unit Attribute
description setting
0.00 - 650.00
(F15.13=0)
0.0 - 6500.0
F15.40 Deceleration time for quick stop s 1.00 ●
(F15.13=1)
0 - 65000
(F15.13=2)
Set the acceleration and deceleration time during rapid stop.
7.17 Virtual I/O Function Parameter Group of F17 Group

The standard A90 series inverter is equipped with eight virtual multi-function input
terminals (VX1 to VX8), of which the functions and usages are basically the same as those
of the actual input terminals. Differences are described below. For their similarities, refer to
the parameter description of the digital input terminal function options of the F02 group.
Function Default
code setting
VX1 virtual input
F17.00 0 ○
function options
VX2 virtual input
F17.01 0 ○
function options
VX3 virtual input
F17.02 0 ○
function options
The same as the digital input
VX4 virtual input
F17.03 terminal function options of the 0 ○
function options
F02 group. See the function list of
VX5 virtual input
F17.04 the digital multi-function input 0 ○
function options
terminal in Table 7-2.
VX6 virtual input
F17.05 0 ○
function options
VX7 virtual input
F17.06 0 ○
function options
VX8 virtual input
F17.07 0 ○
function options
* * D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX VX VX VX VX VX VX VX
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Virtual input 000
F17.08 0: positive logic, valid in the ○
positive/negative logic 00000
state
241
F17.12 VX1 invalid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
The terminals VX1 to VX8 essentially have the same function, but there are no
corresponding physical terminals actually. They all have the positive and negative logic
functions. The terminals VX1 to VX4 have the delay function, and their statuses can be
confirmed in the same way. They can be set separately. The terminal VX1 is taken as an
example below.

code name setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX1-VX8 VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1
000
F17.09 status setting 0: the VXn status is the same as VYn ○
00000
options output status
1: status set by F17.10
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
VX1-VX8 VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1 000
F17.10 ●
status setting 0: Invalid 00000
1: valid
 When F17.09=xxxxxxx0, the VX1 status is the same as the VY1 output status.
As stated literally, the status of the virtual input terminal is the same as that of the
virtual output terminal, so this should be used in conjunction with the virtual output
terminal.
If F17.19=16 (reach the length) and F17.28=xxxx xxx1 (the VY1 status depends
on the output function status) under the default conditions, and “16: reach the length”
is valid, the VY1 output and VX1 synchronization will be valid. The corresponding
operations (length count clearing and VY1 output status resetting) can be performed
according to the VX1 setting (assuming “39: length clearing”). Then the fixed length
count function can be enabled again to meet the requirements for repeated processing.
If there are certain intervals between repeated processing procedures, you can also
242
complete the aforesaid operations by setting the VX1 delay.

 When F17.09=xxxxxxx1, the VX1 status depends on the bit 0 of the function
code F17.10.
The status of the virtual input terminal is directly dependent on the function code.
This is mainly used for remote control by the host. The remote control terminal can
be used to enable and disable the input terminal status directly with the function code
0x41 by changing the value of F17.10 through communication.
The standard A90 series inverter is equipped with eight virtual multi-function output
terminals (VY1 to VY8), and their functions and usages are essentially the same as those of
the actual output terminals. Differences are described below. For their similarities, refer to
the parameter description of the digital output terminal function options of the F03 group.
Function Default
code setting
VY1 virtual output
F17.19 0 ○
function options
VY2 virtual output
F17.20 0 ○
function options
VY3 virtual output
F17.21 0 ○
function options The same as the digital output
VY4 virtual output terminal function options of the
F17.22 0 ○
function options F03 group, as detailed in Table
VY5 virtual output 7-6 Function List of
F17.23 0 ○
function options Multi-function Digital Output
VY6 virtual output Terminals
F17.24 0 ○
function options
VY7 virtual output
F17.25 0 ○
function options
VY8 virtual output
F17.26 0 ○
function options
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Virtual output 0: positive logic, valid in the 000

F17.27 closed state/invalid in the open ○
positive/negative logic 00000
state
F17.30 VY1 invalid delay time 0.000-30.000 s 0.000 ●
243
The terminals VY1 to VY8 essentially have the same function, but there are no
corresponding physical terminals actually. They all have the positive and negative logic
functions. The terminals VY1 to VY4 have the delay function, and their statuses can be
confirmed in the same way. They can be set separately. The terminal VY1 is taken as an
example below.

code name setting
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Control options of
0: depending on the statuses of the 111
F17.28 virtual output ○
terminals X1 to X5 (no VY8) 11111
terminal
1: depending on the output function
status
 F17.28=xxxxxxx0: the VY1 status is the same as the actual input status of X1.
The status of the virtual output terminal VY1 is synchronized with that of the actual
input terminal X1. This can be applied in programming of multiple functions such as
status confirmation or enabling of one switch.
 F17.28=xxxxxxx1: the VY1 status depends on the selected function status of the
The status of the virtual output terminal depends on the set function status, and its
main output is for software programming. The PID can be controlled via “reaching the
upper limit of PID feedback” as follows: outputting the signal “19: reach the upper
limit of PID feedback” through the virtual output terminal VY1 (F17.19=19),
collecting it through the virtual input terminal VX1 and then setting the VX1 function
to “41: process PID pause” (F17.00=41).
Note: The D7 bit of the VY8 option must be set to 1. That is, the VY8 function is always
dependent on the output function status.
Function Function code Default Attri
code name setting bute
F17.37 Virtual input VX8 VX7 VX6 VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1 000 ×
244
terminal status 0: Invalid 00000
1: valid
Virtual output 000
terminal status 00000
1: valid
The real-time status of the current virtual terminal is displayed.
7.18 Monitoring Parameter Group of F18 Group

This group of parameters is used only to view the current status of the inverter and
cannot be changed.
code name
Display the current output frequency of the inverter.
Scope: 0.00 to upper frequency limit.
F18.00 Output frequency Hz
★: This parameter will be updated promptly in the speed
control mode.
Display the current set frequency of the inverter. Scope:
0.00 to maximum frequency F00.16.
F18.01 Set frequency Hz
★: This parameter will be updated promptly in the speed
control mode.
F18.02 Reserved
Display the estimated feedback frequency in the SVC
Estimate
control mode. Scope: 0.00 to upper frequency limit.
F18.03 feedback Hz
★: This parameter will be updated promptly in the SVC
frequency
control mode.
Display the current output torque of the inverter. Scope:
F18.04 Output torque %
-200.0 - 200.0.
Display the current set torque of the inverter. Scope:
-200.0 - 200.0.
F18.05 Torque setting %
★: This parameter will be updated promptly in the torque
control mode.
Display the current output current of the inverter.
Depending on the rated power level of the motor, the
F18.06 Output current range is as follows: A
0.00 to 650.00 (rated power of motor: ≤ 75 kW)
0.0 to 6500.0 (rated power of motor: > 75 kW)
Display the current output current as a percentage
Output current
F18.07 (relative to the rated current of the inverter). Range: 0.0 %
percentage
to 300.0.
Display the current output voltage of the inverter. Scope:
F18.08 Output voltage V
0.0 - 690.0.
245
F18.09 DC bus voltage Display the current bus voltage. Scope: 0 - 1200. V
When the auxiliary frequency source B is involved in
setting (F00.06 ≠ 0), the setting mode is “11: simple
PLC” (F00.05=11) and the simple PLC runs in the mode
Simple PLC of limited cycles (F08.15=1/2), the real-time number of
F18.10
running times cycles will be displayed. “0” indicates that the first
operation is being performed, and “1” indicates that the
first operation has been completed and the second
operation is being carried out. Scope: 0 - F08.16.
setting (F00.06 ≠ 0), and the setting mode is “11: simple
Simple PLC PLC” (F00.05=11), the real-time PLC running status will
F18.11
operation stage be displayed. Scope: 1-15, corresponding to the
multi-segment speed 1 (F08.00) to multi-segment speed
15 (F08.14).
setting (F00.06 ≠ 0) and the setting mode is “11: simple
PLC running time s
PLC” (F00.05=11), the PLC running time at the current
F18.12 at the current /
stage will be displayed in a real-time manner. Scope: 0.0
stage min
to the set time of the corresponding segment (example:
the time of the first segment is dependent on F08.20).
F18.13 Reserved
Display the current load speed. For the correct display,
F18.14 Load rate please set the load speed display factor (F12.09). Scope: rpm
0 - 65535.
UP/DOWN offset Display the UP/DOWN offset frequency. See the
F18.15 HHz
frequency UP/DOWN function description of F12.10 to F12.12.
Display the current PID setting, except for the current
F18.16 PID setting
setting percentage (F09.03).
Display the current PID feedback, except for the current
F18.17 PID feedback
feedback percentage (F09.03).
Display the cumulative input (output + fan) power
Power meter: consumption in MWh (thousand KWh). The current MW
F18.18
MWh power consumption can be obtained in conjunction with h
F18.19.
Display the cumulative input (output + fan) power
Watt-hour meter: kW
F18.19 consumption in kWh (kilowatt-hour). The current power
kWh h
consumption can be obtained in conjunction with F18.18.
Display the current output power of the inverter. Scope:
F18.20 Output power kW
0.00 - 650.00.
Output power Display the current output power factor of the inverter.
F18.21
factor Scope: -1.00 - 1.00.
F18.22 Digital input Display the current valid status of the input terminals X1
246
terminal status 1 to X5. The five-bit digit tubes from left to right are:
X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
The actual display effect is: 00000.
★ : “0” means that the current terminal function is
invalid; and “1” means that the current terminal function
is valid.
Display the current valid status of the input terminals AI1
and AI2. The five-bit digit tubes from left to right are:
* AI2 AI1 * *
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
Digital input
F18.23 The actual display effect is: 0000.
terminal status 2
★: The analog input terminals AI1 and AI2 of the A90
series inverter can be used for digital input only.
“0” means that the current terminal function is invalid;
and “1” means that the current terminal function is valid.
* * * * *
Digital input 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
F18.24
terminal status 3 The actual display effect is: 00000.
“0” means that the current terminal function is invalid;
and “1” means that the current terminal function is valid.
Display the current valid status of the output terminals
R1/Y1. The five-bit digital tubes from left to right are:
* * R1 * Y1
Output terminal
F18.25 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
state
The actual display effect is: 000.
“0” means that the current function terminal is invalid;
and “1” means that the current function terminal is valid.
Display the per-unit value of the current analog input
F18.26 AI1 %
channel 1 (AI1) relative to 100.0%. Scope: 0.0 - 100.0.
Display the per-unit value of the current analog input
F18.27 AI2 %
channel 2 (AI2) relative to 100.0%. Scope: 0.0 - 100.0.
F18.33 Count value
F18.34 Actual length m
Display the remaining time of regular running. For
Remaining time
F18.35 specific function. see the description of the F16.05 min
of regular running
regular running function. Scope: 0.0 - F16.05.
VF separation Display the VF separation target voltage in a real-time
F18.39 V
target voltage manner. Scope: 0.0 to rated voltage of the motor
Display the actual output voltage of VF separation in a
VF separation
F18.40 real-time manner. Scope: 0.0 to rated voltage of the V
output voltage
motor
247
F18.41
~ Reserved
F18.50
F18.51 PID output -300.0 to 300.0 %
F18.51 PID output -100.0 - 100.0 %
F18.60 Inverter -40 to 200 °C
temperature
Cumulative
F18.67 energy saving 0 - 65535 MW
MWH h
Cumulative
F18.68 energy saving 0.0 - 999.9 kW
KWH h
High cumulative
F18.69 cost saving 0 - 65535
(*1000)
F18.70 Low cumulative 0.0 - 999.9
cost saving
Power-frequency
power MW
F18.71 consumption 0 - 65535 h
MWH
Power-frequency
power kW
F18.72 consumption 0.0 - 999.9 h
KWH
7.19 Fault Record Parameter Group of F19 Group

This group of parameters is used only to view the types of last three faults of the
inverter and the inverter status at the time of failure. They cannot be changed.
 The function codes related to the last fault are as follows.
code name setting
Display the type of the last fault,
F19.00 Last fault category as detailed in Table 7-22 List of 0 ×
Fault Types.
Output frequency Display the output frequency in
F19.01 Hz 0.00 ×
in failure the last fault.
Output current in Display the output current in the
F19.02 A 0.00/0.0 ×
failure last fault.
Bus voltage in Display the bus voltage in the
F19.03 V 0 ×
failure last fault.
Running status in Display the running status in the
F19.04 0 ×
failure last fault, as detailed in Table
248
7-23 List of Running Statuses in
Faults.
Working time in Display the working time in the
F19.05 h 0 ×
failure last fault.
 The function codes related to the previous fault are as follows:

code name setting
Display the type of the
Previous fault
F19.06 previous fault, as detailed in 0 ×
category
Table 7-22 List of Fault Types.
Output frequency Display the output frequency
F19.07 Hz 0.00 ×
in failure in the previous fault.
Output current in Display the output current in
F19.08 A 0.00/0.0 ×
failure the previous fault.
F19.09 V 0 ×
failure previous fault.
Display the running status in
Running status in the previous fault, as detailed
F19.10 0 ×
failure in Table 7-23 List of Running
Statuses in Faults.
Working time in Display the working time in
F19.11 h 0 ×
failure the previous fault.
 The function codes related to the first two faults are as follows:
code name setting
Display the types of the first
Last two fault
F19.12 two faults, as detailed in Table 0 ×
categories
7-22 List of Fault Types.
Output frequency Display the output frequency in
F19.13 Hz 0.00 ×
in failure the first two faults.
Output current in Display the output current in the
F19.14 A 0.00 /0.0 ×
failure first two faults.
F19.15 V 0 ×
Display the running status in the
Running status in first two faults, as detailed in
F19.16 0 ×
failure Table 7-23 List of Running
Statuses in Faults.
Working time in Display the working time in the
F19.17 h 0 ×
249
Different fault types of the A90 series inverter are detailed in Table 7-22.
Table 7-22 List of Fault Types
Fault type Keyboard Fault type Keyboard
display display
0 E01: output short circuit E01
0: No failure
protection
E02: instantaneous E02 E03
E03: instantaneous overvoltage
overcurrent
E04: steady-state overcurrent E04 E05: steady-state overvoltage E05
E06: Steady-state E06 E07
E07: input phase loss
undervoltage
E08: output phase loss E08 E09: inverter overload E09
E10: inverter overheat E10 E11
E11: parameter setting conflict
protection
E12: motor overheat E12 E13: motor overload E13
E14: external fault E14 E15: inverter memory failure E15
E16: communication E16 E17: Temperature sensor E17
abnormality abnormality
E18: disengaged soft start E18 E19: current detection circuit E19
relay abnormality
E20: stall failure E20 E21: PID feedback disconnection E21
E22: retention E22 E23: keyboard memory failure E23
E24: parameter E24 E25
E25: retention
identification abnormality
E26 E27: up to the cumulative E27
E26: off-load protection
power-on time
E28: up to the cumulative E28 E29: internal communication E29
running time failure
The running statuses of the A90 series inverter in faults are detailed in Table 7-23.
Table 7-23 List of Running Statuses in Faults
Keyboard Detailed Explanation of
display Running Status of
Inverter
0 Not running
1 Forward acceleration
2 Reverse acceleration
3 Forward deceleration
4 Reverse deceleration
5 Forward constant speed
6 Reverse constant speed
250
251
Chapter 8 Motor Parameter Self-identification
8.1 Motor Parameter Self-identification

When the vector control mode is selected, the motor parameters must be self-identified.
For non-vector control, it is recommended to perform parameter self-identification during
the first run in order to improve the control accuracy.
The motor parameters required for calculation in vector control are usually not
available to users. The A90 series inverter has the function of motor parameter
self-identification. When the self-identification is enabled, the inverter will automatically
test the relevant parameters of the connected motor and store them into the internal memory.
Fig. 0-1 shows the specific meanings of the parameters of the three-phase asynchronous
motor.
R1 L1-Lm R2 L2-Lm
I1
I2
U1 (1-s)/s*R2
I0 Lm
Fig. 0-1 Equivalent Circuit of Three-phase Asynchronous Motor

R1, R2, L1, L2, Lm, and I0 in the figure represent: stator resistance, rotor resistance,
stator self-inductance, rotor self-inductance, mutual inductance, and no-load excitation
current. The leakage inductance is Ls=L-Lm.
8.2 Precautions before Self-identification

 Motor parameter self-identification is a process of automatically measuring motor
parameters. The A90 series inverter can perform the static and rotary
self-identification of motor parameters.
 The static self-identification is applicable when the motor load cannot be removed
but the motor parameters are available.
252
 The rotary self-identification is suitable when the motor load can be removed.
The motor shaft needs to be disconnected from the load before operation. The
rotary self-identification must not be performed when the motor is under load.
 Prior to self-identification, make sure that the motor is stopped; otherwise,
self-identification cannot be performed properly.
 Self-identification is valid only in the keyboard control mode (i.e. F00.02=0).
 In order to ensure the normal self-identification of motor parameters, the nameplate
parameters (F01.00: motor type; F01.01: rated power of the motor; F01.02: rated
voltage of the motor; F01.03: rated current of the motor; F01.04: rated frequency of
the motor; F01.05: rated speed of the motor; F01.06: winding connection of the motor;
F01.07: rated power factor of the motor) of the controlled motor should be set
correctly. When the Y series motor is used based on the specified power of the inverter,
its default settings can meet most requirements.
 In order to ensure the control performance, the power of the motor should match with
that of the inverter, or the former should be one level lower than the latter under
normal circumstances.
 After the normal self-identification of motor parameters, the set values of F01.09 to
F01.13 and F01.19 to F01.22 will be updated and automatically saved.
 When F12.14=1 is restored to the default setting, the values of the function codes
F01.00 to F01.13 and F01.19 to F01.22 remain unchanged.
8.3 Self-identification Steps

 Set F00.02=0 in the parameter setting status and disconnect the motor from the load.
 According to the motor nameplate parameters, set F01.00 (motor type), F01.01 (rated
power of the motor), F01.02 (rated voltage of the motor), F01.03 (rated current of the
motor), F01.04 (rated frequency of the motor), F01.05 (rated speed of the motor),
F01.06 (winding connection of the motor) and F01.07 (rated power factor of the
motor), respectively.
 For the asynchronous motor:
Set F01.34=1 and press RUN . The inverter will start the static self-identification of
the motor.
253
Or, set F01.34=2 and press RUN . The inverter will start the rotary self-identification
of the motor.
 For the synchronous motor:
Set F01.34=11 and press RUN . The inverter will start the static self-identification of
the motor.
Or, set F01.34=12 and press RUN . The inverter will start the rotary self-identification
of the motor.
 It takes about two minutes to complete the self-identification of the motor. Then the
system will return to the initial power-on status.
STOP
 During the self-identification, if you press the STOP/RESET key RESET , “E24”
(parameter identification abnormality) will be displayed; and if you press the
STOP
STOP/RESET key RESET , the system will return to the parameter setting status.
If the self-identification fails, “E24” (parameter identification abnormality) will be
STOP
displayed. If the STOP/RESET key is pressed RESET , the system will return to the
parameter setting status.
254
Chapter 9 Fault/Warning Solutions
9.1 Fault content

When the inverter is in the abnormal status, the digital tube display will show the
corresponding fault code and its parameters, the fault relay and fault output terminal will
work, and the inverter will stop the output. When a fault occurs, the motor will stop running
normally or slow down until it is stopped. The fault contents and solutions of the A90 series
inverter are shown in Table 0-1.
Table 0-1 Fault Contents and Solutions of A90 Series Inverter
Fault code Fault type Cause Solution
1. Short circuit to the ground.
1. Check the wiring for short
2. Inter-phase short circuit
circuits.
3. Short circuit of the external
2. Properly increase the
braking resistor.
acceleration and deceleration
4. The acceleration and
Short circuit time.
E01 fault/EMC fault
deceleration time is too
3. Investigate the cause and
short.
reset the controller after
5. The inverter module is
implementing the
damaged.
corresponding solutions.
6. There is excessive on-site
4. Seek technical support.
interference.
1. The acceleration and
deceleration time is too
short.
1. Increase the acceleration and
2. In the V/F drive mode, the
deceleration time.
V/F curve setting is
2. Reasonably set the V/F
unreasonable.
curve.
3. The motor is running during
3. Enable speed tracking or
startup.
start DC braking.
Instantaneous 4. The motor used is beyond
E02 overcurrent the capacity of the inverter
4. Use the appropriate motor or
inverter.
or the load is too heavy.
5. Identify the motor
5. Motor parameters are not
parameters.
suitable and need to be
6. Check the wiring for short
identified.
circuits.
6. The phases on the output
side of the inverter are
short-circuited.
7. The inverter is damaged.
255
1. Increase the deceleration
1. The deceleration time is too
time.
short, and the motor has too
2. Check the wiring of the
much regenerated energy.
braking unit and braking
2. The braking unit or braking
resistor.
resistor forms an open
3. Use a suitable braking
Instantaneous circuit.
E03 overvoltage 3. The braking unit or braking
unit/braking resistor.
4. Reduce the power voltage to
resistor does not match.
the specified range.
4. The power voltage is too
5. For the model of the built-in
high.
braking unit, set F15.30 to 1,
5. The energy consumption
and enable the energy
braking function is not enabled.
consumption braking.
Steady-state
E04 overcurrent
The same as E02 The same as E02
Steady-state
E05 overvoltage
Same with E03 Same with E03
1. The input power supply is

subject to phase loss.
2. The terminals of the input 1. Check the input power
power supply are loose. supply and wiring.
Steady-state 3. The voltage of the input 2. Tighten the screws of input
E06 undervoltage power supply drops too terminals.
much. 3. Check the air circuit breaker
4. The switch contacts of the and contactor.
input power supply are
aging.
1. Check the input power
supply.
1. The input power supply is 2. Check the wiring of the
subject to phase loss. input power supply.
E07 Input phase loss
2. The input power supply 3. Check whether the terminal
fluctuates greatly. is loose
4. Use a voltage regulator on
the input side.
1. Check the connection
between the inverter and
motor.
1. The output terminals U, V
E08 Output phase loss
and W have phase losses.
2. Check whether the output
terminal is loose.
3. Check whether the motor
winding is disconnected.
E09 Inverter overload 1. The acceleration and 1. Increase the acceleration and
256
deceleration time is too deceleration time.
short. 2. Reasonably set the V/F
2. In the V/F drive mode, the curve.
V/F curve setting is 3. Use the inverter that matches
unreasonable. the load.
3. The load is too heavy. 4. Reduce the braking time and
4. The braking time is too long, braking intensity. Do not
the braking intensity is too enable DC braking
high, or DC braking is repeatedly.
enabled repeatedly.
1. The operating environment
of the inverter should meet
1. The ambient temperature is
the specifications.
too high.
2. Improve the ventilation
E10 Inverter overheat 2. The inverter is subject to
environment and check
poor ventilation.
whether the air duct is
3. The cooling fan fails.
blocked.
3. Replace the cooling fan.
1. Check whether parameters
Parameter setting 1. There is a logic conflict in
E11 conflict parameter settings.
set are illogical before the
occurrence of fault.
1. The acceleration and 1. Increase the acceleration and
deceleration time is too short. deceleration time.
2. In the V/F drive mode, the 2. Reasonably set the V/F
E13 Motor overload
V/F curve setting is curve.
unreasonable. 3. Use a motor matching the
3. The load is too heavy. load.
1. The external device fails,
E14 External fault resulting in the terminal 1. Check the external device.
action.
1. Interference results in 1. Press the STOP/RESET key
memory reading and writing to reset the controller and try
errors. again.
Inverter memory
E15 failure
2. The internal memory of the 2. For the parameters (e.g.
controller is read and written frequency setting) to be
repeatedly, causing damage modified frequently, set
to the memory. F10.56 to 11 after debugging.
1. F10.03 is set to 0.0 in the
1. Communication timeout is
discontinuous
enabled in the discontinuous
Communication communication system.
E16 error
communication system.
2. Adjust the F10.03
2. Communication is
communication timeout.
disconnected.
3. Check whether the
257
communication cable is
disconnected.
1. Check whether the inverter

Abnormality of The inverter temperature sensor
temperature sensor is
E17 inverter is disconnected or
connected properly.
temperature sensor short-circuited.
1. The power supply fails
during operation.
1. Stop the inverter before
2. The input power supply is
power-off, or directly reset
subject to phase loss.
the fault.
3. The terminals of the input
2. Check the input power
The soft start relay power supply are loose.
E18 is not engaged. 4. The voltage of the input
supply and wiring.
3. Tighten the screws of input
power supply drops too
terminals.
much.
4. Check the air circuit breaker
5. The switch contacts of the
and contactor.
input power supply are
aging.
The detection circuit of the drive
Error of current
E19 detection circuit
board or control board is 1. Seek technical support.
damaged.
1. Increase the deceleration
1. The deceleration time is too
time.
short.
2. Check the dynamic brake.
E20 Stall fault 2. Error of dynamic brake for
3. Check whether the motor
deceleration.
cannot be stopped as it is
3. The load is too heavy.
driven by another load.
1. Check whether the feedback
1. The PID feedback is greater line falls off.
than the upper limit (F09.24) 2. Check whether the sensor is
PID feedback
E21 disconnection
or less than the lower limit working abnormally.
(F09.25), depending on the 3. Adjust the detection value of
type of the feedback sensor. feedback disconnection to a
reasonable level.
1. Press the STOP/RESET key 1. Press the STOP/RESET key
during parameter to reset.
Self-identification
E24 error
identification. 2. The external terminal should
2. The external terminal stops not be operated during
working (FRS = ON) parameter identification.
258
properly during parameter 3. Check the connection
identification. between the inverter and
3. The motor is not connected. motor.
4. The rotary self-learning 4. Disconnect the rotary
motor is not disconnected self-learning motor from the
from the load. load.
5. The motor fails. 5. Check the motor.
1. The motor is not connected
1. Check the wiring and use
or does not match the
the appropriate motor
load.
Load loss 2. Check the equipment.
E26 protection
2. Load loss occurs.
3. Change the off-load
3. The parameters of load loss
detection level F07.22 and
protection are not set
detection time F07.23.
reasonably.
Up to cumulative The inverter maintenance time Contact the dealer for technical
E27 power-on time is up. support.
Up to cumulative The inverter maintenance time Contact the dealer for technical
E28 running time is up. support.
STOP
When the inverter has an aforesaid fault, press the STOP/RESET key RESET to for
resetting/clearing or use the fault resetting terminal to exit the fault status. If the fault has
been eliminated, the inverter will return to the function setting status; otherwise, the digital
tube will continue to display the current fault information.
The following numbers are used to read the fault type through communication:
0 E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E07 E08 E09 E10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
E11 and subsequent faults are represented by the numbers behind the letter “E”. For
example, “E11” corresponds to the number “11”.
Comparison table of English uppercase display:

a b c d e f g h i l
A B C D E F G H I L
n o p q r s t u x y
N O P Q R S T U X Y
Comparison table of digital font display:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
259
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
9.2 Failure Analysis

If the motor does not work as expected due to errors in function setting and external
control terminal connection after the inverter is powered on, refer to the analysis in this
section for the corresponding solutions. If a fault code is displayed, see the solutions in 0.
9.2.1 Failure in parameter setting of function codes
 The displayed parameters remain unchanged during the forward or reverse spinning of
the digital potentiometer.
When the inverter is in the running status, some code parameters cannot be modified
without stopping the inverter.
 The displayed parameters can be modified but cannot be stored during the forward or
reverse spinning of the digital potentiometer.
Some function codes are locked and cannot be modified.
When F12.02 is set to 1 or 2, parameter changes are restricted. Please set F12.02 to 0.
Or, this occurs after the user password is set.
9.2.2 Abnormality of motor rotation
 When the RUN key RUN on the keyboard is pressed, the motor does not rotate.
 Terminal control of the start and stop: Check the setting of the function code
F00.02.
 The free stop terminal FRS and COM are closed: Disconnect the free stop
terminal FRS from COM.
 Switching of the running command to terminal is valid. In this case, the running
command is only subject to terminal control. This will be invalid if modified.
 The status combination of the running command channel is terminal control:
Change it to keyboard control.
 The reference input frequency is set to 0: Increase the reference input frequency.
 The input power supply is abnormal or the control circuit fails.
 The control terminals RUN and F/R are ON, and the motor does not rotate.
 Enabling of the stop function by the external terminal is invalid: Check the
setting of function code F00.02.
260
 Free stop terminal FRS=ON: Change the free stop terminal to FRS=OFF.
 Control switch failure: Check the control switch.
 The reference input frequency is set to 0: Increase the reference input frequency.
 The motor can only rotate in one direction.
Reverse running is prohibited: When the reverse running prohibition code F00.21 is set
to 1, the inverter is not allowed for reverse running.
 The motor rotates in the opposite direction.
The output phase sequence of the inverter is inconsistent with the input phase
sequence of the motor: Exchange any two of the motor wires in the power-off status to
change the rotation direction of the motor.
9.2.3 Too long acceleration time of motor
 The current limit level is too low.
When the overcurrent limit setting is valid, and the output current of the inverter
reaches the set current limit, the output frequency will remain unchanged during
acceleration, until the output current is less than the limit. Then the output frequency will
continue to rise. This makes the acceleration time of the motor longer than the set time.
Check whether the set current limit of the inverter is too low.
 The set acceleration time is too long. Please check the acceleration time code.
9.2.4 Too long deceleration time of motor
 When energy consumption braking is valid:
 The resistance of the braking resistor is too high, and the energy consumption
braking power is too low, which extends the deceleration time.
 The set value of braking rate (F15.32) is too small, which extends the
deceleration time. Increase the set value of braking rate.
 The set deceleration time is too long. Check the deceleration time code.
 When the stall protection is valid:
 When the overvoltage stall protection is enabled, and the DC bus voltage exceeds
the voltage of overvoltage stall (F07.07), the output frequency will remains
unchanged; and when the DC bus voltage is lower than F07.07, the output
frequency will continue to drop, which extends the deceleration time.
 The set deceleration time is too long. Check the deceleration time code.
261
9.2.5 Electromagnetic interference and RF interference
 Since the inverter works in the high-frequency switching status, electromagnetic
interference and RF interference will be generate to the control device. The following
measures can be taken.
 Reduce the carrier frequency (F00.23) of the inverter.
 Install a noise filter on the input side of the inverter.
 Install a noise filter on the output side of the inverter.
 Install a metal tube outside the cables. Install the inverter in a metal casing.
 Make the inverter and motor grounded reliably.
 Connect the main circuit and control circuit separately. Use the shielded cables in
the control circuit, and connect them according to the wiring method in Chapter3.
9.2.6 Action of leakage circuit breaker
 When the inverter is running, the leakage circuit breaker works.
Since the inverter outputs high-frequency PWM signals, a high-frequency leakage
current will be generated. Please use the dedicated leakage circuit breaker with the current
sensitivity above 30mA. If an ordinary leakage circuit breaker is used, use a leakage circuit
breaker with the current sensitivity above 200mA and action time of more than 0.1s.
9.2.7 Mechanical vibration
 The inherent frequency of the mechanical system resonates with the carrier frequency
of the inverter.
The motor is not faulty, but the mechanical system produces sharp resonant sounds.
This is caused by the resonation between the inherent frequency of the mechanical system
and carrier frequency of the inverter. Please adjust the carrier frequency (F00.23) to avoid
resonation.
 The inherent frequency of the mechanical system resonates with the output frequency
of the inverter.
Resonation between the inherent frequency of the mechanical system and output
frequency of the inverter will lead to mechanical noise. Please use the vibration suppression
function (F05.13), or install the anti-vibration rubber or take other anti-vibration measures
on the motor base.
 PID control oscillation
262
The adjustment parameters P, Ti and Td of the PID controller are not set correctly.
Please set the PID parameters again.
9.2.8 Motor rotation in the absence of inverter output
 Insufficient DC braking for stop
 The DC braking torque for stop is too small. Please increase the set value of the
DC braking current for stop (F04.21).
 The DC braking time for stop is short. Please increase the set value of the DC
braking time for stop (F04.22). Under normal circumstances, please give priority
to increase in the DC braking current for stop.
9.2.9 Inconsistency between output frequency and set frequency
 The set frequency exceeds the upper frequency limit.
When the set frequency exceeds the set value of the upper frequency limit, the output
frequency will be the upper frequency limit. Set the frequency again within the upper
frequency limit range; or check whether F00.16, F00.17 and F00.18 are appropriate.
263
Chapter 10 Maintenance
10.1 Daily Maintenance of Inverter

The inverter may be subject to various faults due to changes in its operating
environment, such as the impact of temperature, humidity, smoke, dust and the like, and
ageing of internal components. Thus, daily inspection and regular maintenance should be
carried out to the inverter during storage and operation.
 Check whether the components of the inverter are intact and whether the screws are
tightened after transportation and before operation.
 During the normal operation of the inverter, clean dust on a regular basis and check
whether the screws are tightened.
 If the inverter is not in use for a long time, it is recommended to power it on
(preferably 30 min) once every six months during storage, to prevent the failure of
electronic components.
 The inverter should not be used in the humid place or place with metal dust. If
necessary, use the inverter in an electrical cabinet with protective measures or an
on-site protective cabin.
Please check the following items during the normal operation of the inverter:
 Check the motor for abnormal sound and vibration.
 Check the inverter and motor for abnormal heating.
 Check whether the ambient temperature is too high.
 Check whether the output current is normal.
 Check whether the cooling fan of the inverter works properly.
Depending on the usage, the user needs to check the inverter on a regular basis to
eliminate faults and safety hazards. Prior to the inspection, turn off the power supply and
wait until the LED indicator of the keyboard is OFF. The check content is shown in Table
0-1.
Check Item Check contents Solution

Screws of main Check whether the screws are Tighten the screws with a
circuit terminals loose. screwdriver.
264
and control circuit
terminals
Cooling fins
Check whether there is dust or Purge them with dry compressed
PCB (printed circuit
foreign objects. air (pressure: 4-6 kg/cm2).
board)
Check it for abnormal noise and
vibration. Check whether the
Cooling fan Replace the cooling fan
cumulative running time is up to
20,000 hours.
Purge them with dry compressed
Power components Check whether there is dust.
air (pressure: 4-6 kg/cm2).
Electrolytic Check it for color changes, odor
Replace the electrolytic capacitor.
capacitor and bubbles.
Table 0-1 Content of Regular Inspection
In order to make the inverter work properly in a long time, regular maintenance and
replacement must be performed regularly based on the service life of its internal
components. The service life of the components of the inverter varies depending on the
operating environment and conditions. The replacement period of the inverter in Table 0-2
is for reference only.
Table 0-2 Replacement Intervals of Inverter Components
Name of part Standard Replacement Interval (Year)
Cooling fan 2-3 years
Electrolytic capacitor 4-5 years
Printed circuit board 5-8 years
The operating conditions for replacement of the inverter components listed in the
above table are as follows:
Ambient temperature: Annual average 30°C.
Load factor: Less than 80%.
Operating time: less than 12 hours per day.
10.2 Instructions for Inverter Warranty

Our company will provide warranty services for the inverter in the following cases.
The warranty applies to the inverter body only. Our company is responsible for the
265
warranty of the inverter that fails or is damaged within 12 months during normal operation,
and will charge reasonable maintenance fees after 12 months.
Certain maintenance fees will also be charged within one year in the following cases:
 The inverter is damaged due to noncompliance with the instructions in this manual
during operation;
 The inverter is damaged due to flood, fire, abnormal voltage, etc.;
 The inverter is damaged as a result of incorrect wiring;
 The inverter is damaged due to unauthorized modification.
Relevant service fees will be calculated based on the actual costs.
If any, the additional agreement shall prevail.
266
Chapter 11 Optional Accessories
11.1 Braking Resistor

If the speed of the controlled motor drops too fast or the motor load shakes too fast
during the inverter operation, its electromotive force will charge the internal capacitor
reversely via the inverter, resulting in the voltage boost at two ends of the power module.
This is likely to cause damage to the inverter. The internal control of the inverter will
suppress this based on the load. If the braking performance does not meet the customer
requirements, an external braking resistor is needed to release energy in a timely manner.
Due to the external braking resistor of energy consumption braking type, the energy will be
completely dissipated to the power braking resistor. Hence, the power and resistance of the
braking resistor must be selected reasonably and effectively.
The power of the braking resistor can be calculated by the following formula:
Resistor power Pb = inverter power P × braking frequency D
D - Braking frequency. This is an estimated value, depending on the load conditions.
Under normal circumstances, D is as follows:
D=10% under ordinary loads
D=5% for occasional braking loads
D = 10% to 15% for elevators
D = 5% to 20% for centrifuges
D = 10% to 20% for oilfield kowtow machines
D = 50% to 60% for unwinding and winding. It should be calculated based on the
system design indicators.
D = 50% to 60% for lifting equipment with a lowering height over 100m
267
The recommended power and resistance for the braking resistor of the A90 series
inverter are given in the table below. The recommended resistor power is calculated based
on the braking rate (10% to 20%). It is for reference only. If the inverter is used in the case
of frequent acceleration/deceleration or continuous braking, the power of the braking
resistor needs to be increased. The user can change the value according to the load
conditions, but within the specified range.
Wire (mm2)
Motor Resistance Resistor Power
Inverter Model Connected to
(kW) (Ω) (W)
Resistor
A90-2T2R8B 0.4 ≥360 ≥200 1
A90-2T4R8B 0.75 ≥180 ≥400 1.5
A90-2T8R0B 1.5 ≥180 ≥400 1.5
A90-2T010B 2.2 ≥90 ≥800 2.5
A90-4T2R5B 0.75 ≥360 ≥200 1
A90-4T4R2B 1.5 ≥180 ≥400 1.5
A90-4T5R6B 2.2 ≥180 ≥400 1.5
A90-4T9R4B 4 ≥90 ≥800 2.5
A90-4T013B 5.5 ≥60 ≥1000 4
A90-4T017B 7.5 ≥60 ≥1000 4
A90-4T025B 11 ≥30 ≥2000 6
A90-4T032B 15 ≥30 ≥2000 6
A90-4T038B 18.5 ≥30 ≥2000 6
A90-4T045B 22 ≥15 ≥4000 6
Wire (mm2)
Motor Resistance Resistor Power
Inverter Model Connected to
(kW) (Ω) (W)
Resistor
★ The wires listed above refer to the outgoing wires of a single resistor. If resistors
are connected in parallel, the bus should be enlarged accordingly. The withstand
voltage of the wires should be AC300V or above for the single-phase model and
AC450V or above for the three-phase model. Cables should be resistant to
105°C.
11.2 Braking Unit

For the A90 series inverters (A90-4T60 and above), use our BR100 series braking
units (power range: 18.5-160kW). The models of our braking units are as follows.
268
Minimum Peak Applicable
Model and Average Braking
Application Resistance Current Inverter Power
specification Current Iav(A)
(Ω) Imax(A) (kW)
BR100-045 Energy 10 45 75 18.5 - 45
consumption
braking
BR100-160 Energy 6 75 150 55 - 160
consumption
braking
★ When BR100-160 works with the minimum resistance, the braking unit can work
continuously at the braking frequency D=33%.
In the case of D>33%, the braking unit will work intermittently. Otherwise, an
over-temperature protection fault will occur.
11.3 Selection of Connecting Wires

Since all braking units and braking resistors work at high voltage (>400VDC) and in
the discontinuous status, please select appropriate wires. See Table 0-1 for the wiring
specifications of the main circuit. Use the cables with the conforming insulation levels and
cross-sections.
Table 0-1 Wire Specifications of Braking Units and Braking Resistors
Specification Average Braking Peak Braking Current Cross-section (mm2) of
and model Current Iav(A) Imax(A) Copper-core Cable
BR100-045 45 75 10
BR100-160 75 150 16
BR100-315 120 300 25
Flexible cables have higher flexibility. Because cables may be in contact with
high-temperature devices, it is recommended to use copper-core and heat-resistant flexible
cables or flame-retardant cables. The braking unit should be close to the inverter as much as
possible and no more than 2m far away from the inverter. Otherwise, the DC-side cables
should be twisted and used with magnetic rings to reduce radiation and inductance.
The lengths of connecting wires of the braking unit, braking resistor and inverter are
shown in Fig. 0-1.
269
< 2m > 2m
Braking Braking
Inverter
unit resistor
Fig. 0-1 Wire Length
270
Chapter 12 MODBUS Communication Protocol
12.1 Applicable Scope

1. Applicable series: A90 series
2. Applicable network: Support the “single-master multi-slave” communication
network with MODBUS-RTU protocol and RS-485 bus.
Host
A- A+
A-
A+
A- A+ A- A+ A- A+
Inverter 1# Inverter 2# Inverter n#
12.2 Interface Mode

RS-485 asynchronous half-duplex communication mode, with the least significant bit
sent first;
RS-485 network address: 1-247; 0 is the broadcast address;
Default data format of RS-485 terminal: 1-8-N-1[2] (options: 1-8-E-1, 1-8-O-1,
1-8-N-2, 1-8-E-2 and 1-8-O-2);
Default baud rate of RS-485 terminal: 9600bps (options: 4,800bps, 19,200bps,
38,400bps, 57,600bps and 115,200bps)
It is recommended to use twisted-pair shielded cable as the communication cable to
reduce the impact of external interference on communication.
[2]: 1-8-N-1, meaning 1 start bit - 8 characters per byte of data - no parity - 1 stop bit.
E: even parity. O: odd parity.
12.3 Protocol Format

12.3.1 Message format
As shown in Fig. 0-1, a standard MODBUS message includes a start tag, RTU
271
(Remote Terminal Unit) message, and end tag.
RTU message
PDU
Function
Start Address code
Data CRC check End
≥3.5 characters 8 digits 8 digits N*8 bits 2*8 bit ≥3.5 characters
Address Number
of of Register content
register registers
2 * number of registers *
2*8 bit 2*8 bit
8 bits
Fig. 0-1 Schematic Diagram of Message Frame in RTU Mode

The RTU message includes the address code, PDU (Protocol Data Unit) and CRC[3]
check. The PDU includes the function code and data part (mainly including the register
address, number of registers, register content and the like; the detailed definitions of
function codes are different, as shown in 0 Function code).
[3]: the low byte of CRC check is in front of the high byte.
12.3.2 Address code
Address Range Purpose
1 - 247 Slave
0 Broadcast
12.3.3 Function code
The classification of MODBUS function codes is shown in Fig. 0-2.
272
127（0x7F） Common function

code
110（0x6E） User-defined
100（0x64） function code
Common function
code
72（0x48） User-defined function
code
65（0x41）
Common function
code
1（0x1）
Fig. 0-2 Classification of MODBUS Function Codes

As shown in Table 0-1, A90 series products mainly involve common function codes.
For example, 12.3.3.1 0x03: function code used to read multiple registers or status words,
12.3.3.5 0x06: function code used to write a single register or command, 12.3.3.6 0x10:
function code used to write multiple registers or commands, and 12.3.3.4 0x08: function
code for diagnosis.
In addition, for some specific functions, such as register writing (RAM) without
EEPROM storage, the user-defined function codes include 12.3.3.2 0x41: function code
used to write a single register or command (without saving), and 12.3.3.3 0x42: function
code used to write multiple registers or commands (without saving).
When the abnormal valid data is received from a device, a related abnormality
message will be returned (see 0 Exception response). The abnormality function code is
defined to distinguish the abnormal data from normal communication data. Corresponding
to the normal request function code, the abnormality function code = request function
code + 0x80.
Table 0-1 Function Code Definitions of A90 series Product
Function Abnormality Function
code function code
03 83 This function code is used to read multiple registers or
status words.
41 C1 This function code is used to write a single register or
273
command without saving.

42 C2 This function code is used to write multiple registers or
commands without saving.
08 88 This function code is used for diagnosis.
06 86 This function code is used to write a single register or
command.
10 90 This function code is used to write multiple registers or
commands.
PDU parts are detailed in the following sections, depending on various functions.
12.3.3.1 0x03: function code used to read multiple registers or status words
In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to read the content in the
continuous block of the holding register. The request PDU describes the starting register
address and the number of registers.
The register data in the response message is divided into two bytes in each register.
The first byte of each register includes high-order bits and the second byte includes
low-order bits.
 Request PDU
Function code 1 byte 0x03
Starting Address 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Number of registers 2 bytes 1 - 16
 Response PDU
Number of bytes 1 byte 2×N*
Register value N*×2 bytes
N* = number of registers
 Error PDU
Error code 1 byte 0x83
Exception code 1 byte 01, 02, 03 or 04
Below is an example of a request to read the registers F19.00 to F19.05 (relevant

274
information about the latest fault):

Request Respond
Domain name (0x) Domain name (normal) (0x) Domain (0x)
name
(abnormal)
Function code 03 Function code 03 Function 83
Starting address 13 Number of bytes 0C
03 (example,
Hi Exception
the same
Starting address 00 Register value Hi 00 code
below)
Lo (F19.00)
Number (Hi) of 00 Register value Lo 11
registers (F19.00)
Number (Lo) of 06 Register value Hi 00
registers (F19.01)
Register value Lo 00
(F19.01)
Register value Hi 00
(F19.02)
(F19.02)
(F19.03)
Register value Lo 2C
(F19.03)
(F19.04)
(F19.04)
(F19.05)
(F19.05)
According to the returned data, the “17 (0011H): temperature sensor abnormality”
occurs to the inverter, in which the output frequency is 0.00Hz, the output current is 0.00A,
the bus voltage is 300V (012CH), the acceleration and deceleration status is “standby”, and
the working time is 0 hour.
★: At present, the function code 0x03 of MODBUS protocol supports the reading of
275
multiple function codes across groups. However, it is recommended not to read them
across groups in the case of no special requirements, so the customer’s software does
not need to be upgraded after our products are upgraded.
12.3.3.2 0x41: function code used to write a single register or command (without
saving)
In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to write a single non-holding
register.
The request PDU describes the address to be written to the register.
The normal response is the response made to the request, which is returned after the
register content is written.
 Request PDU
Address of register 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Register value 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
 Response PDU
 Error PDU
Error code 1 byte 0xC1
Exception code 1 byte See Table 0-4
Below is an example of a request to change the main frequency source A (7001H) to

“-50.00%”:
Request Respond
Domain name (0x) Domain name (0x) Domain name (0x)
(normal) (abnormal)
Function 41 Function 41 Function C1
Register address Hi 70 Register address Hi 70 Exception
03
Register address Lo 01 Register address Lo 01 code
Register value Hi EC Register value Hi EC
Register value Lo 78 Register value Lo 78
★ This function code cannot be used to change the parameters of the attribute “○”
276
(it cannot be changed during operation). That is, only the parameters of the
attribute “●” (it can be changed during operation) can be changed. Otherwise, the
error code 1 will be returned.
12.3.3.3 0x42: function code used to write multiple registers or commands (without
saving)
In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to write consecutive non-holding
register blocks (1 to 16 registers).
The value requested to be written is described in the request data field. The data of
each register is divided into two bytes.
In the normal response, the function code, starting address and number of registers
written will be returned.
 Request PDU
 Response PDU
Number of 2 bytes 1 - 16
registers
 Error PDU
Error code 1 byte 0xC2
Below is an example of a request to set the acceleration time 1 (F00.14) to 5.00 and
deceleration time 1 (F00.15) to 6.00:
Request Respond
(normal) (abnormal)
Function 42 Function 42 Function C2
277
Starting address Hi 00 Starting address 00
Hi Exception
03
Starting address Lo 0E Starting address 0E code
Lo
Number (Hi) of registers 00 Number (Hi) of 00
registers
Number (Lo) of registers 02 Number (Lo) of 02
registers
Number of bytes 04
(F00.14)
Register value Lo F4
(F00.14)
(F00.15)
(F00.15)
★ This function code cannot be used to change the parameters of the attribute “○”
(it cannot be changed during operation). That is, only the parameters of the
attribute “●” (it can be changed during operation) can be changed. Otherwise, the
error code 1 will be returned.
12.3.3.4 0x08: function code for diagnosis

The Modbus function code 08 involves a series of tests to check the communication
system between the client (master station) and server (slave station), or internal error
statuses of the server.
The test to be executed is defined by the sub-function code fields of two bytes in the
request. The server makes responses properly.
Copy the function codes and sub-function codes. Some diagnoses will enable the
remote terminal unit to return the corresponding data through the data field in normal
response.
Under normal circumstances, when the diagnosis function is sent to the remote
terminal unit, the user program in this remote terminal unit will not be affected. The user
logic cannot be accessed by diagnosis, such as: discrete magnitude and register. The error
counter in the remote terminal unit can be remotely reset by applying some functions.
278
The main diagnosis function used by our company is line diagnosis (0000), which
is used to test the normal communication between the host and slave. The normal
response to a request to return query data is to return the same data. At the same time, the
function codes and sub-function codes are also copied.
 Request PDU
Sub-function code 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Data 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
 Response PDU
Sub-function code 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
Data 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
 Error PDU
 Sub-function code
Sub-fun Meaning Data field Data field
ction (request) (response)
0000 Return query Any Copy request
data data
…
0000: return the data transferred in the request data field in the response. All messages
should be consistent with the request message.
The following table is an example of requesting the remote terminal unit to return
query data. The sub-function code 0000 is used. The returned data is sent in the two-byte
data field (0xA537).
Request Respond
(normal) (abnormal)
Function 08 Function 08 Function 88
Sub-function code Hi 00 Sub-function 00
Exception
code Hi 03
code
Sub-function code Lo 00 Sub-function 00
279
code Lo
Data Hi A5 Data Hi A5
Data Lo 37 Data Lo 37
12.3.3.5 0x06: function code used to write a single register or command

In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to write a single holding register.
The request PDU describes the address to be written to the register.
The normal response is the response made to the request, which is returned after the
register content is written.
 Request PDU
 Response PDU
Address of 2 bytes 0x0000 - 0xFFFF
register
 Error PDU
Below is an example of a request to change the drive control mode of the motor 1
(F00.01) to “1: SVC”.
Request Respond
(normal) (abnormal)
Register address Hi 00 Register address 00
Hi Exception
03
Register address Lo 01 Register address 01 code
Lo
Register value Hi 00 Register value Hi 00
★ The function code 0x06 cannot be used if modified frequently, in order to avoid
damage to the inverter.
280
The user-defined function code 0x41 “change without saving” corresponds to the
standard common function code 0x06. Its definition is the same as that of the corresponding
standard function code (the same request, response and error PDU). The difference is that
when the slave responds to this user-defined function code, the corresponding value of
RAM is changed only and not stored in EEPROM (holding register).
For the function codes (e.g. F00.07) that are often modified, it is recommended to use
the function code 0x41 (you can change the main frequency source A by directly setting
7001H, as detailed in 0 and 0), to avoid damage to the inverter. The specific operation is as
follows.
Request Respond
Domain name (0x) Domain name (0x)
(normal)
Function 41 Function 41
Register address Hi 00 Register address Hi 00
Register address Lo 07 Register address Lo 07
Register value Hi 13 Register value Hi 13
Once the set frequency (F00.07) is set to 50.00Hz, the above data will be valid but not
be stored in EEPROM. That is, the inverter will run at 50.00Hz after change but at the
frequency before change if powered on again.
12.3.3.6 0x10: function code used to write multiple registers or commands

In the remote terminal unit, this function code is used to write consecutive register
blocks (1 to 16 registers).
The value requested to be written is described in the request data field. The data of
each register is divided into two bytes.
In the normal response, the function code, starting address and number of registers
written will be returned.
 Request PDU
281
 Response PDU
Number of 2 bytes 1 - 16
registers
 Error PDU
Below is an example of a request to write 00 01 and 00 03 into two registers starting
from F03.00 (i.e. setting the Y1 output terminal function):
Request Respond
(normal) (abnormal)
Starting address Hi 03 Starting address 03
Hi Exception
03
Starting address Lo 00 Starting address 00 code
Lo
Number (Hi) of registers 00 Number (Hi) of 00
registers
Number (Lo) of registers 02 Number (Lo) of 02
registers
Number of bytes 04
(F03.00)
(F03.00)
(F03.01)
(F03.01)
★ The function code 0x10 cannot be used if modified frequently, in order to avoid
damage to the inverter, as detailed in 0.
282
12.3.4 Register address distribution
Table 0-2 Detailed Definition of Register Address of MODBUS Protocol
Address Space Note
For the function code FXX.YY, the high order is hexadecimal of
Function code
XX and the low order is hexadecimal of YY. For example, the
0000H - 6F63H
address of F00.14 is 000EH (00D=00H, 14D=0EH).
When the parameters are set with the function code 0x06 or
Function code (not saved 0x10, the function that “the settings are valid immediately and
after power-down) not saved after power-down” can be realized in the form of
8000H-EF63H “original address +8000H”. For example, the corresponding
address of F00.14 is 800EH (=000EH+8000H).
0000H Invalid command
0001H Forward running
0002H Reverse running
0003H JOG forward
0004H JOG reverse
7000H control 0005H Deceleration to stop
word 0006H Stop the controller quickly
0007H Free stop
0008H Fault resetting
0009H +/- input switching
000BH JOG stop
Others to 00FFH Reserved
Control Communication
comman percentage setting -100.00% to 100.00% (100% = maximum
d (write 7001H
of main channel frequency)
only) frequency A
7000H Communication
~ percentage setting
71FFH -100.00% to 100.00% (100% = maximum
7002H of auxiliary
frequency)
channel frequency
B
Torque
-200.00% to 200.00% (100% = digital
7003H communication
torque setting)
setting
Communication
7004H setting of process -100.00% - 100.00%
PID setting
Communication
7005H setting of process -100.00% - 100.00%
PID feedback
7006H Voltage setting of 0.00% to 100.00% (digital setting reference)
283
VF separation
mode
7007H to
Reserved
7009H
Communication
percentage setting
700AH 0.00% to 200.00% (digital setting reference)
of upper frequency
limit
Communication
percentage setting
700BH of upper frequency 0.00% to 200.00% (digital setting reference)
limit of torque
control
Linear speed input for
700CH inertia compensation 0.00% to 100.00% (digital setting reference)
700DH to
Reserved
700EH
Master-slave
communication -100.00%to 100.00% (maximum reference)
700FH setting
7010H to
Reserved
7013H
Fault input of external device (including
7014H External fault
option card)
Communication
setting of main
7015H 0.00 to maximum frequency
channel frequency
A
Communication
setting of auxiliary
channel frequency
B
Communication
7017H setting of upper 0.00 to maximum frequency
frequency limit
Communication
setting of upper
frequency limit of
torque control
Communication
setting of upper 0.0 to 250.0% (based on 100.0% or direct
7019H
torque limit of sending)
speed control
284
7019H to
Reserved
71FFH
00H Parameter setting
01H Slave running
02H JOG running
03H Self-learning running
Bit7 to 0 running
04H Slave stop
status
05H JOG stop
7200H status
word 1 06H Fault status
07H Factory self-inspection
08H - 0FFH Reserved
Normal running of
00H
Bit15 to 8 fault inverter
information Inverter fault status, where
xxH
“xx” is the fault code
Bit0 setting 1 - setting is valid
direction 0 + setting is valid
Reverse frequency
1
Bit1 running output
direction Forward frequency
Working 0
output
status
00 Speed control mode
7200H
Bit3 to 2 running 01 Torque control mode
~
mode 10 Reserved
73FFH
11 Reserved
Valid parameter
1
7201H status Bit4 parameter protection
word 2 protection Invalid parameter
0
protection
Bit6 - 5 Reserved
00 Keyboard control
Bit8 to 7 setting 01 Terminal control
mode 10 Communication control
11 Reserved
Bit9 Reserved
0 No warning
Bit10 warning Warning status (see 7230H
1
for details)
Bit15 - 10 Reserved
7202H Bit0 Output frequency
monitoring Bit1 Input frequency
frequency +/- Bit2 Synchronization frequency
285
status word 1 Bit3 Reserved
(1: -; 0: +) Bit4 Estimate feedback frequency
Bit5 Estimated slip frequency
Bit6 Load rate
Bit15 to 7 Reserved
7203H Output frequency
7204H Output voltage
7205H Output power
7206H Running speed
7207H Bus voltage
7208H Output torque
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Digital input * * * * * * * *
7209H
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
* * * X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Digital input * * * VX5 VX4 VX3 VX2 VX1
720AH
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
* * * * * * AI2 AI1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Digital output * * * * * * * *
720BH
1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
* * * * * Y1 * R1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Digital output VY8 VY7 VY6 VY5 VY4 VY3 VY2 VY1
720CH
2 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
* * * * * * * *
720DH The first two faults
720EH The first three faults
720FH The last fault
7210H Output frequency in the last fault
7211H Output current in the last fault
7212H Bus voltage in the last fault
7213H Running status in the last fault
7214H Running time in the last fault
7215H Set acceleration time
7216H Set deceleration time
7217H Cumulative length
7218H Reserved
7219H UP/DOWN offset frequency symbol (0/1: +/-)
7224H Output current
7225H Set frequency
286
7228H Cumulative power-on time
Warning
7230H 0: no warning; others: current warning sign
number
Other - 73FFH Reserved
Performance software S/N Corresponding to the function code
7500H
1 F12.22
Performance software Corresponding to the function code
7501H
S/N2 F12.23
Corresponding to the function code
7502H Functional software S/N 1
F12.24
7503H Functional software S/N 2
Product F12.25
informati Keyboard software serial Corresponding to the function code
7504H
on number 1 F12.26
7500H Keyboard software serial Corresponding to the function code
7505H
~ number 2 F12.27
75FFH Corresponding to the function code
7506H Serial No. 1
F12.28
7507H Serial No. 2
F12.29
7508H Serial No. 3
F12.30
7509H to
Reserved
75FFH
Others Reserved
12.3.5 Definition of frame data length

The PDU part of the RTU frame of the MODBUS message is able to read/write 1-16
registers. For different function codes, the actual length of the RTU frame varies, as
Table 0-3 Correspondence between RTU Frame Length and Function Code
RTU frame length (bytes)
Function code Maximum length
Request Normal response Exception
(0x) (Byte)
response
03 8 5+2Nr[4] 5 37
41 (06) 8 8 5 8
08 8 8 5 8
42 (10) 9+2Nw[5] 8 5 41
287
[4]: Nr≤16, indicating the number of requests to read registers;

[5]: Nw≤16, indicating the number of requests to write registers;
[6]: Nw+Nr≤16;
12.3.6 CRC check

The low byte of CRC check is in front of the high byte.
The transmitter first calculates the CRC value, which is included in the sent message.
Upon receiving the message, the receiver will recalculate the CRC value and compare the
calculated value with the received CRC value. If the two values are not equal, it means that
there is an error in the sending process.
Calculation process of CRC check:
(1) Define a CRC register and assign an initial value, FFFFH.
(2) Perform the XOR calculation with the first byte of the transmitted message and the
value of the CRC register, and store the result in the CRC register. Starting from the address
code, the start bit and stop bit are not involved in calculation.
(3) Extract and check the LSB (the least significant bit of the CRC register).
(4) If the LSB is 1, each bit of the CRC register is shifted to the right by one bit, and the
most significant bit is supplemented by 0. Perform the XOR calculation of the value of the
CRC register and A001H, and store the result in the CRC register.
(5) If the LSB is 0, each bit of the CRC register is shifted to the right by one bit, and the
most significant bit is supplemented by 0.
(6) Repeat the steps 3, 4, and 5 until 8 shifts are completed.
(7) Repeat the steps 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 to process next byte of the transmitted message, until all
bytes of the transmitted message are processed.
(8) After the calculation, the content of the CRC register is the value of CRC check.
(9) In a system with limited time resources, it is recommended to perform CRC check by
the table lookup method.
The simple function of CRC is as follows (programmed in C language):
unsigned int CRC_Cal_Value(unsigned char *Data, unsigned char Length)
{
unsigned int crc_value = 0xFFFF;
int i = 0;
288
while(Length--)
{
crc_value ^= *Data++;
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if(crc_value & 0x0001)
{
crc_value = (crc_value>>1)^ 0xa001;
}
else
{
crc_value = crc_value>>1;
}
}
}
return(crc_value);
}
This only describes the theory of CRC check and requires a long execution time.
Especially when the check data is long, the calculation time will be too long. Thus, the
following two table lookup methods are applied for 16-bit and 8-bit controllers,
respectively.
 CRC16 lookup table for the 8-bit processor: (The high byte in the final result of this
program is in front. Please reverse it during sending.)
const Uint8 crc_l_tab[256] = {
0x00,0xC1,0x81,0x40,0x01,0xC0,0x80,0x41,0x01,0xC0,0x80,0x41,0x00,0xC1,0x81,0x40,
289
0x00,0xC1,0x81,0x40,0x01,0xC0,0x80,0x41,0x01,0xC0,0x80,0x41,0x00,0xC1,0x81,0x40
};
constUint8 crc_h_tab[256] = {
0x00,0xC0,0xC1,0x01,0xC3,0x03,0x02,0xC2,0xC6,0x06,0x07,0xC7,0x05,0xC5,0xC4,0x04,
0xCC,0x0C,0x0D,0xCD,0x0F,0xCF,0xCE,0x0E,0x0A,0xCA,0xCB,0x0B,0xC9,0x09,0x08,0xC8,
0xD8,0x18,0x19,0xD9,0x1B,0xDB,0xDA,0x1A,0x1E,0xDE,0xDF,0x1F,0xDD,0x1D,0x1C,0xDC,
0x14,0xD4,0xD5,0x15,0xD7,0x17,0x16,0xD6,0xD2,0x12,0x13,0xD3,0x11,0xD1,0xD0,0x10,
0xF0,0x30,0x31,0xF1,0x33,0xF3,0xF2,0x32,0x36,0xF6,0xF7,0x37,0xF5,0x35,0x34,0xF4,
0x3C,0xFC,0xFD,0x3D,0xFF,0x3F,0x3E,0xFE,0xFA,0x3A,0x3B,0xFB,0x39,0xF9,0xF8,0x38,
0x28,0xE8,0xE9,0x29,0xEB,0x2B,0x2A,0xEA,0xEE,0x2E,0x2F,0xEF,0x2D,0xED,0xEC,0x2C,
0xE4,0x24,0x25,0xE5,0x27,0xE7,0xE6,0x26,0x22,0xE2,0xE3,0x23,0xE1,0x21,0x20,0xE0,
0xA0,0x60,0x61,0xA1,0x63,0xA3,0xA2,0x62,0x66,0xA6,0xA7,0x67,0xA5,0x65,0x64,0xA4,
0x6C,0xAC,0xAD,0x6D,0xAF,0x6F,0x6E,0xAE,0xAA,0x6A,0x6B,0xAB,0x69,0xA9,0xA8,0x68,
0x78,0xB8,0xB9,0x79,0xBB,0x7B,0x7A,0xBA,0xBE,0x7E,0x7F,0xBF,0x7D,0xBD,0xBC,0x7C,
0xB4,0x74,0x75,0xB5,0x77,0xB7,0xB6,0x76,0x72,0xB2,0xB3,0x73,0xB1,0x71,0x70,0xB0,
0x50,0x90,0x91,0x51,0x93,0x53,0x52,0x92,0x96,0x56,0x57,0x97,0x55,0x95,0x94,0x54,
0x9C,0x5C,0x5D,0x9D,0x5F,0x9F,0x9E,0x5E,0x5A,0x9A,0x9B,0x5B,0x99,0x59,0x58,0x98,
0x88,0x48,0x49,0x89,0x4B,0x8B,0x8A,0x4A,0x4E,0x8E,0x8F,0x4F,0x8D,0x4D,0x4C,0x8C,
0x44,0x84,0x85,0x45,0x87,0x47,0x46,0x86,0x82,0x42,0x43,0x83,0x41,0x81,0x80,0x40
};
Uint16CRC(Uint8 * buffer, Uint8 crc_len)
{
Uint8 crc_i,crc_lsb,crc_msb;
Uint16 crc;
290
crc_msb = 0xFF;
crc_lsb = 0xFF;
while(crc_len--)
{
crc_i = crc_lsb ^ *buffer;
buffer ++;
crc_lsb = crc_msb ^ crc_l_tab[crc_i];
crc_msb = crc_h_tab[crc_i];
}
crc = crc_msb;
crc = (crc << 8) + crc_lsb;
return crc;
}
 CRC16 lookup table for the 16-bit processor (the high byte in the final result of this
program is in front; please reverse it during sending):
const Uint16 crc_table[256] = {
0x0000,0xC1C0,0x81C1,0x4001,0x01C3,0xC003,0x8002,0x41C2,0x01C6,0xC006
,0x8007,0x41C7,0x0005,0xC1C5,0x81C4,0x4004,0x01CC,0xC00C,0x800D,0x41CD
,0x000F,0xC1CF,0x81CE,0x400E,0x000A,0xC1CA,0x81CB,0x400B,0x01C9,0xC009
,0x8008,0x41C8,0x01D8,0xC018,0x8019,0x41D9,0x001B,0xC1DB,0x81DA,0x401A
,0x001E,0xC1DE,0x81DF,0x401F,0x01DD,0xC01D,0x801C,0x41DC,0x0014,0xC1D4
,0x81D5,0x4015,0x01D7,0xC017,0x8016,0x41D6,0x01D2,0xC012,0x8013,0x41D3
,0x0011,0xC1D1,0x81D0,0x4010,0x01F0,0xC030,0x8031,0x41F1,0x0033,0xC1F3
,0x81F2,0x4032,0x0036,0xC1F6,0x81F7,0x4037,0x01F5,0xC035,0x8034,0x41F4
,0x003C,0xC1FC,0x81FD,0x403D,0x01FF,0xC03F,0x803E,0x41FE,0x01FA,0xC03A
,0x803B,0x41FB,0x0039,0xC1F9,0x81F8,0x4038,0x0028,0xC1E8,0x81E9,0x4029
,0x01EB,0xC02B,0x802A,0x41EA,0x01EE,0xC02E,0x802F,0x41EF,0x002D,0xC1ED
,0x81EC,0x402C,0x01E4,0xC024,0x8025,0x41E5,0x0027,0xC1E7,0x81E6,0x4026
,0x0022,0xC1E2,0x81E3,0x4023,0x01E1,0xC021,0x8020,0x41E0,0x01A0,0xC060
,0x8061,0x41A1,0x0063,0xC1A3,0x81A2,0x4062,0x0066,0xC1A6,0x81A7,0x4067
,0x01A5,0xC065,0x8064,0x41A4,0x006C,0xC1AC,0x81AD,0x406D,0x01AF,0xC06F
,0x806E,0x41AE,0x01AA,0xC06A,0x806B,0x41AB,0x0069,0xC1A9,0x81A8,0x4068
291
,0x0078,0xC1B8,0x81B9,0x4079,0x01BB,0xC07B,0x807A,0x41BA,0x01BE,0xC07E
,0x807F,0x41BF,0x007D,0xC1BD,0x81BC,0x407C,0x01B4,0xC074,0x8075,0x41B5
,0x0077,0xC1B7,0x81B6,0x4076,0x0072,0xC1B2,0x81B3,0x4073,0x01B1,0xC071
,0x8070,0x41B0,0x0050,0xC190,0x8191,0x4051,0x0193,0xC053,0x8052,0x4192
,0x0196,0xC056,0x8057,0x4197,0x0055,0xC195,0x8194,0x4054,0x019C,0xC05C
,0x805D,0x419D,0x005F,0xC19F,0x819E,0x405E,0x005A,0xC19A,0x819B,0x405B
,0x0199,0xC059,0x8058,0x4198,0x0188,0xC048,0x8049,0x4189,0x004B,0xC18B
,0x818A,0x404A,0x004E,0xC18E,0x818F,0x404F,0x018D,0xC04D,0x804C,0x418C
,0x0044,0xC184,0x8185,0x4045,0x0187,0xC047,0x8046,0x4186,0x0182,0xC042
,0x8043,0x4183,0x0041,0xC181,0x8180,0x4040};
Uint16 CRC16(Uint16 *msg , Uint16 len){
Uint16 crcL = 0xFF , crcH = 0xFF;
Uint16 index;
while(len--){
index = crcL ^ *msg++;
crcL = ((crc_table[index] & 0xFF00) >> 8) ^ (crcH);
crcH = crc_table[index] & 0xFF;
}
return (crcH<<8) | (crcL);
}
12.3.7 Exception response

When the master station sends a request to the slave station, the master station expects
a normal response. Query of the master station may result in one of the following four
events:
 If a request without communication error is received from the slave station and
can be processed properly, a normal response will be returned by the slave
station.
 If the slave station does not receive a request due to communication errors, no
message will be returned. This will be regarded as a timeout by the slave
station.
 If the slave station receives a request but detects a communication error (parity,
292
address, frame error, etc.), no response will be returned. This will be regarded as
a timeout by the slave station.
 If the slave station receives a request without communication error but cannot
process the request (e.g. a request to read the non-existent register), the slave
station will return an exception response and the master station will be informed
of the actual error.
The exception response message has two fields different from those of the normal
response:
 Function code field: In the normal response, the slave station copies the
function code of the original request in the corresponding function code field.
The MSB values of all function codes are 0. In the exception response, the MSB
of the function code is set to 1 by the slave station. That is, the exception
response function code = normal response function code + 0x80.
 Data field: The slave station can return the data from the data field in the normal
response and exception code in the exception response. For the defined
exception codes, see Table 0-4 Definitions of Exception CodesTable 0-4.
Table 0-4 Definitions of Exception Codes
Exception Item Meaning
code
The function code received by the slave station (inverter) is
01H Illegal function
beyond the configured range (see 12.3.3 Function code).
The data address received by the slave station (inverter) is not
Illegal data allowed. In particular, the combination of the start address of
02H
address the register and the transmission length is invalid (see 12.3.4
Register address distribution).
Illegal data The slave station (inverter) has detected the incorrect query
03H
frame data frame length or CRC check.
When the slave station (inverter) tries to execute a requested
04H Slave failure operation, an unrecoverable error occurs. This may be caused
by the logic error, failure to write to the EEPROM, etc.
The data received by the slave station (inverter) is not
05H Data over-range between the minimum and maximum values of the
corresponding register.
Parameter The current register is read-only and cannot be written.
06H
read-only
07H Unchangeable When the inverter is in the running status, the current register
293
parameter in cannot be written. If necessary, please shut down the inverter.
running
Parameter The current register is protected by a password.
08H protection by
password
12.4 Protocol Description

12.4.1 Definition of inter-frame and intra-frame time interval
A complete MODBUS message contains not only the necessary data units, but also the
starting and ending tags. Thus, as shown in Fig. 0-1 or Fig. 0-3, the idle level with a
transmission time of 3.5 characters or more is defined as the starting and ending tag. If
there is an idle level with a transmission time of more than 1.5 characters during message
transmission, the transmission will be deemed exceptional.
Specific starting/ending and exception intervals are related to the baud rate, as detailed
in Table 0-5. If the baud rate is 9,600bps and the sampling period is 1ms, the starting and
ending time interval is the idle level of 4ms or more (3.5×10/9600=3.64≈4), and the
exceptional data interval is the idle level in which the interval of data bits of one frame is
greater than or equal to 2ms (1.5×10/9600=1.56≈2) and less than 4m (the idle level of
normal data bits is less than or equal to 1ms).
Table 0-5 Correspondence between Time Interval and Baud Rate (tadjust=1ms)
Starting and Exception
Baud Rate ending time interval
Remarks
(bps) interval Texception
Tinterval (tadjust) (tadjust)
The idle level of 3ms or less is allowed for a
4800 8 4 normal frame. When the idle level is 8ms or
greater, it indicates the end of a frame of data.
The idle level of 1ms or less is allowed for a
The idle level of less than 1ms is allowed for a
When an idle level of 1ms appears, it indicates
Higher 1 1
the end of a frame.
294
Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3
Exceptional
frame Normal
t0
< 1.5 characters 3.5 characters
At least 3.5 At least 3.5 > 1.5 characters
characters characters 4.5 characters
Fig. 0-3 Schematic Diagram of Normal and Exceptional Data Frames
12.4.2 Data frame processing

Upon receiving a frame data, the system will first perform preprocessing to determine
whether it is a legal frame sent to this machine and check whether the data is correct,
followed by final processing. If the received frame is not legal, the data will not be sent
back. If the received frame is legal but incorrect, the corresponding exceptional message
frame will be sent back.
Legal frame: Meet the address (local or broadcast) and length (not less than 3)
requirements.
Correct frame: It is a legal frame with a correct memory address. The memory content
is within the defined range and can be processed at present.
12.4.3 Response delay

The response delay (depending on the function code F10.04) is defined as the time
interval from the reception of valid data frame[7] (data in the RS-485 network, different
from the command sent by the keyboard) to data parsing and return. Since the starting and
ending characters are defined in the standard protocol, it is impossible to avoid response
delay, at least “3.5-character time interval + 1 ms (chip stabilization time of 485 protocol,
twait2)”. The specific minimum time interval is related to the baud rate. If the baud rate is
9600bps, the minimum response delay is 5ms (3.5×10/9600+1=4.64≈5).
If the communication data involves EEPROM operation, the time interval will
be longer.
[7]: Valid data frame: Sent by the external master station (not keyboard) to this
295
machine. The function code, length and CRC of the data are correct.
Fig. 0-4 shows the data sending segment (tsend), sending end segment (twait1),
75176-to-sending wait segment (twait2), data return segment (treturn), and 75176-to-receiving
wait segment (twait3).
t
twait 2 t wait 3
tsend twait 1 treturn
Fig. 0-4 Timing Parse Diagram of Complete Data Frame
12.4.4 Communication timeout

The communication time interval △t is defined as the period from the previous
reception of valid data frames by the slave station (inverter) to next reception of valid data
frames. If △t is greater than the set time (depending on the function code F10.03; this
function is invalid if set to 0), it will be regarded communication timeout.
Fig. 0-5 Schematic Diagram of Network Link Data 485
12.5 Examples
1) Forward running of inverter
Send: 01 41 70 0000 01 E6 C5
Return: 01 41 70 0000 01 E6 C5 (normal)
Return: 01 C1 04 70 53 (exception, assuming a slave fault)
296
Send the invoice to Normal Return Exception Return
* Frame header ≥3.5 characters (idle)
1 Address 01 Address 01 Address 01
2 Function code 41 Function code 41 Function code C1
3 Register address 70 Register address Hi 70 Exception code 04 (assumption)
Hi
4 Register address 00 Register address Lo 00 CRC check Lo 70
L
o
5 Register value Hi 00 Register value Hi 00 CRC check Hi 53
6 Register value 01 Register value Lo 01
L
o
7 CRC check Lo ECRC check Lo E6
6
8 CRC check Hi C CRC check Hi C5
5
* Tail ≥3.5 characters (idle)
2) Free stop of inverter

Send: 01 41 70 0000 07 66 C7
Return: 01 41 70 0000 07 66 C7 (normal)

Hi
L
o
L
o
7 CRC check Lo 66 CRC check Lo 66
8 CRC check Hi C CRC check Hi C7
7
297
3) Command word for change of set frequency (e.g. 50.00Hz/1388H) (F00.04=7)

Send: 01 41 70 15 13 88 3B 97
Return: 01 41 70 15 13 88 3B 97 (normal)
Hi
Lo
Lo
7 CRC check Lo 3 CRC check Lo 3B
B
8 CRC check Hi 97 CRC check Hi 97
1) Read the information of the last fault (read the function codes F19.00 to F19.05).
Send: 01 03 13 00 00 06 C1 4C
Return: 01 03 0C 00 11 00 00 00 00 01 2C 00 00 00 0053 5B (normal)
Return: 01 83 04 40 F3 (exception, assuming a slave fault)
2 Function code 03 Function code 03 Function code 83
3 Starting address 13 Number of bytes 0C Exception code 04 (assumption)
Hi
4 Starting address 00 Register value Hi 00 CRC check Lo 40
Lo (F19.00)
5 Number (Hi) of 00 Register value Lo 11 CRC check Hi F3
registers (F19.00)
6 Number (Lo) of 06 Register value Hi 00
registers (F19.01)
7 CRC check Lo C Register value Lo 00
(F19.01) 1
298
8 CRC check Hi 4 Register value Hi 00
(F19.02) C
9 Register value Lo 00
(F19.02)
10 Register value Hi 01
(F19.03)
11 Register value Lo 2C
(F19.03)
(F19.04)
(F19.04)
(F19.05)
(F19.05)
16 CRC check Lo 53
17 CRC check Hi 5B
2) Check whether the line is connected.

Send: 01 08 00 00 AA 55 5E 94
Return: 01 08 00 00 AA 55 5E 94 (normal)
Return: 01 88 04 47 C3 (exception, assuming a slave fault)
2 Function 08 Function 08 Function code 88
3 Sub-function 00 Sub-function code 00 Exception code 04 (assumption)
code Hi Hi
4 Sub-function 00 Sub-function code 00 CRC check Lo 47
code Lo Lo
5 Data Hi AA Data Hi AA CRC check Hi C3
6 Data Lo 55 Data Lo 55
7 CRC check Lo 5E CRC check Lo 5E
8 CRC check Hi 94 CRC check Hi 94
3) Change the carrier frequency (F00.23) to 4.0kHz. (use the function code 0x06 as such
function codes are expected to be stored in EEPROM after change)
Send: 01 06 00 17 00 28 39 D0
299
Return: 01 06 00 17 00 28 39 D0 (normal)
Return: 01 86 04 43 A3 (exception, assuming a slave fault)

2 Function code 06 Function code 06 Function code 86
Hi
Lo
5 Register value Hi 00 Register value Hi 00 CRC check Hi A3
6 Register value Lo 28 Register value Lo 28
7 CRC check Lo 39 CRC check Lo 39
8 CRC check Hi D0 CRC check Hi D0
300

A90umanual VDF Sinee

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A90umanual VDF Sinee

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A90umanual VDF Sinee

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual of A90 Series Inverter

Document No.: 31010180

The A90 series inverter is a high-reliability and small-sized inverter launched by

Features of the A90 series inverter:

Danger: The dangers caused by nonconforming operations may include serious

injuries and even deaths.

Warning: The danger caused by nonconforming operations, including moderate or

minor injuries and equipment damage.

1. Handle the controller with care; otherwise, it may be damaged!

Thermal protection of motor

Operation above power frequency

About motor heat and noise

Presence of voltage-dependent device or capacitor increasing the power factor on

Use beyond rated voltage

Lightning impulse protection

Altitude and derating

Precautions for scrapping of inverter

Chapter 1 Overview ...................................................................................... 10

Chapter 2 Installation ................................................................................... 20

Chapter 4 KEYBOARD OPERATIONS..................................................... 47

Chapter 5 Trial run ....................................................................................... 55

Chapter 6 Function Code Table ................................................................... 63

Chapter 7 Function Code Details ............................................................... 114

7.19 Fault Record Parameter Group of F19 Group ....................................................... 248

Chapter 8 Motor Parameter Self-identification ....................................... 252

Chapter 9 Fault/Warning Solutions........................................................... 255

Chapter 10 Maintenance ............................................................................ 264

Chapter 11 Select accessories ..................................................................... 267

Chapter 12 MODBUS Communication Protocol ..................................... 271

1.1 Model and Specification of A90 Series Inverter

Rated voltage Applicable Heavy-duty Light-duty

Single-phase/ A90-2T2R8B 0.4 2.8 3.2

Input frequency Digital input: 0.01Hz/0.1Hz

1.2 Detailed Introduction to Running Status of A90 series Inverter

Setting of main frequency

Limit of the set frequency: F00.16; direction: F00.21

Synthetic frequency gain of main and auxiliary

Analog adjustment options

Fig. 1-1 Schematic Diagram of Speed Input Mode

0: digital frequency UP/DOWN

Fig. 1-2 Schematic diagram of Setting of Main Frequency Source A

0: digital frequency setting F00.07

10: process PID

11: simple PLC

Fig. 1-3 Schematic Diagram of Setting of Auxiliary Frequency Source B

Fig. 1-4 Schematic Diagram of Setting of Main and Auxiliary Operations

 Torque setting mode with the motor current as controlled target

Fig. 1-5 Schematic Diagram of Torque Input Mode

0 0 Reverse PLC 0 0 Stop PLC

1 1 Stop COM 1 1 Stop COM

0: closed 1: disconnected 0: closed 1: disconnected

Forward PLC Stop

COM 0 Reverse COM

Fig. 1-6 Control Logic Diagram of Terminal Operation

2.1 Product check

 Never install the inverter damaged or with some parts missing.

 Description of inverter model

2.2 Outline dimensions and installation dimensions

(a) Appearance of A90-4T1R5B to A90-4T045B inverters